SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual

SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
®
Features and Specifications Manual
INT-2067 (UNIV)
Issue 12.0
(Version 9000)
NEC Corporation of America reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Corporation of America has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers.
The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America.
Dterm, NEAX and UNIVERGE are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a
registered trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows and Outlook are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. AT&T, the AT&T logo and all other AT&T marks are trademarks of AT&T
Intellectual Property and/or AT&T affiliated companies. Lucent Technologies is a trademark or service
mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of
Nortel Networks. Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services, LLC. Pentium is a
trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries. AutoTalk is a trademark of Uniden America Corporation. ViewCall and ViewMail are
registered trademarks of Active Voice, LLC. Adobe, Flash and Reader are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. The Google Chrome
browser is a trademark of Google Inc. Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla
Foundation. SonicView is a trademark of TriVium Systems, Inc. iPhone is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. App StoreSM is a service mark of Apple Inc. Salesforce.com is a registered trademark of
Salesforce.com, inc. Tigerpaw is a registered trademark of Tigerpaw Software, Inc.
Copyright 2013
NEC Corporation of America
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Communications Technology Group
Preface
Before Reading this Manual
This manual provides detailed information for each of the system’s features. If you are not familiar with
the features, the Table of Contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature within
the manual.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC UNIVERGE SV8100 System.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system is a feature-rich key system that provides many features including
Automatic Call Distribution, IP Station and IP Trunk support, ISDN compatibility, PBX compatibility,
TAPI compatibility, Voice over Internet Protocol and Uniform Call Distribution.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system meets the customer needs today, and as business expands, the
system can be expanded to grow as well.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to
install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
UNIVERGE SV8100 General Description Manual
This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and can be used to
present information to potential customers.
SV8100 System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed
instructions for installing the SV8100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment.
UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system using a multiline
terminal or PC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1
General Information .........................................................................................1-1
Section 2
Multiline Terminals used with the System........................................................1-1
Chapter 2
Features
Section 1
About This Chapter ..........................................................................................2-1
Section 2
Important Notes ...............................................................................................2-2
Section 3
IPK II to UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Comparison List ..................................2-2
Section 4
Features.........................................................................................................2-10
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified ....................................................... 2-11
Account Code Entry............................................................................................ 2-19
Alarm .................................................................................................................. 2-25
Alarm Reports..................................................................................................... 2-29
Alphanumeric Display......................................................................................... 2-43
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) ............................................................ 2-47
Ancillary Device Connection............................................................................... 2-55
Answer Hold ....................................................................................................... 2-59
Answer Key ........................................................................................................ 2-63
Attendant Call Queuing ...................................................................................... 2-67
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ...................................................................... 2-71
Automatic Release ........................................................................................... 2-103
Automatic Route Selection ............................................................................... 2-109
Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink ..............................2-113
Background Music ............................................................................................ 2-139
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
i
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Barge-In............................................................................................................ 2-143
Battery Backup – System Memory ................................................................... 2-149
Battery Backup – System Power...................................................................... 2-151
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys ........................................................................... 2-153
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys .................................................................................... 2-159
Call Duration Timer .......................................................................................... 2-165
Call Forwarding – Centrex................................................................................ 2-167
Call Forwarding ................................................................................................ 2-173
Call Forwarding with Follow Me ....................................................................... 2-187
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise ........................................................................... 2-191
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override......................................................... 2-207
Call Monitoring ................................................................................................. 2-211
Call Redirect..................................................................................................... 2-219
Call Waiting/Camp-On...................................................................................... 2-223
Callback............................................................................................................ 2-229
Caller ID Call Return ........................................................................................ 2-233
Caller ID ........................................................................................................... 2-237
Memo Display Function.........................................................................................2-242
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing.............................................................................. 2-255
Central Office Calls, Answering........................................................................ 2-263
Central Office Calls, Placing............................................................................. 2-275
Class of Service ............................................................................................... 2-287
Clock/Calendar Display .................................................................................... 2-307
CO Message Waiting Indication ....................................................................... 2-311
Code Restriction............................................................................................... 2-317
Code Restriction Override ................................................................................ 2-327
Code Restriction, Dial Block............................................................................. 2-335
Conference....................................................................................................... 2-339
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release.......................................................... 2-347
Continued Dialing ............................................................................................. 2-351
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Cordless DECT Terminals................................................................................ 2-355
Cordless Telephone Connection ...................................................................... 2-375
Data Line Security ............................................................................................ 2-393
Delayed Ringing ............................................................................................... 2-395
Department Calling........................................................................................... 2-401
Department Step Calling .................................................................................. 2-413
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone ............................................................................. 2-417
Dial Tone Detection .......................................................................................... 2-419
Dialing Number Preview ................................................................................... 2-423
Digital Trunk Clocking....................................................................................... 2-427
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)............................................................................... 2-433
Direct Inward Line (DIL).................................................................................... 2-455
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................... 2-461
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ........................................................... 2-479
Directed Call Pickup ......................................................................................... 2-489
Directory Dialing ............................................................................................... 2-493
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns................................................. 2-497
Do Not Disturb .................................................................................................. 2-509
Door Box........................................................................................................... 2-515
Drop Key........................................................................................................... 2-523
Dterm Cordless II Terminal ................................................................................ 2-527
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal ......................................................................... 2-549
DTPlusWare ..................................................................................................... 2-569
Ecology............................................................................................................. 2-577
E911 Compatibility............................................................................................ 2-587
Electra Elite IPK Terminals............................................................................... 2-623
Facsimile CO Branch Connection .................................................................... 2-645
Flash................................................................................................................. 2-649
Flexible System Numbering.............................................................................. 2-653
Flexible Timeouts ............................................................................................. 2-673
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
iii
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Forced Trunk Disconnect ................................................................................. 2-683
General Purpose Relay .................................................................................... 2-687
Group Call Pickup ............................................................................................ 2-693
Group Listen..................................................................................................... 2-697
Handset Mute ................................................................................................... 2-701
Handsfree and Monitor..................................................................................... 2-709
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing............................................ 2-713
Headset Operation ........................................................................................... 2-717
Hold .................................................................................................................. 2-721
Hot Key-Pad ..................................................................................................... 2-729
Hotel/Motel ....................................................................................................... 2-733
Hotline .............................................................................................................. 2-751
Howler Tone Service ........................................................................................ 2-757
Intercom ........................................................................................................... 2-759
IP Multiline Station (SIP) .................................................................................. 2-767
NAPT Traversal.....................................................................................................2-775
IP Multiline Station (SIP) – ML440 Cordless .................................................... 2-791
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP) ........................................................................ 2-807
STD SIP Transfer-Unattended ..............................................................................2-818
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol ..................................................... 2-833
SIP Trunk E.164 Support ......................................................................................2-835
SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement....................................................................2-837
Video Support over SIP Trunks.............................................................................2-838
IP Trunk – H.323 .............................................................................................. 2-865
IPK/IPK II Migration .......................................................................................... 2-877
IP/Digital Call Logging ...................................................................................... 2-887
ISDN Compatibility ........................................................................................... 2-891
ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer ..................................................................................2-897
IVR – Appointment Reminder Server ............................................................... 2-917
IVR – Broadcast Server.................................................................................... 2-925
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
K-CCIS – IP ...................................................................................................... 2-933
CCIS Networking via IP (Peer to Peer Connections Basis) ..................................2-937
K-CCIS – IP with PVA ...................................................................................... 2-943
K-CCIS – T1 ..................................................................................................... 2-953
Last Number Redial.......................................................................................... 2-961
Licensing .......................................................................................................... 2-965
Temporary License ...............................................................................................2-971
Line Preference ................................................................................................ 2-981
Long Conversation Cutoff................................................................................. 2-987
Loop Keys......................................................................................................... 2-991
Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 2-997
Meet Me Conference ........................................................................................ 2-999
Meet Me Paging ............................................................................................. 2-1003
Meet Me Paging Transfer ............................................................................... 2-1009
Memo Dial ...................................................................................................... 2-1015
Message Waiting ............................................................................................ 2-1019
MH240 Wireless IP Telephone....................................................................... 2-1027
Microphone Cutoff .......................................................................................... 2-1063
Mobile Extension ............................................................................................ 2-1067
Callback to Cell Phone ........................................................................................2-1075
Multiple Trunk Types ...................................................................................... 2-1091
Music on Hold................................................................................................. 2-1111
Name Storing.................................................................................................. 2-1121
NEC Meeting Center (NMC)........................................................................... 2-1125
Night Service .................................................................................................. 2-1133
Off-Hook Signaling ......................................................................................... 2-1143
One-Touch Calling.......................................................................................... 2-1149
Operator ......................................................................................................... 2-1155
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension......................................................................... 2-1159
Paging, External ............................................................................................. 2-1169
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
v
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Paging, External (VRS) .................................................................................. 2-1177
Paging, Internal .............................................................................................. 2-1181
Park ................................................................................................................ 2-1187
Personal Park at a Co-Worker’s Extension .........................................................2-1189
PBX Compatibility........................................................................................... 2-1197
PC Programming............................................................................................ 2-1203
Outbound IP Connection.....................................................................................2-1212
Power Failure Transfer................................................................................... 2-1223
Prime Line Selection ...................................................................................... 2-1227
Private Line .................................................................................................... 2-1233
Programmable Function Keys ........................................................................ 2-1239
Programming from a Multiline Terminal ......................................................... 2-1245
Pulse to Tone Conversion .............................................................................. 2-1249
Redial Function .............................................................................................. 2-1253
Remote (System) Upgrade............................................................................. 2-1257
Repeat Redial................................................................................................. 2-1261
Resident System Program ............................................................................. 2-1265
Reverse Voice Over ....................................................................................... 2-1267
Ring Groups ................................................................................................... 2-1271
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External .......................................................... 2-1277
Room Monitor................................................................................................. 2-1281
Save Number Dialed ...................................................................................... 2-1287
Secondary Incoming Extension...................................................................... 2-1291
Secretary Call (Buzzer) .................................................................................. 2-1297
Secretary Call Pickup ..................................................................................... 2-1301
Security .......................................................................................................... 2-1305
Selectable Display Messaging ....................................................................... 2-1325
Selectable Ring Tones ................................................................................... 2-1331
Serial Call ....................................................................................................... 2-1335
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets ............................................ 2-1339
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
SLT Adapter ................................................................................................... 2-1351
SMB8000 Communications Analyst ............................................................... 2-1369
SMB8000 E911 Security Notification ..................................................................2-1379
SMB8000 Conference Bridge......................................................................... 2-1383
SMB8000 Conference Bridge – Outlook Integration ...................................... 2-1395
Softkeys.......................................................................................................... 2-1415
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station............................................................... 2-1419
Speed Dial – Telephone Book........................................................................ 2-1439
Station Hunt.................................................................................................... 2-1447
Station Message Detail Recording ................................................................. 2-1451
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable.......................................... 2-1477
Station Relocation .......................................................................................... 2-1481
SV8100 Internal Router .................................................................................. 2-1485
SV8100 NetLink.............................................................................................. 2-1489
NetLink Multi-SIP Carrier ....................................................................................2-1495
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch ........................................................................... 2-1507
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications......................................................... 2-1515
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals ............................................................................ 2-1541
Synchronous Ringing ..................................................................................... 2-1557
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) .................................................... 2-1561
Tandem Ringing ............................................................................................. 2-1575
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) .............................................. 2-1579
TAPI Compatibility .......................................................................................... 2-1597
Tone Override................................................................................................. 2-1603
Traffic Reports ................................................................................................ 2-1607
Transfer .......................................................................................................... 2-1611
Trunk Group Routing ...................................................................................... 2-1625
Trunk Groups.................................................................................................. 2-1631
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On ............................................................................... 2-1637
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
vii
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
UCB (Unified Communications for Business)................................................. 2-1641
Call Processing ...................................................................................................2-1648
Agent and Supervisor Functions .........................................................................2-1650
Announcement Function .....................................................................................2-1651
Voicemail Function..............................................................................................2-1652
InUCB Blade .......................................................................................................2-1654
UM8000 Mail .................................................................................................. 2-1671
uMobility – Server Based ............................................................................... 2-1699
uMobility – Wi-Fi Client................................................................................... 2-1715
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode ...................................................................... 2-1729
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ..................................................................... 2-1737
Uniform Numbering Network .......................................................................... 2-1747
Universal Slots ............................................................................................... 2-1755
User Programming Ability............................................................................... 2-1771
Virtual Extensions........................................................................................... 2-1773
VM8000 InMail ............................................................................................... 2-1785
VM8000 InMail Park and Page....................................................................... 2-1835
VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio........................................................ 2-1843
VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID................................. 2-1853
VM8000 InMail – Cascade Message Notification........................................... 2-1861
VM8000 InMail – Email Notification................................................................ 2-1887
VM8000 InMail – Find-Me Follow-Me............................................................. 2-1897
VM8000 InMail – Language Setting ............................................................... 2-1907
Voice Call Recording...................................................................................... 2-1913
Dterm ® Voice Security Recorder (VSR) ..............................................................2-1913
NEC SonicView™ IP Recorder (1.0) ...................................................................2-1917
NEC SonicView Recorder (TDM and IP) (2.0) ....................................................2-1923
NEC SonicView Recorder (2.7)...........................................................................2-1929
Voice Mail Integration (Analog) ...................................................................... 2-1941
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys ................................................. 2-1963
Voice Over...................................................................................................... 2-1969
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Voice Response System (VRS)...................................................................... 2-1973
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS........................................... 2-1997
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio .............................. 2-2011
Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page............. 2-2019
Volume Controls ............................................................................................. 2-2025
Warning Tone for Long Conversation............................................................. 2-2029
Wireless DECT (SIP)...................................................................................... 2-2033
Off-Hook Signaling ..............................................................................................2-2044
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer ................................................................2-2045
Out of Range Call Warning Notification ..............................................................2-2046
Chapter 3
Codes Tables
Section 1
About This Chapter ..........................................................................................3-1
Section 2
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operations with One-Touch Key Operation .....3-1
Section 3
Using Handsfree ..............................................................................................3-2
Chapter 4
Section 1
Feature Availability by Software
Revision
Feature Availability Chart.................................................................................4-1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
ix
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
x
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1-1
SV8100 Key Assignment Example .............................................................. 1-2
Figure 1-2
Feature Access/One-Touch Key Assignment Example ............................... 1-3
Figure 2-1
Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ..................................................... 2-238
Figure 2-2
Department Calling Priority Call Routing ................................................. 2-404
Figure 2-3
Department Calling Circular Routing ....................................................... 2-405
Figure 2-4
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1 ............................................................ 2-428
Figure 2-5
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2 ............................................................ 2-429
Figure 2-6
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3 ............................................................ 2-429
Figure 2-7
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4 ............................................................ 2-429
Figure 2-8
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5 ............................................................ 2-430
Figure 2-9
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6 ............................................................ 2-430
Figure 2-10
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7 ............................................................ 2-430
Figure 2-11
Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 ............................................................ 2-431
Figure 2-12
Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ....................................................... 2-499
Figure 2-13
ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ......................................................... 2-500
Figure 2-14
Automatic Night Service ........................................................................... 2-583
Figure 2-15
Multiline Terminal Darkens ...................................................................... 2-586
Figure 2-16
CCIS Standard Calls ................................................................................ 2-593
Figure 2-17
CCIS VE Standard Calls .......................................................................... 2-596
Figure 2-18
CCIS 911 Calls ........................................................................................ 2-604
Figure 2-19
CCIS VE 911 Calls ................................................................................... 2-608
Figure 2-20
Example – NAT Traversal ........................................................................ 2-776
Figure 2-21
ML440 Cordless Handset ........................................................................ 2-791
Figure 2-22
Example – SIP Phone .............................................................................. 2-830
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
xi
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-23
Single SV8100 to IPK/IPK II Connection ................................................. 2-878
Figure 2-24
Multiple SV8100 to IPK/IPK II Connection (Layout 1) .............................. 2-879
Figure 2-25
Multiple SV8100 to IPK/IPK II Connection (Layout 2) .............................. 2-880
Figure 2-26
Multiple SV8100 to IPK/IPK II Connection (Layout 3) .............................. 2-881
Figure 2-27
Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ..................................................... 2-961
Figure 2-28
Mobile Extension Layout ........................................................................ 2-1068
Figure 2-29
Example – Callback to Cell Phone ........................................................ 2-1075
Figure 2-30
PC Programming Overview ................................................................... 2-1204
Figure 2-31
PCPro Connection Dialog ...................................................................... 2-1205
Figure 2-32
WebPro Login Screen ............................................................................ 2-1206
Figure 2-33
WebPro Home Page .............................................................................. 2-1206
Figure 2-34
Maintenance Debug Screen .................................................................. 2-1207
Figure 2-35
WebPro End User Screen ..................................................................... 2-1208
Figure 2-36
Idle Terminal Display ............................................................................. 2-1309
Figure 2-37
Confirm Ring Time DIsplay .................................................................... 2-1309
Figure 2-38
No Answer Display ................................................................................ 2-1311
Figure 2-39
E911 Deployment Example ................................................................... 2-1379
Figure 2-40
Conference Bridge – Schedule New Conference .................................. 2-1400
Figure 2-41
Conference Bridge – Download Outlook Plugin .................................... 2-1400
Figure 2-42
File Download – Open ........................................................................... 2-1401
Figure 2-43
Add or Remove Programs – Currently Installed Programs Example ..... 2-1402
Figure 2-44
New Toolbars Added – Outlook 2007 .................................................... 2-1402
Figure 2-45
New Toolbars Added – Outlook 2010 .................................................... 2-1403
Figure 2-46
NEC Bridge Settings Screen – Outlook 2007 ........................................ 2-1404
Figure 2-47
NEC Bridge Settings Screen – Outlook 2010 ........................................ 2-1404
Figure 2-48
Schedule NEC Meeting – Using Default Options .................................. 2-1405
Figure 2-49
Meeting Scheduled with Meeting ID Example ....................................... 2-1406
___________________________________________________________________________________
xii
List of Figures
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-50
Meeting Scheduled Example ................................................................. 2-1406
Figure 2-51
Schedule NEC Meeting – Using Advanced Options .............................. 2-1407
Figure 2-52
Schedule a Recurring NEC Meeting ...................................................... 2-1409
Figure 2-53
Editing a NEC Meeting ........................................................................... 2-1410
Figure 2-54
NEC Meeting Delete .............................................................................. 2-1411
Figure 2-55
NEC Meeting Delete Confirmation ......................................................... 2-1411
Figure 2-56
Delete NEC Meeting .............................................................................. 2-1411
Figure 2-57
NEC Meeting Delete Confirmation ......................................................... 2-1412
Figure 2-58
Email and iCalendar for Recurring Meeting ........................................... 2-1412
Figure 2-59
Conference Scheduled from Web UI ..................................................... 2-1413
Figure 2-60
Meeting Scheduled Example ................................................................. 2-1413
Figure 2-61
Cancelled – Conference Scheduled from Web UI ................................. 2-1414
Figure 2-62
Right Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart ................................................ 2-1421
Figure 2-63
Example of SMDR Report ...................................................................... 2-1455
Figure 2-64
Virtual Loopback – S-Point .................................................................... 2-1455
Figure 2-65
Example of S-Point Report .................................................................... 2-1456
Figure 2-66
Example of S-Point Report (Flagged) .................................................... 2-1456
Figure 2-67
Virtual Loopback – T-Point ..................................................................... 2-1456
Figure 2-68
Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop ................................................ 2-1457
Figure 2-69
Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Order) ..................... 2-1457
Figure 2-70
Virtual Loopback – External Call Routed Through T-Point .................... 2-1457
Figure 2-71
Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop (Reverse Direction) ................ 2-1458
Figure 2-72
Example – Version 4000 or Earlier ........................................................ 2-1495
Figure 2-73
Example – Version 5000 ........................................................................ 2-1496
Figure 2-74
SV8100 Encryption Configuration .......................................................... 2-1542
Figure 2-75
VPN Between Smart Device and Office LAN ......................................... 2-1718
Figure 2-76
Port Forwarding without Session Boarder Controller ............................. 2-1719
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
xiii
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-77
Port Forwarding with Session Boarder Controller .................................. 2-1720
Figure 2-78
Multicast Mode Example ........................................................................ 2-1730
Figure 2-79
Unicast Mode Example .......................................................................... 2-1730
Figure 2-80
Auto Mode Example .............................................................................. 2-1731
Figure 2-81
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Priority Call Routing ............................ 2-1739
Figure 2-82
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Circular Routing .................................. 2-1740
Figure 2-83
VM8000 InMail User Pro Login Diagram ............................................... 2-1844
Figure 2-84
Example – User Access to Voice Mail ................................................... 2-1853
Figure 2-85
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-1 ......................................... 2-1864
Figure 2-86
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-2 ......................................... 2-1865
Figure 2-87
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart-3 ......................................... 2-1866
Figure 2-88
Cascade Message Flow Chart 1 ............................................................ 2-1884
Figure 2-89
Cascade Message Flow Chart 2 ............................................................ 2-1885
Figure 2-90
Program 22-02: Incoming Call Trunk Setup .......................................... 2-2001
Figure 2-91
Program 40-10: Voice Announcement Service Option .......................... 2-2001
Figure 2-92
Program 25-02: VRS/DISA Message .................................................... 2-2002
Figure 2-93
Program 25-06: VRS/DISA 1-digit Code Attendant
Setup – Example 1 ................................................................................ 2-2002
Figure 2-94
Program 25-06: VRS/DISA 1-digit Code Attendant
Setup – Example 2 ................................................................................ 2-2003
Figure 2-95
Program 25-06: VRS/DISA 1-digit Code Attendant
Setup – Example 3 ................................................................................ 2-2003
Figure 2-96
Program 25-06: VRS/DISA 1-digit Code Attendant
Setup – Example 4 ................................................................................ 2-2004
Figure 2-97
VRS User Pro Login Diagram ................................................................ 2-2012
Figure 2-98
IP DECT – 2nd Indication ...................................................................... 2-2044
Figure 2-99
IP DECT – Caller ID Display .................................................................. 2-2045
Figure 2-100
Out of Range Example .......................................................................... 2-2046
___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv
List of Figures
LIST OF TABLES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-1
Feature Comparison List ................................................................................ 2-2
Table 2-2
Sample Alarm Report ................................................................................... 2-30
Table 2-3
Alarm Report Definitions ............................................................................... 2-31
Table 2-4
Alarm Report Item Definitions ....................................................................... 2-31
Table 2-5
Sample System Information Printout ............................................................ 2-32
Table 2-6
DT330 Compatibility Settings ....................................................................... 2-56
Table 2-7
Firmware Compatibility Matrix ...................................................................... 2-56
Table 2-8
Keys for Entering Names ............................................................................ 2-250
Table 2-9
Caller ID Matching Rule .............................................................................. 2-257
Table 2-10
Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction ................................................... 2-422
Table 2-11
Example 2 (Manual Change) ...................................................................... 2-438
Table 2-12
Example 1 – Monday ~ Friday .................................................................... 2-440
Table 2-13
Example 2 – Saturday ................................................................................ 2-440
Table 2-14
Example 3 – Sunday .................................................................................. 2-440
Table 2-15
LED Flash Patterns .................................................................................... 2-453
Table 2-16
Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns .......................................... 2-497
Table 2-17
Basic Tone Table – Tone 06 ...................................................................... 2-505
Table 2-18
Basic Tone Table – Tone 14 ...................................................................... 2-505
Table 2-19
Basic Tone Table – Tone 39 ...................................................................... 2-506
Table 2-20
DTPlusWare OAI/TAPI License Feature Matrix ......................................... 2-570
Table 2-21
Program 12-02: Automatic Night Service Patterns ..................................... 2-583
Table 2-22
CPN for Standard Calls .............................................................................. 2-589
Table 2-23
CPN for VE Standard Calls ........................................................................ 2-590
Table 2-24
CPN for 911 Calls ....................................................................................... 2-591
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
xv
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-25
CPN for VE 911 Calls ................................................................................. 2-592
Table 2-26
CPN for CCIS Standard Calls .................................................................... 2-593
Table 2-27
CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls ............................................................... 2-597
Table 2-28
CPN for CCIS 911 Calls ............................................................................. 2-605
Table 2-29
CPN for CCIS VE 911 Calls ....................................................................... 2-609
Table 2-30
CPN for Line Key+911 Calls ....................................................................... 2-617
Table 2-31
Electra Elite IPK Telephone Specifications ................................................ 2-644
Table 2-32
General Purpose Relay Specifications ....................................................... 2-687
Table 2-33
Service Tone Setup Defaults, Program 80-01-01 ...................................... 2-703
Table 2-34
Service Tone Setup, Program 80-01-02 ..................................................... 2-707
Table 2-35
Migration Supported Blades ....................................................................... 2-739
Table 2-36
Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is
set to 1 (Enabled) ....................................................................................... 2-739
Table 2-37
Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42-01-06 is
set to 0 (Disabled) ...................................................................................... 2-740
Table 2-38
Extension Busy Setup ................................................................................ 2-756
Table 2-39
Default Incoming Ringing Tone .................................................................. 2-764
Table 2-40
Example – Required System Settings ........................................................ 2-776
Table 2-41
Example – Required IP Terminal Settings ................................................. 2-777
Table 2-42
Example – SV8100 System Router A Port Forwarding Settings ................ 2-777
Table 2-43
NAPT Terminals – Minimum Timer Settings .............................................. 2-779
Table 2-44
Minimum Bandwidth Requirements ............................................................ 2-808
Table 2-45
Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device ........................................ 2-811
Table 2-46
SIP INVITE Header Fields .......................................................................... 2-861
Table 2-47
Delete + from Incoming SIP INVITE ........................................................... 2-862
Table 2-48
Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE ............................. 2-863
Table 2-49
Delete + and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE ............................. 2-863
___________________________________________________________________________________
xvi
List of Tables
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-50
IPK II Supported Hardware ......................................................................... 2-882
Table 2-51
Supported Optional Equipment (via MGN-U10 ETU) ................................. 2-883
Table 2-52
Supported Optional Equipment .................................................................. 2-884
Table 2-53
Restrictions for Calling Party Names .......................................................... 2-893
Table 2-54
K-CCIS Main and Remote System VoIP Resources Used ......................... 2-937
Table 2-55
CD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 6 ............................................................. 2-945
Table 2-56
CD-PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 4 and Slot 6 ............................................ 2-945
Table 2-57
Minimum Bandwidth Required .................................................................... 2-946
Table 2-58
Migration Supported Blades ....................................................................... 2-950
Table 2-59
License Information .................................................................................... 2-974
Table 2-60
Supported Features .................................................................................. 2-1031
Table 2-61
Program 15-07 Function Codes (Service Code 751) ............................... 2-1040
Table 2-62
Program 15-07 Function Codes (Service Code 752) ............................... 2-1043
Table 2-63
Program 11-10 Service Code Setup (Setup/Entry Operation) .................. 2-1044
Table 2-64
Program 11-11 Service Code Setup (Setup/Entry Operation) .................. 2-1045
Table 2-65
Program 11-12 Service Code Setup (Service Access) ............................. 2-1048
Table 2-66
Program 11-13 Service Code Setup (ACD) .............................................. 2-1050
Table 2-67
Program 11-14 Service Code Setup (Hotel) ............................................. 2-1051
Table 2-68
Program 11-15 Service Code Setup (Special Access) ............................. 2-1052
Table 2-69
Supported Service Codes ......................................................................... 2-1069
Table 2-70
Caller ID Sent to Mobile Telephone .......................................................... 2-1073
Table 2-71
Keys for Entering Names .......................................................................... 2-1124
Table 2-72
Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device ...................................... 2-1126
Table 2-73
Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device ...................................... 2-1127
Table 2-74
Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device ...................................... 2-1128
Table 2-75
PCPro and WebPro Comparison .............................................................. 2-1219
Table 2-76
Selectable Display Messaging Defaults ................................................... 2-1325
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
xvii
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-77
Selectable Display Message – Character Entry Chart ............................. 2-1329
Table 2-78
Intercom or Trunk Ring Setting ................................................................ 2-1333
Table 2-79
Communications Analyst Support ............................................................ 2-1370
Table 2-80
Migration Supported Blades ..................................................................... 2-1387
Table 2-81
Keys for Entering Names ......................................................................... 2-1433
Table 2-82
SMDR Report Definitions ......................................................................... 2-1458
Table 2-83
SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to ‘0’ .......................... 2-1459
Table 2-84
SMDR Report Format with Program 35-02-14 Set to ‘1’ .......................... 2-1461
Table 2-85
SMDR Summary Report ........................................................................... 2-1462
Table 2-86
Keys for Entering Names ......................................................................... 2-1479
Table 2-87
Migration Supported Blades ..................................................................... 2-1486
Table 2-88
VoIP Resource Chart ............................................................................... 2-1492
Table 2-89
CPU Reset Programs ............................................................................... 2-1493
Table 2-90
Migration Supported Blades ..................................................................... 2-1510
Table 2-91
Desktop Suite Licenses ............................................................................ 2-1526
Table 2-92
Exceptions to Firewall for Ports ................................................................ 2-1527
Table 2-93
Exceptions to Windows Process .............................................................. 2-1528
Table 2-94
DT700 Supported Encryption ................................................................... 2-1541
Table 2-95
Terminal Category Reference Chart (DT300/DT700) .............................. 2-1543
Table 2-96
Terminal Category Reference Chart (Dterm Series i Terminals) ............... 2-1545
Table 2-97
Connectivity of Options ............................................................................ 2-1546
Table 2-98
Terminal and Adapter Compatibility ......................................................... 2-1547
Table 2-99
DT330 Compatibility Settings ................................................................... 2-1548
Table 2-100
Firmware Compatibility Matrix .................................................................. 2-1548
Table 2-101
Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility ................................................ 2-1549
Table 2-102
Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility ................................................... 2-1550
Table 2-103
Adapter Compatibility ............................................................................... 2-1551
___________________________________________________________________________________
xviii
List of Tables
UNIVERGE
SV8100
Issue 12.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-104
IPLA DSP Usage ...................................................................................... 2-1552
Table 2-105
IPLB DSP Usage ...................................................................................... 2-1553
Table 2-106
TAPI Commands ...................................................................................... 2-1598
Table 2-107
SV8100 Configuration .............................................................................. 2-1646
Table 2-108
Windows Mobile Devices .......................................................................... 2-1704
Table 2-109
Nokia Devices ........................................................................................... 2-1705
Table 2-110
iPhone Devices ......................................................................................... 2-1706
Table 2-111
Mobile Device Requirements .................................................................... 2-1721
Table 2-112
Feature Support Table .............................................................................. 2-1722
Table 2-113
SV8100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels ............. 2-1756
Table 2-114
SV8100 9.5” (Base and Expansion) Maximum System
Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels ........................................................ 2-1757
Table 2-115
Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades ....................... 2-1758
Table 2-116
Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades ......................... 2-1762
Table 2-117
Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades ................ 2-1764
Table 2-118
Board Power Factor .................................................................................. 2-1765
Table 2-119
Terminal Power Factor ............................................................................. 2-1766
Table 2-120
Maximum Number of Packages Installed ................................................. 2-1767
Table 2-121
Migration Supported Application Blades ................................................... 2-1767
Table 2-122
SV8100 VM8000 InMail Part Numbers and Capacities ............................ 2-1789
Table 2-123
Park and Page Call Handling ................................................................... 2-1836
Table 2-124
Park and Page Call Handling ................................................................... 2-1837
Table 2-125
Recording Your Paging Message ............................................................. 2-1841
Table 2-126
Setting the Call Handling Options ............................................................. 2-1842
Table 2-127
Picking Up a Parked Call .......................................................................... 2-1842
Table 2-128
Default Incoming Ringing Tone ................................................................ 2-1844
Table 2-129
Error Messages and Causes .................................................................... 2-1848
___________________________________________________________________________________
Features and Specifications Manual
xix
Issue
12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2-130
VM8000 Email Account Information ......................................................... 2-1888
Table 2-131
Typical SMS Notification (No Wav File) ................................................... 2-1889
Table 2-132
Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings ................................. 2-1890
Table 2-133
Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals .......... 2-1891
Table 2-134
Turn Email Notification On or Off ............................................................. 2-1895
Table 2-135
Language Setting Operation .................................................................... 2-1911
Table 2-136
IP Recorder Basic Licenses ..................................................................... 2-1921
Table 2-137
SV8100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder) .................................. 2-1927
Table 2-138
Known Limitations .................................................................................... 2-1929
Table 2-139
System Minimum Requirements .............................................................. 2-1935
Table 2-140
Server Hardware Matrix ........................................................................... 2-1935
Table 2-141
Common Hardware Requirements ........................................................... 2-1936
Table 2-142
Supervisor/Agent Studio PC Recommendations ...................................... 2-1936
Table 2-143
Supported Operating Systems ................................................................. 2-1937
Table 2-144
Supported Databases ............................................................................... 2-1937
Table 2-145
SV8100 CPU License (NEC SonicView Recorder) .................................. 2-1938
Table 2-146
Voice Prompting Messages ...................................................................... 2-1977
Table 2-147
Embedded VRS Prompts ......................................................................... 2-2009
Table 2-148
Default Incoming Ringing Tone ................................................................ 2-2013
Table 2-149
Error Messages and Causes .................................................................... 2-2016
Table 2-150
Supported Wireless DECT (SIP) Features ............................................... 2-2033
Table 3-1
Post Dialing Service Codes – Single Digit Post Dialing Codes ...................... 3-2
Table 3-2
Service Codes by Number ............................................................................. 3-3
Table 3-3
Service Codes by Feature ............................................................................ 3-14
Table 3-4
Function Key Codes by Feature ................................................................... 3-26
Table 3-5
Function Key Codes by Number .................................................................. 3-35
Table 4-1
Feature Availability by Software Revision ...................................................... 4-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
xx
List of Tables
Introduction
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
MULTILINE TERMINALS USED WITH THE SYSTEM
SV8100 Terminals
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 (DTL and ITL telephones), Electra Elite IPK II (DTH
telephones), Dterm Series i (DTR telephones) can be used with the
UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
SECTION 2
1
The SV8100 multiline terminals, either with or without LCD display, offer a
variety of colors, and line sizes.

Terminals are available in black or white.

The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display provides call
status data and programming information.

Terminal line sizes include 2, 6, 12, 24, and 32.

IP Terminals are available in 2, 6, 12, 24, and 32.

Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is
standard.

Only the DT330 series terminals are compatible with APR-L
adapters.

An Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1 Console is available with 60 stations
and/or outside line assignments.

If the page switching key on the DCL-60-1 Console is used, there is
a maximum of 120 keys. Two pages of 54 programmable keys and
six fixed keys.

A power failure module PSA-L is available for fail-over to POTS line
when there is a loss of power or network connection to the SV8100.
Features and Specifications Manual
1-1
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Softkeys
Line Key
Kit
Numbered
Keypad
Key
Kit
Hold
Transfer
Speaker
Cursor
Pad
Answer
Recall
Feature
Mic
Menu
Figure 1-1 SV8100 Key Assignment Example
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
The Electra Elite IPK Series i Terminals (DTR/DTH telephones) either with or without
LCD display offer a variety of colors, and line sizes.
1-2

Terminals are available in black or white.

The large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the display terminals provides call
status data and programming information.

Terminal line sizes include 8-line, 16-line, and 32-line.

An Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1 Console is available with 60 stations and/or
outside line assignments.

If the page switching key on the DCL-60-1 Console is used, there is a maximum
of 120 keys. Two pages of 54 programmable keys and six fixed keys.
Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch Keys
Keys are designated Feature Access, Single On/Off, or One-Touch throughout this
manual. The keys operate much the same, but various limitations imposed on each
type are described below.

Feature Access Keys
Depending on the type, a multiline terminal can have 2, 8, 16, 24, or 32 line
keys. These highly-flexible keys can be used for station DSS/BLF and Speed
Dial.

Single On/Off Keys
Line keys may also be assigned as Single On/Off keys in System Programming
to toggle a feature on/off. This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access
keys, but the assigned features are very specific. Scrolling (CID) and headset
are examples of features available for Single On/Off keys.

One-Touch Keys
One-Touch keys can perform the same function as Feature Access keys. A
multiline terminal has a fixed number of these keys. No system assignment is
necessary, and the number of keys ranges from none to 16 depending on the
terminal type.
Figure 1-2 Feature Access/One-Touch Key Assignment Example
Features and Specifications Manual
1-3
Issue 12.0
1-4
UNIVERGE SV8100

2-line on the DTR-2DT-1.

Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard
(except on the DTR-2DT-1).

All but the DTR-2DT-1, DTR-1-1, DTR-1HM-1 and Cordless terminals are
compatible with the AD(A)-R, AP(A)-R, AP(R)-R, CT(A)-R and HF-R Unit
adapters. The AP(R)-R Unit requires an AC(A)-R Unit to supply AC power. For
Attendant Positions, an Attendant Add-On DCL-60-1 Console is available with
60 station and/or outside line assignments and 12 function keys. The DTR-2DT1 has an internal Analog Port without ringer.

A two-line terminal with two Flexible Line keys (each with 2-color LED), nine
function keys, built-in speakerphone, a large LED to indicate incoming calls or
messages, and an outgoing only Analog SLT Port [AD(A)-R] is also available.

The Electra Elite IPK Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations (DTR-11, DTR-1HM-1 and DTH-1-1). Both terminals come in black or white. Both
have DTMF and Pulse Dialing compatibility, and offer Flash and Redial key
functionality. The UNIVERGE SV8100 Single Line Terminals come standard
with a Message Waiting Indicator that also functions as an Incoming Call
Indication. During a call, the receive audio level can be increased three levels
and decreased two levels from the default setting (six volume level settings in
all). The terminals offer four ring volume settings (Off, Soft, Medium, and Loud),
and three ring patterns (Slow, Medium, and Fast). The DTR Single Line
Terminals also have a Data Port that functions similar to that of an AP(R)-R
optional adapter, and have a built-in wall mount adapter. The DTR-1HM-1
terminal has eight programmable speed dial buttons (maximum 21 digits each).
The DTR-1HM-1 also has Hold and Monitor Function keys.
Introduction
2
Features
SECTION 1
ABOUT THIS CHAPTER
Each feature provides the following information:
Description – briefly describes the feature and how it is used.
Features
This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are
available with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Conditions – provides special operating conditions (if any) that need to be
considered with using the feature.
Default Settings – indicates the factory default setting (if any).
System Availability – describes multiline terminals that can be used with
this feature and lists any additional equipment, such as adapters or
blades, that must be installed for this feature to operate.
Programming – lists the memory blocks that support the feature.
Related Features – lists features that are associated with the feature
being described (e.g., the Account Codes feature lists the Speed Dialing
feature in the related features list because speed dialing bins can contain
stored account code (if any).
Operation – provides step-by-step instructions for using the feature.
Features and Specifications Manual
2-1
Issue 12.0
SECTION 2
UNIVERGE SV8100
IMPORTANT NOTES
Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operation with One-Touch Keys
A multiline terminal user can access many features using Service Codes (e.g.,
Service Code 744 sets Call Forward Busy/No Answer). To streamline the operation of
their telephone, a multiline terminal user can store these codes under One-Touch
Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more,
turn to the One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.
Programmable Keys
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar
to (PRG 15-07 or SC nnn). This means that the key requires service code nnn, and
you can program this code in Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code 751 or 752.
Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.
Using Handsfree
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just
press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call. For extensions without
Automatic Handsfree, the user must:

Lift the handset or press Speaker for Intercom dial tone.

Lift the handset or press Speaker, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.
Port Assignments
Port Calculation for Trunks:
The system detects the type of blade (trunk or extension) and assigns the required
extension or trunk ports to the slot. The system will use the next available port
numbers – it will not reserve any ports.
SECTION 3
IPK II TO UNIVERGE SV8100 FEATURE COMPARISON LIST
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List provides a cross-reference between the Electra
Elite IPK II and the UNIVERGE SV8100 features.
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry
Alarm
Alarm
2-2
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Alarm Reports
Alarm Reports
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Ancillary Device Connection
Ancillary Device Connection
Answer Hold
Answer Hold
Answer Key
Answer Key
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Call Queuing
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Release
Automatic Release
Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Background Music
Barge-In
Barge-In
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Power
Battery Backup – System Power
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Duration Timer
Call Duration Timer
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding –
Park and Page
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring
Call Redirect
Call Redirect
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Callback
Callback
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID Call Return
Features and Specifications Manual
2-3
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Caller ID
Caller ID
Not Supported
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Class of Service
Class of Service
Clock/Calendar Display
Clock/Calendar Display
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO Message Waiting Indication
Code Restriction
Code Restriction
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
TAPI Compatibility
Conference
Conference
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing
Not Supported
Cordless DECT Terminals
Cordless Telephone Connection
Cordless Telephone Connection
Data Line Security
Data Line Security
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing
Department Calling
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
Department Step Calling
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Dialing Number Preview
Dialing Number Preview
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2-4
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
Door Box
Drop Key
Drop Key
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Not Supported
DTPlusWare
Dterm Handset Cordless
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Dterm IP Gateway System
Not Supported
Not Supported
Ecology
E911 Compatibility
E911 Compatibility
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
IPK/IPK II Migration
EliteApps – Interactive Voice Response
IVR – Appointment Reminder Server
Not Supported
IVR – Broadcast Server
Elite CallAnalyst
SMB8000 Communications Analyst
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Flash
Flash
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible Timeouts
Flexible Timeouts
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Not Supported
General Purpose Relay
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Group Listen
Group Listen
Handset Mute
Handset Mute
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree and Monitor
Features and Specifications Manual
2-5
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Headset Operation
Headset Operation
Hold
Hold
Hot Key-Pad
Hot Key-Pad
Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel
Hotline
Hotline
Howler Tone Service
Howler Tone Service
Intercom
Intercom
Internal Hub
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch
IP Extenders/Mobile ConneX
Not Supported
IP Station (MEGACO) – IAD Integrated Access
Device
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
IP Station (MEGACO) – MG 16
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
Not Supported
IP Multiline Station (SIP) – ML440 Cordless
IP Station (SIP) – MG16
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323 Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323
IP Trunk (SIP) – MG16
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IPK II – PC Assistant
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications
IPK II – PC Attendant
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications
IPK II In-Mail
VM8000 InMail
IPK II VoIP Management System
Not Supported
Not Supported
IP/Digital Call Logging
ISDN Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility
Not Supported
K-CCIS – IP
K-CCIS - IP with IAD
Not Supported
K-CCIS - IP with PVA
K-CCIS – IP with PVA
K-CCIS - T1
K-CCIS – T1
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
2-6
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Licensing
Licensing
Line Preference
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long Conversation Cutoff
Not Supported
Loop Keys
Not Supported
Maintenance
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Memo Dial
Memo Dial
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
Not Supported
MH240 Wireless IP Telephone
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
Not Supported
Mobile Extension
Multiline Conference Bridge
SMB8000 Conference Bridge
Multimedia Conference Bridge
SMB8000 Conference Bridge
Multiple Trunk Types
Multiple Trunk Types
Music on Hold
Music on Hold
Name Storing
Name Storing
Not Supported
NEC Meeting Center (NMC)
Night Service
Night Service
Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling
One-Digit Dial Option
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling
Operator
Operator
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Paging, External
Paging, External
Not Supported
Paging, External (VRS)
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Park
Park
Features and Specifications Manual
2-7
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
PBX Compatibility
PBX Compatibility
PC Programming
PC Programming
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection
Private Line
Private Line
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Redial Key
Redial Function
Remote (System) Upgrade
Remote (System) Upgrade
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
Resident System Program
Resident System Program
Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over
Ring Groups
Ring Groups
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup
Not Supported
Security
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring Tones
Serial Call
Serial Call
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
SLT Adapter
SLT Adapter
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
Not Supported
Not Supported
SMB8000 Conference Bridge – Outlook Integration
2-8
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Softkeys
Softkeys
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Not Supported
Speed Dial – Telephone Book
Station Add-On Console
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Station Hunt
Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Name Assignment-User Programmable
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
Station Relocation
Station Relocation
Not Supported
SV8100 Internal Router
Not Supported
SV8100 NetLink
Synchronous Ringing
Synchronous Ringing
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
TAPI Compatibility
TAPI Compatibility
Tone Override
Tone Override
Traffic Reports
Traffic Reports
Transfer
Transfer
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Not Supported
UCB (Unified Communications for Business)
Unified Messaging
UM8000 Mail
Not Supported
uMobility
Not Supported
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Numbering Network
Uniform Numbering Network
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
User Programming Ability
User Programming Ability
Features and Specifications Manual
2-9
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Virtual Extensions
Virtual Extensions
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail Park and Page
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Cascade Message Notification
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Email Notification
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Find-Me Follow-Me
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Language Setting
Not Supported
Voice Call Recording
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Over
Voice Over
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download
Audio
Volume Controls
Volume Controls
Warning Tone For Long Conversation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Wireless – DECT
Wireless DECT (SIP)
SECTION 4
FEATURES
The remainder of this document provides the features for the UNIVERGE SV8100
system.
2 - 10
Features
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or
restrict trunk calls. The system has two types of Forced Account Codes:

Forced Account Codes (Unverified)
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time
they place a trunk call. If the user does not enter the code, the system prevents the call.
As with Account Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an
incoming call. However, the system does not require it. Forced Account Codes do not
block emergency assistance (911) calls.
Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes
trunk-by-trunk. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or only
long distance calls. Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the
following chart:

Number of Digits
Dialed
If first digit is not 1
If first digit is 1
1~3
Not allowed
Not allowed
4~7
Does not require Account Code
Requires Account Code
More than 7
Does not require Account Code
Requires Account Code
800 and 888
Does not require Account Code
Does not require Account Code
011 (International)
Requires Account Code
N/A
911
Does not require Account Code
N/A
A
Verified Account Codes
With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to
a list of up to 2000 programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes
through. If the code dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified
Account Codes can have 3~16 digits using the characters 0~9 and #. During
programming, you can use “wild cards” to streamline entering codes into system
memory. For example, the entry [email protected] lets users dial Verified Account Codes from
1230 through 1239.
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 11
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operator Notification
To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code
violation occurs (Program: 20-13-20). This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if
Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom
call to the attendant and a RESTRICT message in the operator display.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system allows extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When this option is
enabled, a user can dial  while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial  to return to
their caller. If the option is disabled, any digit the user dials after answering an incoming call outdials on
the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Optionally, Account Codes can be hidden from a telephone display. This prevents, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display. When hidden,
the Account Code digits show as  on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #. Verified Account Codes can have 3~16 digits.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain Account
Code information. For any number redialed with these features, the user must enter an Account Code.

If a user enters 12345203 926 540067890, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials the number
as 203 926 540067890. The 67890is not treated as an Account Code.
Conditions
2 - 12

If a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores the Account Code Entry.

If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.

If using Forced Account Code with single line telephone you need a VRS to get the prompts
to enter the Forced Account Code.

When you use Forced Account Code on only toll calls, and you dial a local call, you hear a
beep.

The timer set in Program 21-01-14 is applied to toll calls and local calls.

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station bins can contain stored Account Codes. They can be
prevented from being displayed using Program 20-07-04.
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch
Key. Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.

Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).

Do not use an asterisk in a PBX/CTX access code when using Account Codes. The ,
causes the trunk to stop sending digits to the central office until another  is entered.

Account Codes for incoming calls are not available for single line telephones.

When using Forced Account Codes (Unverified) for toll calls only, the station follows the
timer setting in Program 21-01-14 for all calls.

System Account codes are bypassed when using DISA trunks. If a user calls in via a DISA
trunk, the user is not required to enter an account code.

When Account Codes are enabled in a Class of Service, extensions in that Class of Service
no longer follow the Maximum Dialing Digit setting in the ARS/F-Routes.

Verified Account Codes for Toll Calls across a CCIS network are not restricted when a trunk
access code is added to the number allowing ARS routing through another K-CCIS T1/IP
networked site. This access code (typically a 9), precedes the dialed “1” used by the
system to identify a long distance call. As a result, the call is no longer considered long
distance and the account code is not required.

Forced Account Codes restrict toll calls based off the digits the system dials, not what the
user dials. For example, ARS can be used to manipulate what the user dials. The
determination of a toll versus local call is made after ARS has manipulated the number.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
VRS for Forced Account Codes for Single Line Telephones
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 13
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Account Code Required
Enable/Disable Account Codes for
each trunk.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key as an
Account Code key (code 50). Use
this key instead of the dial pad to
enter the  before and after the
Account Code.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-06-01
2 - 14
Class of Service for Extensions
3
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On the Operator Alert
when a forced account code is
incorrectly entered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

21-01-14
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Forced Account Code
Inter-digit Timer
The system waits this time for a
user to enter a Forced Account
code.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3)

21-04-01
Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Assign a Toll Restriction Class
(1~15) to an extension.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)

20-13-20
35-05-01
35-05-02
35-05-03
35-05-04
35-06-01
Account Code Setup – Account
Code Mode
For each Class of Service (1~15)
select the Account Code Mode.
0 = Account Codes
disabled (None)
1 = Account Codes
optional
2 = Account Codes
required but not
verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes
required and verified
(Verify)
(default = 0)

Account Code Setup – Forced
Account Code Toll Call Setup
Enable Account Codes for all calls
or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
Program 35-05-01).
0 = Account Codes for
toll and local calls (All)
1 = Account Codes just
for toll calls (STD)
(default = 0)

Account Code Setup – Account
Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 in this option to Enable
Account Codes for incoming calls.
Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes
for incoming calls. If disabled, any
codes you enter dial out on the
connected trunk.
0 = Disable Account
Codes for incoming
calls
1 = Enable Account
codes for incoming
calls
(default = 0)

For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 to have the system hide
Account Codes on an extension
display as they are entered. Enter
0 to have the Account Codes
displayed.
0 = Account Codes
Displayed
1 = Account Codes not
Displayed
(default = 0)

Enter data in the Verified Account
Code Table. You can enter up to
2000 codes from 3~16 digits in
length. For a wild card @, press
the LK 1.
Up to 16 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, #, @
(@ = Wild Card)
(default not assigned)
Account Code Setup – Hiding
Account Codes
Verified Account Code Table –
Verified Account Code
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified

2 - 15
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
40-10-01
Voice Announcement Service
Option – VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
system ability to play the fixed
VRS messages (such as You have
a message).
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)
2
3

Operation
To enter an Account Code anytime while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. Use this procedure if your system has
Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is
not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

3.
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows  on the telephone display.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter a Forced Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed in your
Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

2.
Press a line key or dial a code.to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-275 for more
information.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
2 - 16
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Dial your Account Code [1~16 digits, using 0~9 and # or (3~16 digits for Forced)].

4.
Issue 12.0
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial shows  on the telephone display (depending on programming).
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
5.
Dial the number you want to call.
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required:
1.
Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.
2.
Wait for your call to go through.
- OR -
3.
If you hear “Please enter an Account Code,” (depending on system programming) and your
display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.

Dial .
- OR Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).

Dial your Account Code (3~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows  on the telephone display.

Dial .
- OR Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.

If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out onto the connected trunk.
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter the Account Code (1~16 digits).

4.
You can enter any code of the proper length.
Dial .
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
2 - 17
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

Dial a code to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.

With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.”(depending on programming).
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter Account Code (3~16 digits).
4.
Dial .
5.
Dial number you want to call.
2 - 18
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Account Code Entry
Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk
calls. Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or
anytime while on a call. The system does not require the user to enter the optional account code.
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
The system can control extension user ability to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. When this
option is enabled, a user can dial  while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial  to
return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digit the user dials after answering an incoming call
outdials on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone display. This prevents, for example, an
unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display. When hidden,
the Account Code digits show  on the telephone display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. Account
Codes can have 1~16 digits using 0~9 and #.
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes
When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system does not retain Account
Code information. To redial any number with these features, the user must enter an Account Code.

If a user enters 12345203 926 540067890, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the system dials the number
as 203 926 540067890. The 67890 is not treated as an Account Code.
Conditions

If a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores it.

If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., 1234) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.

Do not use an asterisk in a PBX access code when using Account Codes. Otherwise, after
the , the trunk stops sending digits to the central office.

Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the telephone
display).
Account Code Entry
2 - 19
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

To simplify Account Code Entry, store the Account Code (e.g., 1234) in a One-Touch Key,
and press the key instead of dialing the code.

Speed Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being displayed
using Program 20-07-04.

When Account Codes are enabled, the user must press the  three times before the 
character is passed to the telco. The system recognizes the initial  as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second  as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third  is
passed to telco.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
One-Touch Calling
PBX Compatibility
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
2 - 20
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
14-01-11
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Account Code Required
Enable/Disable Account Codes for
each trunk.
0= Disable
1= Enable
(default = 1)

15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key as an
Account Code key (code 50). Use
this key instead of the dial pad to
enter the  before and after the
Account Code.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
21-01-04
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Tone Detection Time
Set the time the system waits for
the Telco to return Dial Tone.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)

35-05-01
Account Code Setup – Account
Code Mode
Select the Account Code Mode.
0 = Account Codes
disabled (None)
1 = Account Codes
optional
2 = Account Codes
required but not
verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes
required and verified
(Verify)
(default = 0)

Account Code Entry
2 - 21
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
35-05-02
35-05-03
35-05-04
Account Code Setup – Forced
Account Code Toll Call Setup
Enable Account Codes for all calls
or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
Program 35-05-01).
0 = Account Codes for
toll and local calls (All)
1 = Account Codes just
for toll calls (STD)
(default = 0)

Account Code Setup – Account
Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 in this option to Enable
Account Codes for incoming calls.
Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes
for incoming calls. If disabled, any
codes you enter dial out on the
connected trunk.
0 = Account Codes for
incoming calls disabled
(No)
1 = Account codes for
incoming calls (Yes)
(default = 0)

For each Class of Service (1~15),
enter 1 to have the system hide
Account Codes on an extension
display as they are entered. Enter
0 to have the Account Codes
displayed.
0 = Display Account
Codes
1 = Hide Account
Codes
(default = 0)

Enter Account Codes in the
Verification Account Code List.
You can enter up to 2000 codes
with 3~6 digits, using the
characters 0~9 or #. Use the LK1
to enter a wild card. For example,
the entry @234 means the user
can enter 0234-9234.
Up to 16 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, #, @
(@ = Wild Card)
(default not assigned)
Account Code Setup – Hiding
Account Codes
35-06-01
2
SMDR Account Code Setup –
Verified Account Code
3

Operation
To enter an Account Code anytime while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. Use this procedure if your system has
Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is
not available for single line telephones.
1.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

2 - 22
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows  on the telephone display.
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 12.0
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes, you may use this procedure instead of letting the
system prompt you for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into your
Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

2.
Press a line key or dial a code (except 9) to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 2-275
for more information.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
3.
Dial your Account Code (1~16 digits, using 0~9 and #).

4.
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account Codes are hidden,
each digit you dial shows  on the telephone display.
Dial .
- OR -
Press your Account Code key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: code 50).
5.
Dial the number you want to call.
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available for single line telephones.
1.
Answer incoming call.

If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out to the connected trunk.
2.
Dial .
3.
Enter the Account Code.

4.
You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.
Dial .
Account Code Entry
2 - 23
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To enter an Account Code at a single line telephone:
1.
Access trunk for outside call.

Dial a code to access a trunk. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for more information.
2.
Dial 
3.
Enter Account Code (1~16 digits).
4.
Dial .
5.
Dial number you want to call.
2 - 24
Account Code Entry
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Alarm
Description
Alarm lets any station extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind
them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:

Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)

Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions

Single line telephones ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds.

Only a multiline terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Alarm
2 - 25
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-01-06
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options – Alarm
Duration
Set the duration of the Alarm
signal.
0~64800 seconds
(default = 30)
2
3

Operation
To set the alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

4.
Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).

5.
Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
A confirmation tone is heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an error tone is heard instead.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
2 - 26
Alarm
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To silence an alarm:
1.
At multiline terminal, press Exit.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.

The single line set user hears Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.
To check the programmed alarm time at a multiline terminal:
1.
Press Help.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).

4.
The programmed time displays.
Press Exit.
To cancel an alarm:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 727.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
4.
Dial 9999.
5.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker to hang up.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, hang up.
Alarm
2 - 27
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 28
Alarm
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Alarm Reports
Enhancements
When attempting a call requiring an IP to TDM conversion and no DSP resource is available, the
system displays a message on the multiline terminal and can generate an alarm via the Alarm Report
(system software Version 3000 or higher required).
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the Alarm Reports feature has been enhanced to include
an alarm for IP duplication. With Version 4000 or lower CPU software, the SV8100 had no alarm
function for an IP address duplication. With this enhancement, the SV8100 is able to detect another
device on the same subnet having an IP address that conflicts with those assigned to the CPU, IPLA/
IPLB, and DSP resources to make troubleshooting easy when IP packets are not sent.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the SV8100 can be configured to send an email notification of
a system event that causes a reset and DIMLast and DIMDump files to be created. The system can
also be configured to email the DIMLast and DIMDump text files by using the SMTP email settings in
the 47-18-xx programs and mounting a PZ-ME50-US to the CCPU. This enhancement requires the
V7000 Enhancement License (0036) and Maintenance License (0043).
Description
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system logs various errors and reports information about the operation that
can be used to determine the cause of a problem. The system can indicate several errors on the
multiline telephone display, output to a USB stick on the CD-CP00-US, or be downloaded in PCPro. The
report data also can be sent via email.
Alarm Report
The Alarm Reports indicate:

System start-up/upgrade date and time

Blade communication error with date and time and the restoration date and time

Date and time a blade was removed from the system

Date and time an extension was disconnected from the system

Date and time of any system data change
Alarm Reports
2 - 29
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-2 Sample Alarm Report
<< Alarm Report
05/16/2006 14:30 PAGE 001
LVL
NO
STAT
DATE
TIME
ITEM
UNIT
SLT
PRT
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:21
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MAJ
0010
ERR
05/16/06
14:21
ISDN Link
PRT
02
12
MAJ
0010
REC
05/16/06
14:21
ISDN Link
PRT
02
12
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
ESI
05
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
SLIB
07
00
MAJ
0050
WAR
05/16/06
14:33
System Start Up
none
00
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:33
PKG Installation
PRT
02
00
MAJ
0014
ERR
05/16/06
14:33
NTCPU-LAN Link
none
00
00
MAJ
0014
REC
05/16/06
14:35
NTCPU-LAN Link
none
00
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:36
PKG Installation
CTP
08
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:37
PKG Installation
VMS
08
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:38
PKG Installation
VMS
08
00
MIN
0002
REC
05/16/06
14:40
PKG Installation
PRT
07
00
MIN
0002
ERR
05/16/06
14:40
PKG Installation
PRT
07
00
MAJ
0006
ERR
05/16/06
14:41
Blocking
ESIB
01
05
MAJ
0006
REC
05/16/06
15:01
Blocking
ESIB
01
05
MAJ
0006
ERR
05/16/06
15:05
Blocking
ESIB
01
07
MAJ
0006
REC
05/16/06
15:07
Blocking
ESIB
01
07
MIN
0068
ERR
01/22/09
09:30
VoIP All DSP Busy
VoIPDB
01
00
STA
MIN
0068
ERR
01/22/09
09:31
VoIP All DSP Busy
VoIPDB
01
00
TRK
MIN
0068
ERR
01/22/09
09:35
VoIP All DSP Busy
VoIPDB
01
00
LNK
MIN
0068
ERR
01/22/09
09:40
VoIP All DSP Busy
VoIPDB
01
00
NET
2 - 30
PARAMETER
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-3 Alarm Report Definitions
Alarm Report Heading
Definitions
LVL
Alarm Type (MAJ = Major, MIN = Minor)
NO
Number of Alarm (4-digit)
STAT
Status (REC = Recovered, ERR = Error, WAR = Warning
DATE
Date the Alarm Occurred
TIME
Time the Alarm Occurred
ITEM
Name of the Alarm
UNIT
Name of the Blade
SLT
Chassis Slot Number
PRT
Chassis Port Number
PARAMETER
Related Information
Table 2-4 Alarm Report Item Definitions
Item Name
Definition
PKG Installation
Blade is removed or inserted.
ISDN Link
ISDN Line failure is detected.
CD-CP00-US – LAN Link
CD-CP00-US – Lan connection failure is detected.
Blocking
Terminal Failure may have occurred because terminal blocking is detected.
Terminal is unplugged or wire is disconnected.
System Data Change
System Upgrade performed or Programming change.
System Start Up
System is reset.
SMDR Link
Connection failure is detected between the CD-CP00-US and SMDR printer device.
STA
DSP for IP Station Call were all busy.
TRK
DSP for Trunk Call were all busy, includes SIP trunks.
LNK
DSP for Net-Link Call were all busy.
NET
DSP for CCISoIP Networking Call were all busy.
System Information
The system can print a report of the blades installed, the port assignments, and the port types. This
information is sent to the extension defined in Program 90-13.
Alarm Reports
2 - 31
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The System Information Reports indicate:

Date and Time of the Report

Blade names

Slot condition (working, blocked)

Port assignment

Port classification
Table 2-5 Sample System Information Printout
System Information
05/18/2006 11:02
slot
location
type
assign port
condition
note
1
1-1
DLC
1-16
Running
 -------- Connect: 
2
1-2
PRT
1-23
Running
3
1-3
COT
25-28
Running
4
1-4
none
none
Not Install
5
1-5
DLC
33-40
Not Install
6
1-6
LCA
17-24
Running
7
1-7
PRT
29-51
Not Install
8
1-8
VM00
25-32
Running
9
2-1
none
Not Install
10
2-2
none
Not Install
11
2-3
none
Not Install
12
2-4
none
Not Install
13
2-5
none
Not Install
14
2-6
none
Not Install
15
2-7
none
Not Install
16
2-8
none
Not Install
2 - 32
--------
Connect: 
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-5 Sample System Information Printout (Continued)
System Information
05/18/2006 11:02
slot
location
type
assign port
17
3-1
none
Not Install
18
3-2
none
Not Install
19
3-3
none
Not Install
20
3-4
none
Not Install
21
3-5
none
Not Install
22
3-6
none
Not Install
23
3-7
none
Not Install
24
3-8
none
Not Install
condition
note
Conditions

Alarm Reports and System Information Reports can be output to a USB stick on the
CD-CP00-US.

The UNIVERGE SV8100 supports the following Alarms to be output to the LCD of a
multiline terminal:


SMDR Buffer Full

CD-CP00-US-LAN link Error
The UNIVERGE SV8100 does not support printouts of the following Alarms:

Power Failure

RAM Backup Battery Error

Networking Keep Alive Error

IP Duplication Alarm

Up to 12 System Alarm times can be scheduled to print on a Monthly, Daily, and Hourly time
frame. The report indicates both Major and Minor Alarms.

System Information Reports cannot be set to output at a scheduled time.

When using the email functionality of reports, the email address in Program 90-11-10 (From
Address) must be set for the email feature to work.

After a new alarm is output, it cannot be output a second time. New alarms must be
generated before Program 90-12-04 can be performed a second time.
Alarm Reports
2 - 33
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Up to 100 System Alarm Reports can be stored. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is
deleted to allow the new record to be saved.

If the System is set up to email the Alarm Reports and the Mail Server is down, the report is
not sent.

System Information Reports cannot be set for output via email.

Scheduled Alarm Reports via email prints all alarms. When the system detects New
alarms, this information is output via email individually.

Email Alarm Reports can be sent when each New alarm occurs (Per Event). If you want to
receive complete Alarm Reports periodically, you must specify 12 individual dates and
times in Program 90-24-01~Program 90-24-04 (per period).

A maximum of 99 entries are emailed with the scheduled alarms.

The DIMLast and DIMDump files are attached to the email only when using the 47-18-xx
programs for SMTP email and if a PZ-ME50-US and USB memory stick are mounted on the
CCPU.

The DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent via email when Program 90-03-01 is used to
manually generate a data dump. They are only saved on the USB attached to the CCPU.

The PZ-ME50 must be mounted to the CCPU for the 47-18-xx program settings to work.

Once successfully sent, the DIMLast and DIMDump files are deleted from the system.

If the email retry limit is exceeded, the DIMLast and DIMDump files are deleted from the
system.

A USB Drive must be mounted to the CCPU for the DIMLast and DIMDump files to be sent
via email.

If Program 90-11-15 is set to 1 (Enable) and no USB drive is mounted to the CCPU, the
system will not restart if an error occurs which causes the SV8100 to reboot.

The Alarm Improvement, where the DIMLast and DIMDump files are sent via email, require
the V7000 Enhancement License (0036) and Maintenance License (0043).

The Alarm Improvement, where the DIMLast and DIMDump files are sent via email, require
the occurrence of a major system event. DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent for
normal alarm events.
Default Settings
None
2 - 34
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
When using the Version 7.00 feature to email DIMLast and DIMDump files, the following
components are required:
USB memory stick
PZ-ME50-US
V7000 Enhancement License (0036)
Maintenance License (0043)
Related Features
None
Alarm Reports
2 - 35
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Setting Up Alarms:
Program
Number
90-10-01
90-10-02
90-24-01
2 - 36
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Alarm Setup – Alarm
Type
System Alarm Setup – Report
System Alarm Report
Notification Time Setup – Month
Set the alarm type 14 and 60.
Alarm 14 – CD-CP00-US-LAN
Link Error (IP Layer 1)
Assign a Major or Minor alarm
status to the LAN link. This
program also assigns whether or
not the alarm is displayed to a key
telephone and whether or not the
alarm information is reported to
the predefined destination.
Alarm 57 – IP Duplication Alarm
Assign a Major or MInor alarm
status to the IP Duplication Alarm.
Alarm 60 – SIP Registration
Error Notification
Assign a Major or Minor alarm
status to the SIP Registration
Error. This program also assigns
whether or not the alarm is
displayed to a key telephone and
whether or not the alarm
information is reported to the
predefined destination.
0 = Not Set
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
(default = 0)
Assign whether or not the alarm is
displayed to a multiline terminal
and whether or not the alarm
information is reported to the
predefined destination in Program
90-11.
0 = No Report (no
autodial)
1 = Report (autodial)
(default = 0)
Set the month for the alarm report
to print.
Month 00~12
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)
2
3



Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
90-24-02
System Alarm Report
Notification Time Setup – Day
Set the day for the alarm report to
print.
Day 00~31
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)

90-24-03
System Alarm Report
Notification Time Setup – Hour
Set the hour for the alarm report to
print.
Day 00~23
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)

90-24-04
System Alarm Report
Notification Time Setup – Minute
Set the minute for the alarm report
to print.
Day 00~59
(0 = Disabled)
(default = 00)

Printing Reports:
Level
Program
Number
90-12-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Alarm Output – Output
Port Type
Indicate the type of connection
used for the System Alarms. The
baud rate for the COM port should
be set in Program 10-21-02.
0 = No Setting
1~3 = Reserved
4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB Memory
(default = 0)
2
3

Printing System Information Reports:
Level
Program
Number
90-13-01
90-13-02
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Information Output –
Output Port Type
Indicate the type of connection
system information.
0 = No Setting
4 = CTA/CTU
5 = USB
(default = 0)
System Information Output –
CTA Output Destination
Extension Number
If the output port type (Program
90-13-01) is set to CTA, enter the
extension number with the CTA
connection.
Extension Number (up
to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
Alarm Reports
2
3


2 - 37
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Emailing Alarm Reports:
Program
Number
10-12-01
10-12-02
10-12-03
2 - 38
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
CD-CP00-US Network Setup – IP
Address
CD-CP00-US Network Setup –
Subnet Mask
CD-CP00-US Network Setup –
Default Gateway
Assign the IP Address.
The setting of Subnet Mask is
invalid when all Host Addresses
are 0.
If the network section is:
0,
127,
128.0,
191.255,
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet Mask is
invalid.
Assign the default gateway IP
address for the CD-CP00-US.
0.0.0.0~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1~
191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1~
223.255.255.254
(default =
192.168.0.10)
2
3

128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0
224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0
248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0
255.224.0.0
255.248.0.0
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254
255.255.255.255
(default =
255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1~
191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1~
223.255.255.254
(default = 0.0.0.0)

Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
When enabled the system will
provide notification of events for
each of the enabled reports. This
does not have to be set for
DIMLast/DIMDump files to be
sent.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
(default = 0)
System Alarm Report – Report
Method
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set this option to 1. This
program has higher priority than
Program 90-12-06.
0 = No Report
1 = Email Address
(default = 0)
System Alarm Report – SMTP
Host Name
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set the SMTP name (for
example, smtp.yourisp.com).
Contact your ISP (Internet Service
Provider) for the correct entry if
needed.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)
System Alarm Report – SMTP
Host Port Number
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set the SMTP host port
number. Contact your ISP
(internet service provider) for the
correct entry if needed.
0~65535
(default = 25)
90-11-08
System Alarm Report – To Email
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set this email address to
which the report should be sent.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)

90-11-09
System Alarm Report – Reply
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set the email address
where replies should be emailed.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)

90-11-10
System Alarm Report – From
Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set this email address for
the station sending the report.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)

90-11-11
System Alarm Report – DNS
Primary Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set the DNS primary
address.
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
(default = 0.0.0.0)

90-11-12
System Alarm Report – DNS
Secondary Address
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, set the DNS secondary
address.
0.0.0.0~
255.255.255.255
(default = 0.0.0.0)

90-11-13
System Alarm Report –
Customer Name
When Alarm Reports are to be
emailed, enter a name to identify
the particular system.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)

90-11-14
System Alarm Report – Change
SMTP Client
When enabled the system uses
the programs in 47-18-xx for email
server integration. This program
must be used for DIMLast/
DIMDump files to be sent. Note
you must have a PZ-ME50-US
mounted to the CCPU when using
this program.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
(default = 0)
90-10-02
90-11-02
90-11-06
90-11-07
System Alarm Setup – Report
Alarm Reports





2 - 39
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
90-11-15
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Alarm Report – DIMLOG
Notification
When enabled the system will
send an email notification when a
system fault occurs and DIMLast/
DIMDump files are generated. If
Program 90-11-14 is also enabled
the log files will be attached to the
email.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
(default = 0)
2
3

90-25-01
System Alarm Report CC Mail
Setup – CC Mail Address
Define the mail address to receive
the system alarm report CC Mail
setup.
Up to 255 characters
(default not assigned)

90-50-01
System Alarm Display Setup –
System Alarm Display Telephone
Define the extension number that
Alarm reports are displayed on.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)

InMail SMTP Setup:
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
47-18-01
VM8000 InMail Setup – SMTP
Enabled
Enables the SMTP forwarding
feature for the system.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
47-18-02
VM8000 InMail Setup – Server
Name
Sets the SMTP server name. If the
DNS server setting is not assigned
in Program 90-11-11, the IP
Address must be used instead of
the name.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)
47-18-03
VM8000 InMail Setup – SMTP
Port
Sets the SMTP server port.
0~65535
(default = 25)

47-18-04
VM8000 InMail Setup –
Encryption
Enable SSL Encryption.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)

47-18-05
VM8000 InMail Setup –
Authentication
Enables authentication, when set
to 2 (POP3) refer to Programs
47-19-xx.
0 = Off
1 = On
3 = POP3
(default = 0)

47-18-06
VM8000 InMail Setup – User
Name
Set the user name for SMTP
authentication.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)

47-18-07
VM8000 InMail Setup – Password
Set the password for SMTP
authentication.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)

47-18-08
VM8000 InMail Setup – Email
Address
Set the email address for the
system. This is the “from address”
for outgoing emails.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)
2 - 40
3



Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
47-18-09
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VM8000 InMail Setup – Reply to
Address
Set the email address for replies to
outgoing emails. This email
account is not monitored by the
system and must be checked
manually.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)
2
3

InMail POP3 Setup:
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup –
Server Name
Set the POP3 server name. If the
DNS server setting is not assigned
in Program 90-11-11 the IP
Address must be used instead of
the name.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)
47-19-02
VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup –
POP3 Port
Set the POP3 server port.
0~65535
(default = 110)

47-19-03
VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup –
SSL Encryption
Enable SSL encryption.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)

47-19-04
VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup –
User Name
Set the user name for POP3
authentication.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)

47-19-05
VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup –
Password
Set the password for POP3
authentication.
Up to 48 characters
(default = No Setting)

47-19-01

Operation
To use this feature at any terminal:
The user must be logged in with an Installer (IN) level password as defined in Program 90-02.
Alarm Reports
2 - 41
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 42
Alarm Reports
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Alphanumeric Display
Description
Multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character-per-line Alphanumeric Display that provides
various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls,
identify callers and customize features.
Conditions

The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Default Settings
Enabled for all display telephones.
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Clock/Calendar Display
Selectable Display Messaging
Alphanumeric Display
2 - 43
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-11-13
15-02-01
20-06-01
20-11-08
2 - 44
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
If needed, redefine the service
code used to select the language
for display multiline terminals.
MLT
(default = 678)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
Select the language to be
displayed on a multiline terminal
display.
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Turn Off or On an incoming
transfer preanswer display for an
extension.
3

Alphanumeric Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.
Alphanumeric Display
2 - 45
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 46
Alphanumeric Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Phone/Paging)
adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging, Door
Boxes and auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The system allows up to 48
PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (when used for ACI ports) for a maximum of 96 analog ports. Each PGD(2)-U10
ADP requires an unused port on a CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA blade.
Music on Hold
You can connect up to two customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP.
This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CD-CP00-US ETU or the
internal source is not adequate. By using PGD(2)-U10 ADPs, you can even have a different music
source for each trunk.
When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay
associated with the ACI analog port closes. You can use this ability to switch on the music source, if
desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music
source. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP module. Connect the music
source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware
Manual for additional details.
External Paging
An ACI analog port also can be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided
External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging. To use the External Paging, an
extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The
system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the
associated PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging
amplifier, if required. This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination
paging (internal and external).
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the amplifier
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
for additional details.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 47
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Auxiliary Device Control
The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the
ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record
function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape
recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP jack. Connect the recorder
control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the System Hardware Manual for
additional details.
By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension
user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells)
and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated
PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay closes and activates the ringer. You can use this ability to control an emergency
buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
ACI Call Recording
ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP to
automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. You can
set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/
devices. With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, be
sure you have a port available for recording – even in peak traffic periods. You can set up recording per
trunk or per extension.
When set up for automatic recording, ACI Call Recording starts automatically when the user places or
answers their call. The system can be programed to record all incoming trunk calls which ring an
extension. This includes the following trunks:

Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Tie Lines
The system also can be programmed to record outgoing trunk calls, however, this is possible only using
E&M Tie Lines, PRI or BRI trunks.
ACI Call Recording is not available for intercom calls, transferred calls, or calls placed on hold and
answered by an extension with Call Recording enabled. To manually record any call (transferred, ICM,
outgoing CO trunk, etc.), use the Voice Mail Conversation Record key (Service Code 751 + 78).
2 - 48
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP has a physical port for connection to the telephone system and two logical ports.
For programming, the ports are also called software ports. The physical port connects to a station position
on a ESI ETU. During installation, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP you set up is physical port 1; the second
PGD(2)-U10 ADP is physical port 2, etc. Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP has two software ports, which are
numbered independently of the physical ports. Normally, the first PGD(2)-U10 ADP set up has software
ports 1~2; the second PGD(2)-U10 ADP has software ports 3~4, etc. There are a total of 96 software
ports (48 PGD(2)-U10 ADPs x 2 ports each). During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers
and Department Group options to PGD(2)-U10 ADP software ports, not physical ports. During installation,
you connect equipment to the jacks on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP that correspond to the software port. Refer
to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for installation details.
Conditions

ACD agents who are logged on can be recorded.

When ACI software ports are set to be a Background Music source, it only plays to a
speaker, not a multiline telephone.

An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports. Music on Hold ACI software
ports can be Music on Hold music sources.

An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension
user:


One-Touch access to external music

One-Touch External Paging

One-Touch loud ringer control
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the CD-CP00-US. The PGD(2)-U10 ADP can be connected to any DLC
port.
The devices connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP must be compatible with the specifications
below. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for installation details.
PGD(2)-U10 ADP/ACI Interface Specifications
Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings
30 V DC @ 60 mA
90 V AC @ 10 mA
Minimum Application Load
1 V DC @ 1 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz
2 - 49
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
PGD(2)-U10 ADP/ACI Interface Specifications
Maximum Input
0.4Vrms or 1.0Vp-p.
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance
600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Output
+ 3 dBm
Default Settings
No PGD(2)-U10 ADPs programmed.
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Background Music
Hotline
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
2 - 50
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-06
11-06-01
11-08-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ACI Extension Numbering
ACI Group Pilot Number – Dial
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Assign or display the current
terminal type assigned to B
Channel 1 for each port on the
DLCA.
Assign or display the current
terminal type assigned to B
Channel 2 for each port on the
ESI.
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)

Assign extension numbers to ACI
software ports. Select a number
outside of the normal extension
number range.
ACI Ports: 1~96
(default not assigned)
Assign pilot numbers to ACI
groups. When a user dials the pilot
number, they reach an available
ACI software port within the group.
Up to eight digits
ACI Groups 1~16
(default not assigned)
2
3


2 - 51
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-09-01
14-09-02
15-07-01
15-12-01
15-12-02
33-01-01
2 - 52
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Assign the ACI Call Recording
destination per trunk. The
destination can be an ACI port
extension number (assigned in
Program 11-06-01) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08-01). If
destinations are assigned in
Program 14-09 and Program
15-12, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.
Extension Number =
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Trunks – ACI
Automatic Recording for
Incoming Calls
Determine whether or not a trunk
should be automatically recorded
when an incoming call is received.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
Programmable Function Keys
If required, program an ACI
Conversation Record Key (code
69 + 0). This key allows an
extension user to press the key to
manually record a call to the ACI.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Trunks – ACI
Recording Destination
Extension Number
3



00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Assign the ACI Call Recording
destination per extension. The
destination can be an ACI port
extension number (assigned in
Program 11-06) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number
(assigned in Program 11-08). If
destinations are assigned in
Program 14-09 and Program
15-12, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.
Extension Number =
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Extensions – ACI
Automatic Recording for
Incoming Calls
Determine whether or not an
extension should be automatically
recorded when an incoming call is
received.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
ACI Port Type Setup – ACI Type
Set each ACI software port for
input (1) or input/output (2). Use
input ports for Music on Hold
sources. Use output ports for
External Paging/ringer control.
ACI Ports: 1~96
ACI Types:
0 = None
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)
2 = External Audio
Port (Input/Output
(default = 2)
Conversation Recording
Destination for Extensions – ACI
Recording Destination
Extension Number
2



Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
33-02-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACI Department Calling Group –
Group Number
Assign ACI software ports to ACI
Department Groups. This lets ACI
callers connect to ACI software
ports by dialing the group pilot
number (set in Program 11-08).
ACI Ports: 1~96
ACI Groups: 1~16
Default:
ACI Port/Group/Priority
01/ 1/ 1
02/ 1/ 2
: / :/ :
96/ 1/ 96
2
3

Operation
To call an ACI software port:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial ACI software port extension number.
- OR -
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
- OR -
Press the One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software port:

If the port is set for input (Program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music.
- OR -

If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and External Paging is connected, you can page
into the external zone.
- OR -

If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate the
loud ringer.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
2 - 53
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 54
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Ancillary Device Connection
Description
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a multiline
terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An UNIVERGE SV8100 multiline terminal user can accomplish this by using the AP(R)-R/APR-L Unit
(Analog Port Adapter with Ringer) or AP(A)-R Unit (Analog Port Adapter without Ringer) for analog
telephone devices, or installing the AD(A)-R/APA-L Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R/APA-L Units are the interface for installing a single line telephone, Modem, credit
card reader, wireless headset, NEC Conference Max Conferencing unit or other compatible analog
device.
The PSA-L Unit (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL Terminals, is used to make
or receive a call using the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made with
the ITL/DLT extension.
Conditions

The optional device fits underneath the terminal.

A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R Unit or AP(A)-R Unit cannot perform
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer and does not support a conference with itself and two outside
parties.

A single line telephone connected to an AP(R)-R Unit or AP(A)-R Unit does not support
Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication.

An AP(R)-R Unit (analog port adapter with ringer) can be installed on a multiline terminal
and function separately from the multiline terminal.

When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
an APR. The system uses ports 193~256 (starting with 256 and working down) for a total
of 64 APR ports. APR 1 uses port 256, and APR 2 uses port 255, and so on.

When Program 10-03-06 is assigned as APR you cannot manually assign a port number for
the APR.

DTP-2DT-1 and DTR-2DT-1 telephones have a built-in APA adapter.

Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time
expires (Program 21-01-03).

When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-L, a conference cannot be
established unless the 2nd channel of ESI is used for APR in Program 10-03-06 and
Program 10-03-07.
Ancillary Device Connection
2 - 55
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When a single line phone is connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-L, the 2nd channel of ESI
must be used (Programs 10-03-06 and 10-03-07) to switch back and forth between a call
and call waiting.

APR-L does not support DTL-2E-1, DTL-6E-1, or all ITL style phones.

ADA-L can send confirmation sound to far end, but the recording machine must generate
confirmation sound.
Table 2-6 DT330 Compatibility Settings
Terminal Lot Number DT-330
ADA-L Unit Switch
Settings
xxx I Lx or lower
(Version 1.E0 or lower)
xxx I Mx
(Version 8.10)
xxxJSx or higher
(Version 2.20 or higher)
ADA Connection for
Recording Only.
Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
4 and 6 are ON.
Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
4 and 6 are ON.
Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
4 and 6 are ON.
ADA Connection for
Sending Recorded
Calls to the Telephone.
Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
1, 4 and 6 are ON.
Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
1, 4 and 6 are ON.
Dip switches 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
1, 4 and 6 are ON.
To Send and Receive
to the Terminal
Not supported
Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
4 and 6 are ON.
Dip switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 7
and 8 are OFF. Switches
4 and 6 are ON.
Lot Numbers: I, J – Hardware Revision
Lot Numbers: L, M, S – Software Revision

To verify DT-330 terminal firmware, hold down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the terminal.
Table 2-7 Firmware Compatibility Matrix
BCH-L Unit Lot Number
Terminal
Lot
Number
DT-330

xxx I xx or lower
(Version 8.10 and 1, E0 or lower)
xxxJxx or higher
(Version 2.20 or higher)
xxxDxx or lower
xxxExx or higher
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
BCH Support may differ based on terminal firmware. To verify both DT-330 terminal and BCH-L Unit firmware, hold
down keypad buttons 1, 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord into the terminal.
Default Settings
None
2 - 56
Ancillary Device Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals except DTR-2DT-1 TEL, DTP-2DT-1 TEL, and DTP-16HC-1 TEL.
Required Component(s)

AP(R)-R

AP(A)-R

PSA-L

ADA-L

APR-L
Related Features
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-03
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) –
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
Ancillary Device Connection
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for 500/2500 type single
line telephones.
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
2
3

2 - 57
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (LCA PKG Setup) –
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for 500/2500 type single
line telephones.
1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
15-03-01
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – SLT Signaling Type
Tell the system the type of dialing
the connected telephone uses.
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
(default = 1)

15-03-04
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Flashing
Enable/Disable Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 1)

10-03-04
3

Operation
Depends on the connected ancillary device.
2 - 58
Ancillary Device Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Answer Hold
Description
Answer Hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing Answer Key to answer an incoming
ringing call or a Camp-On call. When the multiline terminal user is already answering a call, the first call
is automatically placed on hold, depending on the user setting in Program 15-02-06.
Conditions

When multiple incoming calls activate the Answer Key LED, the LED continues to flash until
all calls are answered.

Use Program 15-02-06 (Normal Common, Exclusive Hold) to set the type of Hold key to be
used (Default = Normal Common).

For calls placed in a Park Group, the LED blinks fast (green).

For calls placed in a Park Group by another user, the LED blinks slow (red).

The Answer Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions.

The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls.

CO/PBX incoming calls, not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group, do not
activate the Answer Hold feature.

If the direct trunk appearance key is not assigned when all Call Appearance Keys are in
use, the next incoming call cannot be answered.
Default Settings
Normal Hold
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Answer Hold
2 - 59
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Answer Key
Central Office Calls, Answering
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-32
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Answer for Park Hold
Assign a key on the multiline
terminal or single line telephone
for park hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 6)

15-02-06
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Hold Key Operating
Mode
Set the function of the Multiline
Hold key. The Hold key can
activate normal Hold or Exclusive
Hold.
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(default = 0)

Programmable Function Keys
Assign a park group to multiline
terminal line key.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
15-07-01

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2 - 60
3

Answer Hold
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-09-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turn Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
2
3
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
destination extension must be
busy for a second DNIS caller
to ring through. If the
destination extension does not
have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of
this program setting.

Operation
To answer a call on a different line key or CAP key with a call in progress:
1.
Receive a CO/PBX, DID/DISA/DIL/E&M incoming ring.

2.
Answer flashes.
Press Answer, and answer the new call.

3.
The Answer LED goes out. The original call is put on hold.
If additional calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold and connect to the
next call as long as Call Appearance Keys and or CO line keys are available.
Answer Hold
2 - 61
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 62
Answer Hold
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Answer Key
Description
Multiline terminals have an Answer Key with an LED that flashes when the multiline terminal user
receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer call. When multiple calls are
received, the Answer Key is used to pick up calls and continues flashing until the last unanswered call is
answered. Press the Answer Key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be
answered.
Conditions

The Answer LED functions for incoming CO/PBX calls, CO/PBX transfer/camp-on calls,
and transfer/camp-on Tie/DID calls.

Incoming calls answered by Answer are handled first in-first out.

An Internal call, internal transfer/camp-on call, CAR/SIE/VE calls do not activate the
Answer LED.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Answer Hold
Answer Key
2 - 63
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-04-01
22-05-01
2 - 64
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Incoming Trunk Ring Group
Assignment
Assign the incoming trunk type for
each trunk.
2
Incoming Type for Day/
Night Mode (1~8):
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)

Assign extensions (up to 32) to
Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions
according to Ring Group
programming. There are 100
available ring groups.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.

Assign trunks to incoming Ring
Groups. Use this program to
assign Normal Ring Trunks
(Program 22-02) to Incoming Ring
Groups (Program 22-04).
Incoming Group
Number for Day/Night
Mode (1~8):
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)

3
Answer Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-07-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DIL Assignment
Assign the destination extension
or Department Group Pilot
Number for each DIL Incoming
trunk.
Number of Transferring
Destinations for Day/
Night Modes (1~8):
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
Pilot Number
(default not assigned)
2
3

Operation
To answer calls using the Answer Key:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Press Answer.
3.
Talk with the CO/PBX incoming calling party.
4.
When additional CO incoming calls are received, press Answer to place the current call on hold
and connect the multiline terminal user to the next call.
Answer Key
2 - 65
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 66
Answer Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Attendant Call Queuing
Description
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear a busy
tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination
for unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to
the attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, unanswered calls
would normally “stack up” for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, Tie Line and transferred calls. If the attendant
does not have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line to be answered. If the attendant has
more than 32 calls queued, an extension can transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy
Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
Conditions

Forwarding when unanswered or busy can occur only at the attendant if more than 32 calls
are in queue.

Assigning a station as operator in Program 20-17-01 enables call queuing function.

Program 20-17-01 setting overrides setting in Program 20-09-07: Call Queuing Class of
Service Option when set to disable.
Default Settings
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals assigned as an operator
Required Component(s)
None
Attendant Call Queuing
2 - 67
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-01-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Numbering – Service
Code
Set the system internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. The numbering
plan assigns the first and second
digits dialed and affects the digits
an extension user must dial to
access other extensions and
features, such as service codes
and trunk codes. If the default
numbering plan does not meet the
site requirements, use this
program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.
Refer to System
Numbering Default
Settings table in the
UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming Manual
for a list of default
settings.
20-01-01
System Options – Operator
Access Mode
Assign the priority of a call when
calling an operator telephone.
0 = Step
1 = Circular
(default = 0)
20-09-07
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
20-17-01
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
Define the extension numbers
which are to be used by operators.
Up to eight digits
(default = ext. 101)
24-02-01
System Options for Transfer –
Busy Transfer
Enable/Disable extensions to
Transfer calls to busy extensions.
If disabled, calls transferred to
busy extensions recall
immediately.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
2 - 68
2
3





Attendant Call Queuing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
None
Attendant Call Queuing
2 - 69
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 70
Attendant Call Queuing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Enhancements
With Version 5000 or higher software, ACD calls can be routed based on agent skill levels.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the number of ACD MIS Monitoring programs that can run
simultaneously increases from five to a maximum of 16.
With Version 8000 or higher software, ACD calls can be marked so that the next time the same
Caller ID calls back in the call will attempt to return to the original agent first.
Description
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among agents of a programmed ACD
Group. When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that
has been idle the longest. Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and comprehensive
than Department Calling and other group services – it can accurately judge the work load at each agent
and distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 ACD Groups and 512 ACD agents.
You can put any agent in any group. An agent can be in more than one group only when using AICs.
This allows, for example, a Technical Service representative to answer customer service calls at lunch
when many of the Customer Service representatives are unavailable.
The ACD Master Number is the extension number of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or
transferred to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the master
number can be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the normal
extension range.
Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:
ACD Call Queuing
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the Queue
Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor display. The display helps the supervisor keep
track of the traffic load in their group.
The Queue Status Displays shows:

The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group.

The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:

The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 71
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs.

If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm when the time in queue portion reoccurs.

This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.

A remote K-CCIS user can call, or transfer to an ACD Pilot number. However, an incoming K-CCIS
call to the ACD Pilot does NOT provide a Link Reconnect.
ACD Overflow (With Announcements)
ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in when all
agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announcement). This
announcement can be a general greeting like, “Thank you for calling. All of our agents are currently busy
helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly.” If the caller continues to
wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd Announcement) such as, “Your
business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent. Please
stay on the line.” If all the ACD Group agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to
another ACD Group or the Voice Mail. If all agents in the overflow ACD Group are busy, Lookback
Routing automatically ensures that the waiting call rings into the first agent in either group that becomes
free.
You can assign an ACD Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announcement and
overflow methods. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd
Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the same time, you can have
a Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow.
You can assign an ACD Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message. The
Queue Depth can be played after the 1st Announcement only, 2nd Announcement only, or after both
Announcements.
Dial Out of Delay Announcements
When listening to a VRS delay announcement, the caller can press a 1-key option to transfer them to
another extension, Voice Mail, Ring Group, another ACD Group, or to a Speed Dial bin. The caller can
press the digit during the message only or for X seconds after the message. This per Queue option
effects both the first and second delay announcement if set.
VRS Delay Announcements Using VM8000 InMail
VM8000 InMail can provide ACD Delay Announcements. Any of the 32 (1~32) VM8000 InMail Routing
mailboxes (Program 47-07-01) can be set to Announcement mailboxes and can be used as the
message source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages. This option is applicable only to ACD
Overflow modes that are assigned ACD delayed messages and Program 41-08-03 must be set to 2.
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is available to
receive ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the group calls. The
programmable keys and Alphanumeric Display on an agent telephone show at a glance when they are
logged in or logged out.
2 - 72
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Agent Identity Code (AIC)
An Agent Identity Code (AIC) allows ACD agents to log in any extension without setting Program
41-02-01. Using AIC, ACD agents can also log in to multiple ACD groups at the same time (up to 64
ACD Groups). The system also allows all extensions (up to the system maximum) to log in using the
same AIC code. AIC and ACD groups for each work period (mode pattern number) can be set in
Program 41-18-01 as shown in the following example.
Table
#
AIC
1
789
2
Operation
Group
Mode Pattern Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
789
1
2
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
789
1
16
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
567
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
678
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
678
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
678
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Example:
With this example, ACD works as follows:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789

During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, and 16 at the same time.

During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 1.

During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents do not belong to any ACD group and the ACD extensions work as
normal extensions.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 567

During Mode Patterns 1~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 3: Log In with AIC 678

During Mode Patterns 1~8, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 2, 3 and 5 at the same time.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 73
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Multiple Agent Log In
ACD agents can log in any extension with multiple AICs (up to three). Using the example setup above,
ACD works as follows:
EXAMPLE:
Example 1: Log In with AIC 789 and 567

During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 10 and 16 at the same time.

During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1 and 10.

During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD group 10.
Example 2: Log In with AIC 789, 567 and 678

During Mode Pattern 1, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 and 16 at the same time.

During Mode Pattern 2, ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10.

During Mode Pattern 3~8, ACD agents belong to only ACD groups 2, 3, 5 and 10.
Some conditions with Multiple Agent Log In:

ACD agents cannot log in to the system supervisor or group supervisor extension.

To log in with AIC, the extension should be set to AIC Log In mode in Program 41-17-01.

If the extension is set to AIC log in mode in Program 41-17-01, the system ignores the setting of
Program 41-02-01 for the extension.

Multiple extensions (up to the maximum capacity of the extension) can log-in with one AIC. For
example, even if ACD agent A logs in extension 350 with AIC 789, ACD agent B can also log in to
extension 351 with the same AIC 789 at the same time.

A supervisor cannot log out an agent logged in by an AIC code.
Emergency Call
If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their ACD Group
Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically monitor both the ACD
Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can join in the conversation.
Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advice or
assistance with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then “jump in” if
the situation gets out of hand.
Enhanced DSS Operation
A programmed extension user can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD Agents in a
group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. The console key flash rates tell the
supervisor at a glance which of the group agents is:

Logged onto the group (i.e., in service).

Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service).
2 - 74
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100

Busy on a call.

Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor.

Not available or installed.
Issue 12.0
The ACD Supervisor can use their console also for placing and transferring calls – just like any other
extension user.
Flexible Time Schedules
An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for scheduling the
activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up to eight Work Periods
in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but different days can share the
same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two
Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM – when your business is open. Work
Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM – which covers those times when your business is closed.
Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)
An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can use a customer-provided headset in place of the handset.
The headset conveniently frees up the user’s hands for other work and provides privacy while on the
call. In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer. This allows an agent busy
on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up.
Incoming Call Routing
Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls ring directly
into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated Attendant.
Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agent’s telephone. There are two types of Rest Mode:
Manual Rest Mode:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily leave the ACD Group. They
might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area. While in Rest Mode, calls
to the ACD Group do not ring the agent’s telephone.
Automatic Rest Mode:
When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system automatically puts an agent’s telephone in Rest
Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers do not have to wait while ACD rings an extension that is not
answered. For multiline terminals, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for all telephones with Rest Mode
keys. For single line telephones, you must set an option in programming to enable Automatic Rest Mode. If an
agent’s telephone is placed in Rest Mode because a call is not answered, the agent needs to manually cancel
Rest Mode to log back into the ACD group.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 75
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
With a Rest Mode key programmed on an ACD agent’s telephone, when the agent is in rest mode, the key is
lit. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call, the key flashes to indicate a pre-Rest Mode
status. When the current call is finished, the agent’s telephone is in rest mode. The agent can place intercom
calls or receive direct incoming calls while in Rest Mode. The ability to receive incoming intercom calls is
defined in system programming for each ACD group.

An ACD System Supervisor cannot be placed in Rest Mode.
Supervisor, ACD Group
You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the group supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD
Group Supervisor, the user can:

Take the entire ACD Group out of service.

Check the log out status of each agent after the group is taken down.

Restore the ACD Group to service.
During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group supervisor:

Supervisor’s extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group.

Supervisor’s extension can receive only ACD Group calls during overflow conditions.

Supervisor’s extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent.
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. An extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD
Group.
Supervisor, ACD System
You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD System
Supervisor, the user can:

Take all the system ACD Groups out of service simultaneously.

Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down.

Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously.
The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.
Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agent’s telephone so they can work at their desk
uninterrupted. This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are
finished with their call. There are two types of Work Time:
Manual Work Time:
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time anytime they need to work at their desk undisturbed. You might
prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper work after they
complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually return themselves to
the ACD Group.
2 - 76
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Automatic Work Time:
The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call. This is
helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a requirement for every
call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.
Hotline Key Shows Agent Status
An extension Hotline key provides the normal Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a unique BLF
for ACD Agents. Like the supervisor’s DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows when the covered
agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department manager, for
example, ACD Group monitoring abilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console.
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline
partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer
calls to each other just by pressing a single key. Enhanced for ACD applications, Hotline provides a
unique Busy Lamp Field for ACD agents as well as a BLF for co-workers that are not ACD agents. The
charts below show both sets of BLF indications.
BLF For ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
The ACD Agent is . . .
Off
Idle and is not an ACD Agent
On
Busy
Double Wink Off
Making an Emergency Call
Wink Off
Logged off or not installed
Double Wink On
Logged on
BLF For Co-Workers That Are Not ACD Agents
When the key is . . .
Your co-worker is . . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast
Flash In Do Not Disturb – All calls (option 3)
or Intercom calls (option 2)
Enhanced Supervisor Options:
An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agent’s status once
assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agents as work loads vary.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 77
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Queue Status Display with Scrolling:
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call queues and causes the Queue Status
Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor and/or agent’s display (based on the Class of Service). The
display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load in their group. Any display multiline terminal can have
a Queue Status Display Check programmable function key. The multiline terminal user can press this key
anytime while idle, and using the VOL () and VOL (), scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the
ACD Groups. The Queue Status Displays shows (see the Queue Status Display illustration below):

The number of calls queued.

The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
The number of
calls in queue.
How long the longest queued
call has been waiting.
2 LINE-001
01:30
Name of trunk that has
been queued the longest.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:

The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.

How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status display Timing
illustration below).

Queue Status Display holding time.

Queue Status Alarm enable/disable.

Queue Status Alarm sending time.
2 - 78
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
When Logged Out of ACD Group:
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue, the telephones of the logged out
agents display the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming. Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle
until the time in Program 41-20-03 expires again.

Do not use both Program 41-15-01~02 and Program 41-20-01~05 to set the ACD queue alarm. Select
either one or the other for the system to follow.
Available in Program
41-15-01~02
Available in Program
41-20-01~05
Queue Status
Display
---
Yes
Queue Status
Display Time
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Program 41-15-02
determines the length/
interval of the alarm.
Yes
---
Yes
Alarm triggered after the
number of calls in
Program 41-15-01 is
exceeded.
Alarm triggered after the
number of calls in
Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded. Then follows
Program 41-20-03
timing for displaying
status.
Feature
Alarm
Alarm Send Time
Interval Time of
Queue Status
Display
Class of Service
Timing of alarm and
display queue
status
Yes

If a telephone is not idle, it cannot use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key.

The Queue Status Display is not shown and the Queue Alarm is not heard by ACD agents in Off-Duty
mode.

To scroll through the ACD groups queue status, the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key
must be used. You cannot scroll when the Queue Status Display is displayed due to an alarm.

If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered/disconnected, the
display and alarm continue until the times in Program 41-20-02 and Program 41-20-05 expire.

When an overflowed call is in queue, the call is included in its original ACD group queue and not in the
group queue to which it overflowed.

The Queue Status is not displayed on a supervisor’s telephone based on the settings in Programs
41-20-xx. The supervisor must use the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the
queue.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 79
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any ACD
calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes
in. When the time expires, the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers.
MIS
The UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD MIS is a series of Windows®-based software programs designed to
enhance the ACD features of the UNIVERGE SV8100 Telephone System. The software displays both
real-time data and historical reports. The UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD MIS is supported on Windows XP,
Windows Vista 32-bit, and Windows 7 32- and 64-bit. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD MIS
Supervisors Manual for more information.
ACD Group as Overflow Destination
The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific ACD Group, off-site via a speed dial bin, Ring
Group or to voice mail using Program 41-09-01. When Program 41-08-02: ACD Overflow Destination
has the ACD Overflow Destination set to 65, the system overflows the call to the ACD Group
programmed in Program 41-09-01. (The system does not allow you to program an ACD group with that
ACD group as the overflow.) If, while the call is ringing, the extension where the call was transferred
becomes available, both the extension and the overflow ACD group ring.
ACD Skill Based Routing (Version 5000 or higher is required)
With Version 5000 or higher CPU Software, the system can receive and distribute ACD calls based on
the Agent’s skill level. There are seven priority levels that the Agents can be set to for each ACD Queue.
Each queue can have a different priority level. This works for both AIC and Normal Agents. The Skill
levels are based on the Login ID that the Agents use. Both the V5000 Enhancement license (0034) and
the ACD Advance license (2105) are required. Refer to the ACD Installation Manual for more
information on how to set this up.
ACD Caller ID Based Routing (Version 8000 or higher is required)
The SV8100 can allocate an ACD incoming call to an agent by using Caller ID registered in a buffer.
This is done when an ACD Agent presses the [ACD Caller ID Marking Setup] Function Key and marks
information of the caller when he thinks this caller would call again. By the ACD Agent pressing the
Function Key that marks the Caller ID to the system, the next time the same Caller ID calls back into
ACD, the Caller ID based routing tries to route the call to the agent that marked the call. It provides
smoother call center operation. ACD Caller ID based Routing requires both the V8000 Enhancement
license (0037) and the ACD Advance license (2105).
Conditions
System:
2 - 80

The Call Duration Timer (Program 20-13-36) is not displayed for inbound ACD calls.

VM8000 InMail can play ACD Delay Announcements.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue, a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number
recalls immediately back to the transferring party (Version 2500 or lower software).

If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue, a trunk call directly to the Queue is placed in
queue.

If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue, a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number
recalls immediately back to the transferring party if no Overflow Destination is setup
(Version 3000 or higher software is required).

If all agents are logged out of an ACD Queue, a transferred call to the ACD Pilot number
will be placed in queue if an Overflow Destination is setup (Version 3000 or higher
software is required).

If defined in Program 22-11-03, DID calls in queue display the trunk name with the Queue
Status feature.

When Program 12-07-01 is customized, an agent’s display does not indicate the WAIT
ACD LOGIN status, however an agent may still log in.

Conversation Recording is programmed system-wide – it is not ACD feature-specific.

Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for additional information.

Up to 16 channels (speech paths) are available when using the DSP with VRS installed on
the CD-CP00-US for messages.

When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is providing the 1st Delay Announcements, it continues to play
until the call is answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-04 expires and starts to play the
2nd Delay Announcement. The 2nd Delay Announcement continues to play until the call is
answered, abandoned, or the time in 41-10-05 expires and drops the call. This message
does not start from the beginning because it is on a constant loop.

The Dial Out of Queue feature is not supported during VM8000 InMail Delay
Announcements.

Wireless DECT (SIP) is not supported with ACD.

When all VM8000 InMail talk paths (ports) are simultaneously being accessed by VM8000
InMail Mailbox subscribers or Voice Mail Delay Announcements, or combination of the two,
the next incoming call to the VM8000 InMail will Ring No Answer until an available talk path
becomes idle (First Come – First Served).

When Voice Mail Delay Announcements are being played, VM8000 InMail talk paths (ports)
are used.

VM8000 InMail cannot be used for ACD Night Announcement.

Program 41-08-03: ACD Overflow Options – Delay Announcement Source Type.

The ACI port used for the ACD Delay Announcements is programmed like Music on Hold
(MOH) ACI ports. Refer to the MOH Music on Hold on page 2-1111.

ACD can only support one Music on Hold source.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 81
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When an agent is in a Ring Group and logged in, it will not ring when a call comes to the
Ring Group. It will ring when logged out.

If a phone has never been brought up and is assigned as an agent, the system will have to
be reset before the phone is able to login.

The End of Work Key (14) from a System Supervisor will only put ACD Groups that have
Normal Agents logged in into the End of Work. Groups that only have AIC agents will not
be put in the End of Work.

AIC code tables 65 ~ 512 are only available when a PZ-ME50-US is mounted on the
CD-CP00-US.

UCB is not supported in conjunction with ACD.

If the Help key is pressed when an Agent is logged in, calls in Queue are not received until
the Agent exits the Help menu.

When ACD delay announcements are used, and a call is delivered to an available ACD
agent, the agent MLT display may show one or two exclamation points while the call is
ringing.

One exclamation point – indicates the incoming caller has queued long enough to hear the
first delay announcement.

Two exclamation points – the caller has been in queue and heard both the first and second
delay announcements.

If an ACD Agent places an ACD call on hold to answer an incoming non-ACD call (Trunk or
Station), the system will offer another ACD call to the Agent when the non-ACD call
terminates. To prevent the second ACD call from being sent, it is recommended the Agent
go into the break or wrap mode before finishing the non-ACD call.

On ACD extensions, Hold Recall to Operator is not supported.

When a caller dials out of one queue into another queue, the overflow timer of the original
queue is followed.
MIS:
2 - 82

InServer Blade – The InServer is an in-skin blade for the SV8100 designed to be an
application server for several of the external applications available for the SV8100 product
line. Initially, the InServer will come pre-installed with Windows Embedded Standard OS
and support the setup and deployment of the NEC Desktop Suite and InACD MIS (Version
5000 or higher software is required).

The UNIVERGE SV8100 system does not buffer the ACD Statistics when the PC running
the ACD Server application is not connected.

The programming of the Agents and Queues in the UNIVERGE SV8100 system are not
transferred to the PC running the ACD Server/MIS applications. The ACD Server/MIS
applications are programmed separately.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

A supervisor assigned to not receive calls or take calls after the overflow time is reached
shows as idle in MIS when they are logged in and idle even when calls are queued up and
not reaching the overflow timer.

Call Detail by Queue Report shows the Caller ID (if available) for each call. (ACD MIS
1.5.0.0 or higher is required).

A new report (Abandoned Call Detail by Queue) has been built and will display the Caller ID
for each abandoned call. (ACD MIS 1.5.0.0 or higher is required).
Default Setting
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for more details.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)

ACD Software License

PZ-VM21 Unit

VM8000 InMail Compact Flash

VM8000 InMail license (1002)
(For Delay Announcements using VM8000 InMail)
Required Software
None
Related Features
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
VM8000 InMail
Music on Hold
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 83
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Night Service
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for complete programming information.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-13-01
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD LogIn/Log Out (for KTS)
Assign for multiline terminals and
single line telephones.
MLT, SLT
(default =  5)

11-13-02
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Log Out (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 655)

11-13-03
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 656)

11-13-04
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time
(for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 657)

11-13-05
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 658)

11-13-06
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT)
Assign for single line telephones.
SLT
(default = 659)

11-13-08
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Login
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to
log into a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)

11-13-09
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Agent ID Code Logout
Assign to allow an AIC Agent to
log out of a group.
MLT
(default not assigned)

11-13-10
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Login by Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD
Supervisor to log into a group.
MLT
(default = 667)

11-13-11
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Logout by
Supervisor
Assign to allow an ACD
Supervisor to log out of a group.
MLT
(default = 668)

2 - 84
3
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
11-13-12
11-13-13
11-17-01
15-07-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
Change Agent ACD Group by
Supervisor
When using service code 669 to
change an agent ACD group, the
supervisor must enter a 2-digit
number for the group. For
example, to change to ACD group
4, the entry would be 669 04.
MLT
(default = 669)
Service Code Setup (for ACD) –
ACD Agent Changing Own ACD
Group
When this service code is used, an
ACD Agent can reassign
themselves to another ACD
Group.
MLT
(default = 670)
ACD Group Pilot Number
Assign the ACD Master Number
for each ACD Group.
ACD Group Number:
01~64
ACD Group Pilot
Number:
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
15-09-01
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
3

Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
15-08-01
2
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the
function key on the key telephone,
select the ring tone when receiving
a call on that key.
For ACD CAR keys, only tone
pattern 1 (entry 0) can be used.
The remaining patterns are not
checked with this feature.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring
Tone Extension
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
(default = 0, Tone
Pattern 1)
Assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or
Virtual Extension Group Answer
Key, which is defined in Program
15-07. Make an assignment for
each Night Service Mode. There
are 256 Virtual Extension Ports.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Ringing:
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
(default = 0)





2 - 85
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-11-01
20-04-03
20-06-01
20-13-06
20-13-33
20-13-39
22-01-11
30-01-01
30-05-04
2 - 86
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Assign the delayed ringing options
for an extension Virtual Extension
or Virtual Extension Group Answer
keys (defined in Program 15-09).
You make an assignment for each
Night Service Mode. There are
256 Virtual Extension Ports.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Ringing:
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
(default = 0)
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring
the extension after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (COS)
to an extension. There are 15
Classes of Service that can be
assigned. Assign eight entries,
one for each Night Service Mode.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
Set this option to On for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10~11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension,
which has this option enabled,
also hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

System Options for Incoming
Calls – VRS Waiting Message
Interval Time
Setup the sending duration time of
the Auto – Attendant & Queuing.
The message is repeatedly sent
out during the specified time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
DSS Console Operating Mode
Set the mode of the system DSS
consoles. The entry for this option
applies to all the system DSS
consoles.
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = ACD Monitor Mode
3 = Business/ACD
Mode
(default = 0)

Define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
The entry for this option applies to
all the system DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data
0~7
[default = 7(on)]

Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Busy
3



Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
30-05-05
DSS Console Lamp Table – Out
of Schedule (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for out of
schedule (ACD/DSS) functions on
the DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]

30-05-06
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data:
0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]

30-05-07
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data:
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]

30-05-08
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.
Lamp Pattern Data:
0~7
[default = 6 (IW)]

40-10-01
Voice Announcement Service
Option – VRS Fixed Message
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
system ability to play the fixed
VRS messages (such as You have
a message).
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)

41-01-01
System Options for ACD –
System Supervisory Extension
Define the ACD Supervisor for the
entire system.
Up to eight digits
(0~9, , #)
(default not assigned)

41-01-02
System Options for ACD – Login
ID Code Digit
Define the number of digits for
agent login ID code.
0~20 (0 = No Login ID)
(default = 0)

41-01-03
System Options for ACD – ACD
MIS Connection Ports
Define what port is used for ACD
MIS connection. Currently only
LAN is supported.
0 = None
3 = LAN
(CD-CP00-US)
(default = 0)
41-01-04
System Options for ACD –
ACD-MIS Command Notification
when a BT Message is returned
ACD-MIS Command Notification
when a BT message is returned.
0 = Notifies
1 = No notification
(default = 0)
41-02-01
ACD Group and Agent
Assignments
For each ACD extension number,
assign an ACD Group (1~64). An
ACD Group number is assigned to
each Work Period number (1~8).
ACD Work Period
Mode Number: 1~8
ACD Group Number:
0~64 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)

Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
ACD Group Number
For each incoming trunk group set
up in Program 22-05, designate
which ACD Group (1~64) the
trunks should ring for each of the
eight Work Periods.
ACD Group Number:
0~64
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)

Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
Night Announcement Service
Designate for each incoming
trunk, whether or not Night
Announcement Service is
assigned.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
41-03-01
41-03-02
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)



2 - 87
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Incoming Ring Group
Assignment for ACD Group –
Priority Data
Determine whether an incoming
call to a trunk ring group should
follow a priority assignment.
0, 1~7
0 = No Priority
1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority
(default = 0)

41-04-01
ACD Group Supervisor – Group
Supervisor Extension
Assign the group supervisor
extension.
Extension Number =
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)

41-04-02
ACD Group Supervisor –
Operation Type
Assign the supervisor operating
type.
0 = Do Not receive any
ACD incoming calls
(No)
1 = Receive ACD
incoming calls in case
of overflow (Busy)
2 = Receive ACD
incoming calls all the
time (Yes)
(default = 0)

41-03-03
41-05-01
41-06-01
2 - 88
ACD Agent Work Schedules
Trunk Work Schedules
Set up the Work Schedules for
ACD Agents and Groups. For
each ACD Work Schedule (1~4),
designate the start and stop times
for each of the eight Work Periods.
After the schedules are set up in
this program, assign them to days
of the week in Program 41-07.
(This is the same program used by
the Trunk Work Schedules.)
After the schedules are set up in
this program, assign them to days
of the week in Program 41-07.
Work Period Mode
Number = 1~8
Start Time =
0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Default:
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
Set up the Work Schedules for
trunks. For each Work Schedule
(1~4), designate the start and stop
times for each of the eight Work
Periods.
After the schedules are set up,
assign them to days of the week in
Program 41-07.
Work Period Mode
Number = 1~8
Start Time =
0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Default:
(Start) 0000
(End) 0000
3


Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
41-07-01
41-08-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
ACD Overflow Options –
Overflow Operation Mode
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Assign the four Work Schedules
(1~4) to days of the week.
The assignments made in this
program apply to both the ACD
Agent Work Schedules (Program
41-05) and the Trunk Work
Schedules (Program 41-06).
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number
calls. Each ACD Group can have
unique overflow options.
Day No./Time Pattern:
1 = Sunday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
2 = Monday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
3 = Tuesday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
4 = Wednesday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
5 = Thursday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
6 = Friday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
7 = Saturday/ 0~4
(0 = No ACD)
(default = 0)
0 = No overflow (None)
1 = Overflow with No
Announcement
2 = No Overflow with
First Announcement
Only
3 = No Overflow with
First & Second
Announcements
4 = Overflow with First
Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First
and Second
Announcement
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = No Overflow with
Second
Announcement Only
9 = Overflow with
Second
Announcement Only
(default = 0)
2
3


2 - 89
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
41-08-02
41-08-03
41-08-04
41-08-05
41-08-06
41-09-01
41-10-01
2 - 90
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number
calls. Each ACD Group can have
unique overflow options.
0 = No Setting
1~64 = ACD Group
65 = Overflow Table
(Program 41-09)
66 = Voice Mail
Integration
67 = System Speed
(Program 41-08-05)
68 = Incoming Ring
Group (Program
41-08-06)
(default = 0)
Assign the overflow mode (0~9),
destination and announcement
message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number
calls. Each ACD Group can have
unique overflow options.
0 = ACI
1 = VRS
2 = VM8000 InMail
(default = 0)
ACD Overflow Options – ACD
Overflow Transfer Time
Define the time before ACD
overflow occurs. Each ACD
Group can have unique overflow
options.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
ACD Overflow Options – System
Speed Dial Bin
Assign the speed dial bin to be
used as the ACD overflow
destination. Using a speed dial
bin for ACD Overflow is supported
only for off premise calls.
0~1999
(Used when 41-08-02
is set to 67)
(default = 1999)

ACD Overflow Options –
Incoming Ring Group when
Overflow
Assign the Ring Group for ACD
overflow calls to go to.
1~100
(Used when 41-08-02
is set to 68)
(default = 1)

ACD Overflow Table Setting
Define the ACD group to which a
call is transferred when overflow
occurs.
0~65
0 = No Setting
65 = In-Skin Voice Mail
Integration
(default = 0)

Define the ACI port number to be
used for the delay announcement.
This program is activated when
the delay announcement source
and options are assigned as ACI
in Program 41-08-03.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
ACD Overflow Options – ACD
Overflow Destination
ACD Overflow Options – Delay
Announcement Source Type
ACI Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Announcement ACI Port
Number
3




Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement ACI Port
Number
Define the ACI port number to be
used for the delay
announcement.This program is
activated when the delay
announcement source and options
are assigned as ACI in Program
41-08-03.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
41-10-03
ACI Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Announcement
Connection Timer
Define the time before the 1st
Delay Announcement is played.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 4)
41-10-04
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement
Connection Timer
Set the time between when the 1st
Delay Announcement plays and
when the 2nd Delay
Announcement plays.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60)
ACI Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Announcement Sending
Duration
Set the time the 2nd Delay
Announcement plays. After this
time expires, the call disconnects.
To keep the call in queue, set this
time to 0.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
41-11-01
VRS Delay Announcement –
Delay Message Start Timer
Set the time before the 1st Delay
Message Starts.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
41-11-02
VRS Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Message Number
Assign the VRS message number
to be used as the message source
for the 1st and 2nd Delay
Announcement Messages. Refer
to Program 41-08 for more on
setting up the ACD overflow
options. This program is activated
when the delay announcement
source and options are assigned
as VRS in Program 41-08-03.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
(default = 0)
41-10-02
41-10-05
2
3






41-11-03
VRS Delay Announcement – 1st
Delay Message Sending Count
Input the number of times the 1st
Delay Message is sent. If set to 0,
the message is not played.
0~255
(default = 0)

41-11-04
VRS Delay Announcement – 2nd
Delay Message Number
Input the VRS Message to be
played as the 2nd Delay Message.
0~101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
(default = 0)

41-11-05
VRS Delay Announcement – 2nd
Waiting Message Sending Count
Input the number of times the 2nd
Delay Message is sent. If set to 0,
the message is not played.
0~255
(default = 0)

41-11-06
VRS Delay Announcement –
Tone Kind at Message Interval
Input what is heard between the
Delay messages.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
(default = 0)

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 91
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
41-11-07
VRS Delay Announcement –
ACD Forced Disconnect Time
after the 2nd Delay Message
Set the time, after the last 2nd
Delay Message is played, before
the call is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
0 = No Disconnect
(default = 60)

41-11-08
VRS Delay Announcement –
Queue Depth Announcement
(Requires VRS)
Input when the Queue Depth
Announcement will be played.
0 = Disable
1 = After 1st (1st)
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)
(default = 0)

Night Announcement Setup –
Night Announcement Source
Type
Define the source for each ACD
groups night announcement.
Night announcement availability
depends on the setting in Program
41-03-02.
0 = ACI
1 = VRS
(default = 0)
41-12-02
Night Announcement Setup –
Night Announcement ACI Port
Number
Define the ACI port to be used for
the ACD Night Announcement
function.
0~96
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)
41-12-03
Night Announcement Setup –
ACD Night Announce Sending
Time
Define the time the ACD night
Announcement plays. Only used
when Program 41-12-01 is set to 0
(ACI). Night announcement
availability depends on the setting
in Program 41-03-02.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
VRS Message Number for Night
Announcement – VRS Message
Number
Define the VRS message number
to be used as the night
announcement. This program is
activated when the night
announcement source is assigned
as VRS in Program 41-12-01.
0~100
0 = No Message
(default = 0)
VRS Message Number for Night
Announcement – Tone Kind at
Message Interval
Define what is heard between the
Night Announcements.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
(default = 0)

ACD Options Setup –
Emergency Call Operation Mode
Define if Emergency Calls ring the
system supervisory extension or
not when the group supervisory
extension is busy. This option
allows the supervisor to press an
Emergency Key (programmed for
this feature) once to monitor the
call or twice to barge in on the call.
The supervisor must be logged in
for this feature to work.
0 = Call to system
supervisory extension
when group
supervisory extension
is busy.
1 = No calls to system
supervisory extension
when group
supervisory extension
is busy.
(default = 0)

41-12-01
41-13-01
41-13-02
41-14-01
2 - 92
3




Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Define if agents manually enter
wrap mode by pressing a key, or
are put automatically into wrap
mode at end of an ACD call. This
setting applies to all agents in the
selected group.
0 = After wrap up mode
key is pressed
(Manual)
1 = After call is finished
automatically (Auto)
(default = 0)

ACD Options Setup – ACD
Priority for Overflow Calls
This option determines whether
the ACD group should use its own
priority assignment or if it should
follow the priority assigned in
Program 41-03-03.
0 = Own group priority
1 = Priority order by
Program 41-03-03
(default = 0)

41-14-04
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Answer at Headset
Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic
Answer for agents using headsets.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)

41-14-06
ACD Options Setup – Call
Queuing after 2nd
Announcement
Determine whether the caller
should hear the 2nd Delay
Announcement and then be taken
out of queue (1), or be placed
back into queue (0).
0 = Enable (Yes)
1 = Disable (No)
(default = 0)
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Off Duty for SLT
Enable (1)/Disable (0 Automatic
Off Duty (rest) mode for agents
with single line telephones.
0 = No change to off
duty mode
1 = Change to off duty
mode automatically
(Skip)
(default = 0)

ACD Options Setup – ACD Off
Duty Mode
Enable (1)/Disable (0) the agent’s
ability to receive internal calls in
ACD Off Duty Mode.
0 = Cannot receive
internal call
1 = Can receive
internal call
(default = 0)

41-14-09
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Wrap Up End Time
Set the time for the Automatic
Wrap Up End Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)

41-14-10
ACD Options Setup – ACD No
Answer Skip Time
Set the time a call to the ACD
Group rings an idle extension
before routing to the next agent.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)

41-14-12
ACD Options Setup – Start
Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for
SLT)
Set the ringing start time for the
headset ear piece on a single line
telephone.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)

ACD Options Setup – ACD
Queue 1-Digit Assignment
Set various options for ACD
Groups. When an option is set for
an ACD Group, the setting is in
force (if applicable) for all agents
in the group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64)
assign the One-Digit number (0~9,
, #) to be used for the One-Digit
Dial Out Option.
1st Data:
Up to one digit
(0, 1~9, #, )
2nd Data:
(default = Blank)
41-14-02
41-14-03
41-14-07
41-14-08
41-14-13-1
ACD Options Setup – Automatic
Wrap Up Mode
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)


2 - 93
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
41-14-13-2
41-14-13-3
41-14-14
41-14-15
41-15-01
41-15-02
2 - 94
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Set various options for ACD
Groups. When an option is set for
an ACD Group, the setting is in
force (if applicable) for all agents
in the group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64),
assign the Destination Number
Type.
2nd Data:
0 = None
1 = Extension or Voice
Mail
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
3 = Speed Dial Bin
4 = ACD Group
(default = 0)
Set various options for ACD
Groups. When an option is set for
an ACD Group, the setting is in
force (if applicable) for all agents
in the group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64),
assign the destination number for
the assigned Destination Type.
3rd Data:
Up to eight digits
(0, 1~9, #, )
(default = Blank)

Set various options for ACD
Groups. When an option is set for
an ACD Group, the setting is in
force (if applicable) for all agents
in the group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64),
assign if the One-Digit Dial Out
option can (1 = Yes) or cannot (0 =
No) be pressed during the Delay
Announcements.
0 = Does not detect
during message
1 = Detect during
message
(default = 1)

Set various options for ACD
Groups. When an option is set for
an ACD Group, the setting is in
force (if applicable) for all agents
in the group.
For each ACD Queue (1~64),
assign the time after the Delay
Announcement that the 1-Digit
Dial Out option works.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
ACD Queue Alarm Information –
Number of Calls in ACD Queue
to Activate Alarm Information
Define the number of calls that
must be in queue before the Alarm
Information is activated.
Do not use these programs if the
alarm options are defined in
Program 41-20-01 through
41-20-05.
0~200
0 = No Alarm
(default = 0)
ACD Queue Alarm Information –
Interval Time of Alarm
Information
Define the time the Alarm will ring
when activated.
Do not use these programs if the
alarm options are defined in
Program 41-20-01 through
41-20-05.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
ACD Options Setup –
Destination Number Type
ACD Options Setup –
Destination Number
ACD Options Setup – DTMF
Detection Assignment during
Delay Announcement
ACD Options Setup – DTMF
Detect Time after Delay
Announcement Message
3




Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
41-16-01
ACD Threshold Overflow –
Number of Calls in Queue
Define the maximum number of
calls allowed in the ACD queue
before overflow occurs.
0~200
(0 = No Limitation)
(default = 0)

41-16-02
ACD Threshold Overflow –
Operation Mode for ACD Queue
Define how the system should
handle calls when the number of
calls in queue exceeds the
threshold.
0 = The last waiting call
is transferred
1 = The longest waiting
call is transferred
2 = Send Busy Tone
(default = 0)

Define the ACD login mode for
each extension. If the AIC Login
Mode is enabled, set the AIC
Login and AIC Logout service
codes for the AIC members in
Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09.
0 = Normal Login Mode
1 = AIC Login Mode
(default = 0)
41-17-01
ACD Login Mode Setup

41-18-01
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Agent Identity Code
Define the ACD Agent Identity
Codes.
Up to four digits
(default not assigned)

41-18-02
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
Default ACD Group Number
Define the default ACD group for
AIC Agents in each AIC table.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-03
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 1
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 1.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-04
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 2
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 2.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-05
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 3
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 3.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-06
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 4
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 4.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-07
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 5
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 5.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-08
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 6
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 6.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-18-09
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 7
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 7.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 95
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
41-18-10
ACD Agent Identity Code Setup –
ACD Group Number in Mode 8
For each AIC table, define the
ACD group AIC Agents are in
during mode 8.
0~64
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

41-19-01
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Delay Message
Start Timer
Assign how long the system waits
before playing the Delay Message.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)

41-19-02
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Mailbox
Number for 1st Announcement
Message
Assign the Voice Mail ACD
Announcement Mailbox as the
message source for the 1st
Announcement Message.
Dial (up to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – 1st Delay
Message Sending Count
Assign the 1st Delay Message
Sending Count. This entry must be
set to 1 or higher for the message
to play.
0 = No message is
played
1~255
(default = 0)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Mailbox
Number for 2nd Announcement
Message
Assign the Voice Mail ACD
Announcement Mailboxes as the
message source for the 2nd
Announcement Message.
Dial (up to eight digits)
(default not assigned)
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – 2nd Delay
Message Sending Count
Assign the 2nd Delay Message
Sending Count. This entry must be
set to 1 or higher for the message
to play.
0 = No message is
played
1~255
(default = 0)

ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Wait Tone Type
at Message Interval
Assign what the caller hears
between the messages.
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = Music On Hold
Tone
2 = Background Music
Source
(default = 0)

ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – ACD Forced
Disconnect Time after 2nd
Announcement
Assign how long the system waits
after the end of the ACD Delay
Message before disconnecting.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
41-19-08
ACD Voice Mail Delay
Announcement – Delay Message
Interval Time
Set the time between the Delay
Messages.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
41-20-01
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Number of Calls in Queue
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should
not be used if 41-15 is set.
Assign the number of calls that
can accumulate in the ACD queue
before the Queue Status Display
(and optional queue alarm)
occurs.
0=No Display, 1~200
(default = 0)
41-19-03
41-19-04
41-19-05
41-19-06
41-19-07
2 - 96
3






Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should
not be used if 41-15 is set.
Assign how long the Queue Status
display remains on the telephone
display.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should
not be used if 41-15 is set.
This option assigns the time that
refreshes the Queue Status Alarm
time in queue display and causes
the optional queue alarm to occur
on telephones active on a call,
logged out, or in wrap-up.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60)
ACD Queue Display Settings –
ACD Call Waiting Alarm
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should
not be used if 41-15 is set.
Enable/Disable the queue alarm.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
ACD Queue Display Settings –
ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold
Time
Program 41-15 can also provide a
queue alarm to the agents. The
options in Program 41-20 should
not be used if 41-15 is set.
Assign the time the Call Waiting
Alarm should sound.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
ACD Login ID Setup – Login ID
Code
Input the Login IDs that will be
used (Version 5000 or higher).
Up to 20 digits
(followed by Program
41-01-02)
(default not assigned)

41-21-02
ACD Login ID Setup – Skill Table
Number
Input the Skill Table number to be
used for each Login ID (Version
5000 or higher).
0, 1~512
(default = 0)

41-22-01
ACD Skill Based Routing Setup –
Skill Base Routing
Turn On (1)/Off (0) the Skill Based
Routing (Version 5000 or
higher).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)

41-23-01
ACD Skill Table Setup – Skill
Level
Input the Skill Level for each
QUeue for each Skill Table
number (Version 5000 or
higher).
1~7
(default = 1)
Caller ID Marking Setup – Caller
ID Marking Setup
Enable/Disable the availability of
setting that the ACD Agent can
mark the originator caller ID,
system base.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
41-20-02
41-20-03
41-20-04
41-20-05
41-21-01
41-24-01
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Queue Status Display Time
ACD Queue Display Settings –
Queue Status Display Interval
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)






2 - 97
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Caller ID Marking Setup – ACD
Agent Info for Caller ID
Set whether the Agent ID or
extension number of the ACD
Agent is used to mark with the CID
in the buffer.
0 = Agent Extension
Number
1 = ACD Agent ID
(default = 0)

41-24-03
Caller ID Marking Setup – Caller
ID Buffer Clear Timer
Set time interval for clearing
stored Caller ID record in buffer.
1~168 (hours)
(default = 24)

41-24-04
Caller ID Marking Setup – Caller
ID Buffer Store Size
Set the Caller ID Buffer Size.
When the number of CID records
is over the limit, CID buffer
threshold alarm (71) can be
reported.
1000~10000
(default = 10000)
SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox
Options – Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox Number is the
same as the Department Group
master (pilot) number. Select the
Department Group master (pilot)
number associated with the
Master Mailbox you are
programming.
Digits (eight maximum,
using 0~9).
No Setting (entered by
pressing Hold)
(default not assigned)
SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox
Options – Mailbox Type
Set the Group Mailbox type.
0 = None
1 = Subscriber
2 = Call Routing
(default = 1)

SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox
Options – Routing Mailbox Type
Set the Routing Mailbox type.
0 = None
1 = Call Routing
2 = Announcement
3 = Directory
4 = Distribution
Default:
Mailboxes 01~08 = 1
(Call Routing)
Mailboxes 09~32 = 2
(Announcement)

41-24-02
47-03-02
47-03-03
47-07-02
47-09-03
2 - 98
Announcement Mailbox Options
– Hang Up After
Use this option along with Next
Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat
Count above to provide additional
routing options to Automated
Attendant callers.
For more detail on this interaction,
refer to Direct Announcement
Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the VM8000 InMail System Guide.
3


0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
(default = 0)

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
Using the Headset with Automatic Answer for ACD Agents:
1.
With the multiline terminal in an idle state, press Feature.
2.
Press the HEADSET key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 05).

The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated.

To cancel Automatic Headset, repeat these steps.
Transferring Trunk Calls to the ACD Pilot Number:
1.
While on an outside call, press Transfer.
2.
Dial the ACD Pilot number.
3.
Hang up.

The call is transferred to the ACD group.
A Supervisor can monitor an ACD call:
1.
When an ACD agent is on an outside call, the supervisor presses the MONITOR key (Program
15-07-01 or SC 752: 15).

2.
The supervisor can hear but cannot participate in the call. If participation is required, use the Barge-In feature
instead.
To cancel the call monitoring, press the MONITOR key again.
AIC Agent Log In:
To Log In:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).

3.
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 99
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To Log Out (for single or multiple agent log ins):
Multiline Terminal

All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
2.
Dial 1 to accept.
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key goes out.
Single Line Telephone

All AIC log ins become logged out.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial the AIC Log Out service code (Program 11-13-08).
- OR -
1.
To log out of an ACD group without using AIC, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the ACD Log Out service code 655 (Program 11-13-02).
Multiple Agent Log In:
To Log In:
Multiline Terminal
After already being logged in:
1.
Press the ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 10).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel the log out option.
3.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

The ACD LOG IN/LOG OUT key lights.
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
4.
Dial the Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

2 - 100
The ACD Log In/Log Out key lights.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Single Line Telephone

Follow Steps 1~3 to log in with additional AICs (up to three) anytime.
1.
Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code (Program 11-13-08).
2.
Dial the log in code (up to 20 digits).

3.
Dial the first Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

4.
You hear a confirmation tone when immediately logging in with additional AICs.
For second agent log: Dial the second Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

5.
This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41-01-02.
You hear a confirmation tone.
For third agent log: Dial the third Agent Identity Code (AIC) (up to four digits).

You hear a confirmation tone.
Queue Status Display:
When Logged Into ACD Group
1.
With an idle multiline terminal, press the Queue Status Display Programmable Function Key
(Code: 19).

The display indicates the number of calls in queue, the trunk name, and the time the call has been waiting.

When the Queue Status Display key is pressed, the queue status of the extension group is displayed. When the
extension is not in an ACD group, the Queue Status of group 1 is displayed instead.

When an agent logs in using an AIC code, the Queue Status of the default ACD group defined in Program
41-18-02 is displayed.
2.
Press VOL UP and VOL DOWN to scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD
Groups.
3.
Press the EXIT key to return the telephone to an idle state.
When Logged Out of ACD Group
When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed in the ACD queue, the telephone of the logged out
agents displays the Queue Status and they hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system
programming.
Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key returns the telephone to idle until the
time in Program 41-20-03 expires again.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
2 - 101
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Rest Mode:
To Set The Manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
With the multiline terminal idle, press the ACD Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752:
13).

The ACD Rest Mode key lights. If the Rest Mode key is pressed while the agent is on an active call, the key
flashes until the agent hangs up.

This operation is not available for the System Supervisor.
Single Line Telephone
1.
2.
Lift the handset and dial 658.

A fast busy is heard.

To set Pre-Rest Mode (while on a call), press the hookflash and then dial 658. Press the Hookflash again to
return to the outside party. Rest Mode begins once the call is completed.
Hang up.
To Cancel The Manual Rest Mode:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press the ACD Rest Mode key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 13).

The ACD Rest Mode key light goes off.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.

A fast busy is heard.
2.
Dial 659.
3.
Hang up.
2 - 102
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Automatic Release
Description
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to
work with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect
signal. Automatic Release is normally provided on Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line trunks.
Conditions

Automatic Release on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol.

When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key, the LED associated with the
line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs.

This feature functions while a call is in progress, on hold, or in a conference.

This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress, holding or parked.

When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode, Speaker
automatically turns off. If using the handset, the station is set to idle when the handset goes
on-hook.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Automatic Release
2 - 103
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
14-02-09
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Busy
Tone Detection
Enable/Disable Busy Tone
Detection.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)
14-02-14
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Start/Ground Start
Identify the analog trunk as either
loop or ground start.
0 = Loop Start (Loop)
1 = Ground Start
(Ground)
(default = 0)

Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Detection Level
Set the Detection Level.
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 0
(-25dBm)
Type 2 (BT) – 0
(-25dBm)
Type 3 (RBT) – 0
(-25dBm)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

80-04-01
2 - 104

Automatic Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
80-04-02
80-04-03
80-04-04
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Min. Detection Level
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – S/N Ratio
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – No Tone Time
Automatic Release
Set the minimum detection level.
Set the Signal to Noise ratio.
Set No Tone Time.
2
3
0~15
detect level 0:
–15dBm(0) to
–30dBm(15)
detect level 1:
–30dBm(0) to
–45dBm(15)
detect level 2:
–40dBm(0) to
–55dBm(15)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 2 (BT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 3 (RBT) – 15
(-25dBm)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB)
Default:
Type 1 (DT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 2 (BT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 3 (RBT) = 4
(-20dB)
Type 4 = 0
Type 5 = 0

0~255
(30+30-7680ms)
The formula is 30+30N.
When set to N=1, it
means 30+30*1=60
When set to N=255, it
means
30+30*255=7680
(0 =not detect)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 132
(3990ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 132
(3990ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 132
(3990ms)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

2 - 105
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
80-04-05
80-04-06
80-04-07
80-04-08
80-04-09
2 - 106
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – Pulse Count
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – ON Minimum Time
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – ON Maximum Time
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – OFF Minimum Time
Call Progress Tone Detector
Setup – OFF Maximum Time
Set the Pulse Count.
Set the minimum On time.
Set the maximum On time.
Set the minimum Off time.
Set the maximum Off time.
2
3
1~255
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 1
Type 2 (BT) – 1
Type 3 (RBT) – 1
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

1~255 (30+307680ms)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 9
(300ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 12
(300ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 25
(780ms)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

0~255 (30+307680ms)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 0
Type 2 (BT) – 20
(630ms) [ET]
Type 3 (RBT) – 40
1230ms)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

1~255 (30+307680ms)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 1 (60ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 12
(390ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 83
(2520ms)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

0~255 (30+307680ms)
default:
Type 1 (DT) – 1 (60ms)
Type 2 (BT) – 20
(630ms)
Type 3 (RBT) – 115
(3480ms)
Type 4, Type 5 – 0

Automatic Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
None
Automatic Release
2 - 107
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 108
Automatic Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Automatic Route Selection
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software:

The Dial Analysis table has expanded from 400 to 800 tables (V7000 Enhancement License (0036)
required).

The SV8100 can recognize each system where the DT700 extension(s) are connected and provide an
Automatic Route Selection COS based on the System (System ID) when using NetLink.
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user
dials. ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display
telephone. ARS accommodates 800 call routing choices – without a custom-ordered rate structure
database. With ARS, you can modify the system routing choices quickly and easily. This is often
necessary in the telecommunications world of today where the cost structure and service choices
frequently change.
The ARS feature can add or delete digits and route calls according to predetermined levels. When
UNIVERGE SV8100 systems are networked together by Tie Lines or K-CCIS, the networked systems
can be called by a system number and a user extension number, just an extension number, or by using
a trunk access code.
ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides:
Call Routing
ARS can apply up to 24-digit analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides
separate 8-digit and 24-digit tables. Each table can have up to 250 numbers.

Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions)
ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses
a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:

Insert or delete an area code (NPA)

Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing sequence

Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (refer to Program 44-03)
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 109
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Time of Day Selection
For routing, ARS provides 10 different day selections (called Time Schedule Patterns). Each Time
Schedule Pattern can provide up to 20 time intervals which are assigned to one of the eight day/
night modes. The Time Schedule Patterns are then assigned to a day of the week
(Monday~Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).

Hierarchical Class of Service Control
ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension ARS Class of Service. This allows
lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service (e.g.,
16). The system provides up to 16 (0=unrestricted, 1~16) ARS Classes of Service.

Separate Routing for Selected Call Types
To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for:


Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls

Emergency (911) calls
Separate Routing for Equal Access (1010XXX) Calls
Choose different routing for directly-dialed (1010XXX + 1) and operator-assisted (1010XXX + 0)
Equal Access calls.
Basic ARS Operation
When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 800 Selection
Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then
checks the time of day, the day of week and the extension ARS Class of Service. Based on these call
routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if
any).
Class of Service Option Allows Outgoing Calls to Not Follow Access Map
Using this option allows a Class of Service to be set so that ARS does not follow the trunk access map
settings (Program 14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01). The feature allows an extension user to have CO
line keys on their telephone which allow incoming access only. The user has only outgoing access on the
CO lines when using ARS to place a call.
Class of Service Matching
With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature, you can determine whether the system should
allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program 26-02). This change can be
used to create a tenant-like application. It then uses the trunk group defined in the Additional Entry in
Program 26-02-03 to place the outgoing call.
When this feature is enabled, the calls are routed in sequential order, and are allowed if the Class of
Service for the trunk group matches.
For this feature, Program 26-01-06: Automatic Route Selection Service, COS Match Access is
used.
2 - 110
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
The examples below use the following system programming:
Program 26-02 for Dial Analysis Table for ARS set as:
Table No.
Program 26-02-01
Dial
Program 26-02-02
Service Type
Program 26-02-03
Add Data
Program 26-02-04
ARS COS
1
[email protected]@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
3 (Group 3)
5
2
[email protected]@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
1 (Group 1)
4
197
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
2 (Group 2)
4
198
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
3 (Group 3)
3
199
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
2 (Group 2)
2
200
@@@@@@@@@@
1:Route to trunk group
1 (Group 1)
1
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Time
Pattern No.
Program 12-02-01
Start Time
Program 12-02-02
End Time
Program 12-02-03
Operation Mode
1
00:00
08:30
2 (Night)
2
08:30
17:00
1 (Day)
3
17:00
00:00
2 (Night)
Program 12-02 for Automatic Night Service Patterns as:
Mode
Ext. 301
Ext. 302
Ext. 401
Ext. 402
Mode 1 (Day)
1
2
3
3
Mode 2 (Night)
1
4
3
5
Program 26-01-03 for ARS Misdialed Number Handling as: 1 (Warning Tone)
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access disabled (set to 0):

If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
All Extension would use Trunk Group 3

If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
All Extension would use Trunk Group 1

If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
All Extension would use Trunk Group 3

If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301, 302 and 401 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS is lower
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 111
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
With Program 26-01-06: ARS COS Match Access enabled (set to 1):

If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3

If at 9:00 AM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3

If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400
Extension 301 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 302 would use Trunk Group 2
Extension 401, 402 would use Trunk Group 3

If at 6:00 PM, each extension dialed 9+(214)262-2000
Extension 301, 302 would use Trunk Group 1
Extension 401 would use Trunk Group 3
Extension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS does not match
Conditions
2 - 112

With Version 7000 or higher software and the V7000 Enhancement (0036) license, Dial
Analysis Tables have expanded from 400 to 800 tables.

ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan (NANP).

Line keys, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, outgoing trunk group keys, dialing 704 + trunk
group, dialing +trunk number, and speed dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group
can all be used to by-pass ARS.

If no PBX access code is entered in the Dial Treatment, the system can still dial 911.

Toll Restriction overrides ARS.

A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.

With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The
system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.

Speed Dialing may bypass ARS routing.

Set up other options for outgoing calls (e.g., unassign line keys, adjust gains, ARS access
key, Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, etc.).

Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial
Tone Detection.

ARS does not permit 0 and 011+ calls to be routed out separate trunk groups. The
UNIVERGE SV8100 supports only direct trunk selection for dial 0 (Operator) type calls.
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

If an entry of 911 is programmed in ARS, but ARS is turned off, 911 calls still attempt to
route using ARS.

When using ARS Class of Service Matching, CCIS calls will always follow Class of Service
1.

If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, Program 26-01-03 determines if the
system should route over the trunk group settings defined in Program 21-02 or play an error
tone.

When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) “Play Warning Tone”,
any trunk (except a CCIS trunk) pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward
Off-Premise will not complete. For a virtual to Call Forward Off-Premise, Program 26-01-03
must be set to “Route to trunk group” and the call will follow the trunk group settings of the
trunk, assigned in Program 21-03.

When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) “Play Warning Tone”,
a CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is call forwarded off premise will always
follow ARS Class 1 routing properties.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink
Description
With Version 7000 or higher software, the SV8100 can recognize each system where the DT700
extension(s) are connected then provide an Automatic Route Selection COS based on the System
(System ID) when using NetLink.
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 113
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions

The Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink requires Version 7000 or
higher software.

This feature requires Netlink to be enabled.

This feature is only supported on DT700 and softphones.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
DT700
Required Component(s)
Version 7000 or higher system software
Refer to the SV8100 NetLink Feature for Required Component(s)
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
E911 Compatibility
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
SV8100 NetLink
Trunk Group Routing
2 - 114
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Automatic Route Selection:
Program
Number
11-01-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Numbering
Set the system internal (Intercom)
numbering plan. The numbering
plan assigns the first and second
digits dialed and affects the digits
an extension user must dial to
access other extensions and
features, such as service codes
and trunk codes. If the default
numbering plan does not meet the
site requirements, use this
program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.
Refer to SV8100
Programming Manual
for a detailed
description of this
program.
3

11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
Specify the digit or digits to be
used to access ARS (normally 9).
Dial up to four digits
(default = 9)
11-09-02
2nd Trunk Route Access Code
Define additional trunk access
codes.When a user dials the
Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code, the system routes their call
to the Alternate Trunk Route.
Dial up to four digits
(default not assigned)
12-01-01
Night Mode Function Setup –
Manual Night Mode Switching
Turn Off or On any extension from
activating Manual Night Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)
12-01-02
Night Mode Function Setup –
Automatic Night Mode Switching
According to a preset schedule,
Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic
Night Service for the system.
Make sure to set the Service
Patterns in Program 12-02-01,
Program 12-02-02 and Program
12-02-03.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
Automatic Route Selection
2




2 - 115
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
12-02-01
12-02-02
12-02-03
2 - 116
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Automatic Night Service
Patterns –Start Time
Automatic Night Service
Patterns –End Time
Automatic Night Service
Patterns –Operation Mode
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the starting
time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for defaults.
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the ending
time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for defaults.
Define the daily pattern of the
Automatic Mode Switching. Each
Mode Group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the operation
mode that the system should be in
during each time number.
1~8
(default = 1 or 2
depending on time
pattern and time
number.)
2
3



Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
12-03-01
Weekly Night Service Switching
12-04-01
12-05-01
12-06-01
Issue 12.0
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Night Mode Service
Group Numbers:
01~32
Time Schedule Pattern
Number: 1~10
Day of Week:
01 = Sunday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)
02 = Monday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
03 = Tuesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
04 = Wednesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)

Define a yearly schedule of
holiday night-switch settings. This
schedule is used for setting
special days when the company is
expected to be closed, such as
national holidays.
Days and Months:
0101~1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1;
1231 = Dec. 31)
Time Pattern Number:
0~10
(0 = No Setting)
(default not assigned)

Night Mode Group Assignment
for Extensions
Assign Day/Night Mode Group for
each extension.
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
(default = 1)

Night Mode Group Assignment
for Trunks
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group
for each trunk port.
Trunk Port Number:
001~200
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
(default Night Mode
Service Group
Number = 1)

Holiday Night Service Switching
Automatic Route Selection
Define which time pattern should
be used on each day of the week.
2
3
2 - 117
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
12-07-01
12-08-01
14-05-01
2 - 118
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Text Data for Night Mode
Night Mode Service Range
Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Make up an original text message,
which, depending on
programming, can be displayed on
an LCD of a multiline telephone in
each Mode.
2
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Text Message:
Maximum 12
Characters (alphabetic
or numeric)
Default Text Messages
for Day/Night Modes:
Mode 1 = No Setting
Mode 2 = <Night>
Mode 3 = <Midnight>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 = <Day2>
Mode 6 = <Night2>
Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
Mode 8 = <Rest2>

Define the changing range of
toggle key for each Day/Night
Mode.
Night Mode Service
Group Number:
01~32
Range: 2~8
(default = 2)

Program trunks of the same carrier
type in the same trunk group.
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Group 1-100
Priority - 1-200
(default = All trunks in
Trunk Group 1 with
priorities of:
Trunk 1 = Priority 1
Trunk 2 = Priority 2
Trunk 200 = Priority
200)

3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-07-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks.
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold).


15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
(default = 1)
20-03-04
System Options for Single Line
Telephones – Dial Sending Start
Time for SLT or ARS
When ARS or an analog extension
user accesses a trunk and dials an
outside call, the system waits this
time before outdialing the first
digit.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class of Service for
Extensions: 1~15
Defaults:
Extension number 101
as Class 15.
All other extension
numbers are set as
Class 1.
20-06-01
Automatic Route Selection
2
3


2 - 119
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-17
21-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming (Program
14-07-01 and Program 15-06-01)
for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Trunk Group Routing for
Extensions
Assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Route Table Number:
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)

26-01-01
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Service
Enable/Disable ARS.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
26-01-02
Automatic Route Selection
Service – Network Outgoing
Inter-Digit ARS Timer
With Networking, this timer
replaces Program 20-03-04 when
determining if all network protocol
digits are received. If ARS is
enabled at Site B, this timer can
be programmed for 5 at Site A. If
ARS is disabled and Site B is
using F-Route for outbound
dialing, this timer should be
programmed for 30 at Site A.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Misdialed Number
Handling
If a user dials a number not
programmed in ARS, determine if
the system should Route over
trunk group 1 (0) or Play error tone
(1).
0 = Route to Trunk
Group 1
1 = Play Warning Tone
to Dialer
(default = 0)
Automatic Route Selection
Service – Class of Service Match
Access
With the ARS Class of Service
Match Access feature, you can
determine whether or not the
system should allow a call based
on the COS assigned to the Dial
Analysis Table (Program 26-02).
This change can be used to create
a tenant-like application. It then
uses the trunk group set in the
Additional Entry in Program
26-02-03 to place the out-going
call. When this feature is enabled,
the calls are routed in sequential
order, and forward – provided the
Class of Service for the trunk
groups match.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
26-01-03
26-01-06
2 - 120
2
3




Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
26-01-07
Automatic Route Selection
Service – F-Route Access COS
Reference
Define the system options for
Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
0 = F-Route
1 = ARS
(default = 0)
26-02-01
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
– Dial
Enter the digits (16 digits
maximum: 1~9, 0  #, @; 800
separate entries) for the Dial
Analysis Table which is analyzed
by ARS/LCR. This table is
checked after any programmed
F-Route operations have
completed. The system then refers
to Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 to determine the routing
for the call. To enter a wild card/
don’t care digit, press Line Key 1
to enter an @ symbol. It is
important to remember that the
system checks the table numbers
in numerical order. This means
that entries for specific numbers
should be entered first (such as
your local area codes), then enter
the items containing wild card
digits. If the system sees an entry
of [email protected]@, any table entries which
follow are ignored.
For example, if 268, 269, and 270
are local exchanges, these would
be the first three table entries
which route according to the
settings made in Program
26-02-02 and Program 26-02-03
for each of the table entries. If the
next entry is [email protected]@, the system
checks no further in this program
and routes all other 2xx numbers
according to the entries made in
Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 for this table entry.
Dial Digits
(16 digits maximum)
1~9, 0,  #, or for wild
character (Press line
key 1)
(default not assigned)
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), select 0 for no ARS, 1 for
Service Type 1 – Route to Trunk
Group Number to have the
number route to a trunk group
[Refer to Program 26-02-03] or 2
for Service Type 2 – F-Route
Selected to have the dialed
number controlled by the F-Route
table. If Service Type 2 is selected
and F-Route operation is on, the
F-Route table used is determined
by Program 44-04. If F-Route
operation is off, the routing is
determined by Program 44-05.
0 = No Service (None)
1 = Route to Trunk
Group
2 = Select F-Route
Access
(default = 0)
26-02-02
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
ARS Service Type
Automatic Route Selection
2
3



2 - 121
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
26-02-03
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Additional Data/Service Number
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), if Service Type 1 was
selected in Program 26-02-02,
enter the trunk group number
(0~100, 0 = No Route).
If Service Type 1 (in
26-02):
Select Trunk Group
Number
(0~100, 0 = No Route)
If Service Type 2 (in
26-02):
F-Route Time
Schedule Not Used =
0~500
(F-Route Table
Number).
Refer to Program
44-05: ARS/F-Route
Table
2
3

F-Route Time
Schedule Used =
0~500 (F-Route
Selection Number).
Refer to Program
44-04: ARS/F-Route
Selection for Time
Schedule.
(default = 0)
26-02-04
26-02-05
26-02-07
2 - 122
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
ARS Class of Service
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Class of Service
(0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Dial Treatment for ARS
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Dial Treatment
(0~15) to be used.
0~15
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Network Specified Parameter
Table
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Network
Specified Parameter Table (0~16)
to be used.
0~16
(default = 0)



Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
26-03-01
26-04-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ARS Dial Treatments – Treatment
Code
ARS Class of Service
Automatic Route Selection
Assign the Dial Treatments (1~15)
for automatic ARS dialing
translation. Assign Dial
Treatments to Service Numbers
(Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02.
The ARS Dial Treatment options
are:
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part
of the initial call. This requires at
least eight digits in the ARS table
(Program 26-02-01).
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed
as part of the initial call. This
requires at least eight digits in the
ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as
part of the initial call. This requires
at least eight digits in the ARS
table (Program 26-02-01).
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by
NPA.
DNN - Outdial the NN number of
digits or execute the code that
follows. For example, D041234
out-dials 124. Valid entries are
0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn seconds)
and P (pause). Each digits code
counts as a digit. So for example,
if a P was added for a pause, the
entry would look like: D05P1234.
This Dial Treatment can only be
added from telephone
programming.
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
P - Pause in analog trunk.
R - Redial the initially dialed
number, including any
modifications.
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial
Treatments must end with the E
code.
X - When ARS is enabled, X must
be entered in the Dial Treatment
for the system to output the
extension number of the call
originator to the black box for the
E911 feature.
24 characters
maximum
(default not assigned)
Set an extension ARS Class of
Service (0~16). Automatic Route
Selection uses ARS Class of
Service when determining how to
route extension calls.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class = 0~16
(default = 0)
2
3


2 - 123
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
26-11-01
44-01-01
44-02-01
44-02-02
44-02-03
2 - 124
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Transit Network ID Table –
Transmit Network ID (Carrier ID)
System Options for ARS/F-Route
– ARS/F-Route Time Schedule
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Dial
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Service Type
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Additional
Data
2
Enter the Transit Network
Selection information element to
be added to an ARS call using an
ISDN trunk. This information
element identifies a requested
transit network.
0000~9999
(Fixed four digits)
(default not assigned)
Select whether the ARS/F-Route
feature should use the time
schedule (0=not used, 1=used). If
this option is set to 0, the F-Route
table selected is determined only
by the digits dialed without any
relation to the day or time of the
call. If this option is set to 1, the
system first refers to Program
44-10. If there is a match, the
pattern defined in that program is
used. If not, the F-Route pattern in
Program 44-09 and time setting in
Program 44-08 are used.
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
(default = 0)
Set the Dial digits for the
Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route (eight
digits max: 1~9, 0  #, @). To
enter a wild card/don’t care digit,
press Line Key 1 to enter an @
symbol.
Up to eight digits
(Use line key 1 for a
‘Don’t Care’ digit, @)
(default not assigned)
Set the Service Type (0~3) for the
Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route.
0 = No Setting (None)
1 = Extension Call
(Own)
2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension
Analyze Table (Option)
(default = 0)

1=Delete Digit = 0~255
(255 : Delete All Digits)
2=0~500
(0 = No Setting)
3=Dial Extension
Analyze Table Number
= 0~4
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)

If a Service Type is set to F-Route
in Program 44-02-02, set which
F-Route table to use.
3



Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
44-02-04
44-03-01
44-03-02
44-03-03
44-03-04
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/
F-Route Access – Dial Tone
Simulation
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
Dial
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
ARS/F-Route Select Table
Number (1~250)
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
ARS/F-Route Select Table
Number (251)
Dial Analysis Extension Table –
Next Table Area Number (252)
Automatic Route Selection
2
Determine if the Dial Tone
Simulation is On (1) or Off (0) for
the Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route. If
enabled, this option sends dial
tone to the calling party once the
routing is determined. This may be
required if the central office at the
destination does not send dial
tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0)
Set the Dial digits (24 digits max:
1~9, 0  #, @) to be used for the
Dial Extension Analysis Table.
When Program 44-02-02 is set to
type 3, this program sets the dial
extension analysis table. These
tables are used when the analyzed
digits must be more than eight
digits. To enter a wild card/don’t
care digit, press Line Key 1 to
enter an @ symbol.
Up to 24 digits
Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for
wild character @)
(default not assigned)
When dialed digits match the
setting in Program 44-03-01,
select the ARS/R-Route table
number (0~500) to be used for the
Dial Extension Analysis Table.
0~500
(ARS/F-Route Table
Number)
With Program 44-01
set to 0, Program
44-05 is checked.
With Program 44-01
set to 1, Program
44-04 is checked.
(default = 0)

If the received digits are not
identified in tables 1~250, the
F-Route selection table number
(0~500) defined in table 251 is
used.
0~500
(ARS/F-Route Table
Number)
With Program 44-01
set to 0, Program
44-05 is checked.
With Program 44-01
set to 1, Program
44-04 is checked.
(default = 0)

If the received digits do not match
the digits set in tables 1~250, table
number 252 is used to refer to the
next Extension Table Area (1~4) to
be searched.
0~4
(default = 0)
3



2 - 125
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
44-04-01
44-05-01
44-05-02
44-05-03
44-05-04
44-05-05
44-05-06
44-05-07
44-05-08
44-05-09
2 - 126
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Assign each ARS/F-Route
Selection number (1~500) to an
ARS/F-Route table number for
each ARS/F-Route time mode.
There are eight time modes for
ARS/F-Route Access.
ARS/F-Route Time
Mode: 1~8
ARS/F-Route Table
Number = 0~500
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Trunk
Group Number
Select the trunk group number to
be used for the outgoing ARS call.
0~100, 255
0 = No Setting
255 = Extension Call
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Delete
Digits
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Enter the number of digits to
be deleted (0~255) from the dialed
number.
0~255
(255 = Delete All)
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Additional
Dial Number Table
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Enter the table number
(defined in Program 44-06) for
additional digits to be dialed
(0~1000).
0~1000
(default = 0)
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority
trunk group is used.
0 = Off (No Beep)
1 = On (Beep)s
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Internal Call
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for internal
calls (0~500).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Tandem
Connections
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for the tandem
call (defined in Program 44-07).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – ARS Class
of Service
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the Class of Service
to be used for ARS (0~16).
Extension ARS COS is
determined in Program 26-04-01.
0~16
(default = 0)
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the Dial Treatment to
be used (0~15). The Dial
Treatments are defined in
Program 26-03-01.
0~15
(default = 0)
Set the maximum number of digits
to send when using the F-Route.
0~24
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule
ARS/F-Route Table – Beep Tone
ARS/F-Route Table – Dial
Treatment
ARS/F-Route Table – Maximum
Digit
2
3







Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
44-05-10
ARS/F-Route – CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500). Set the CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code (0~16367).
0~16367
(default = 0)
44-05-11
ARS/F-Route – Network
Specified Parameter Table
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign the priority (1~4).
Assign the Network Specified
Parameter Table (0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
Additional Dial Table
If an Additional Dial Number Table
is entered in Program 44-05-03,
define the additional dial table
(1~1000) to add digits in front of
the dialed ARS/F-Route number
(24 digits max: 1-9, 0  #, Pause).
To enter a wild card/don’t care
digit, press Line Key 1 to enter a P
(pause) symbol.
Up to 24 digits
Enter: 1~9, 0, , #,
Pause (press line key 1
to enter a pause)
(default not assigned)
Set the gain table to be used
(1~500). If an extension dials
ARS/F-Route number:
The Extension Dial Gain Table is
activated, which is assigned in
Program 44-05.
The Extension Dial Gain Table
follows Outgoing transmit and
Outgoing receive settings.
If the incoming call is transferred
to another line using ARS/
F-Route:
The Tandem Gain Table is
activated, which is assigned in
Program 44-05.
The Tandem Gain Table follows
the Incoming transmit and
Incoming receive settings for
incoming line, and Outgoing
transmit and Outgoing receive
settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the
CODEC gains defined in Program
14-01-02 and Program 14-01-03
are not activated.
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])

1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])

1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])

Define the daily pattern of the
ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/
F-Route has 10 time patterns.
These patterns are used in
Program 44-09 and Program
44-10. The daily pattern consists
of 20 time settings.
Time Number: 01~20
Start Time =
0000~2359
End Time = 0000~2359
Mode: 1~8
Default = All Schedule
Patterns: 0:00 – 0:00,
Mode 1
44-06-01
44-07-01
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Incoming Transmit
44-07-02
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Incoming Receive
44-07-03
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Outgoing Transmit
44-07-04
Gain Table for ARS/F-Route
Access – Outgoing Receive
44-08-01
Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Automatic Route Selection
3



1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)
(default = 32 [0dB])


2 - 127
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
44-09-01
44-10-01
80-03-01
80-03-02
2 - 128
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Weekly Schedule for ARS/
F-Route
Holiday Schedule for ARS/
F-Route
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Detect Level
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Start Delay Time
Define a weekly schedule for
using ARS/F-Route day numbers
1~7 (1 = Sun, 7 = Sat), pattern
numbers (1~10). The pattern
number is defined in Program
44-08-01.
2
1 = Sunday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
2 = Monday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
3= Tuesday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
4 = Wednesday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
5 = Thursday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
6 = Friday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)
7 = Saturday
(Pattern 1~10)
(default Pattern = 1)

Define a yearly schedule for ARS/
F-Route. This schedule is used for
setting special days such as
national holidays (pattern numbers
1~10). The pattern number is
defined in Program 44-08-01.
Date: 0101~1231
Schedule Pattern
Number = 0~10
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

Use Items 11~32 to set the criteria
for dial tone detection for outgoing
ARS calls.
0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm
1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm
default:
Type 1~5 = 0

0~255
(0.25ms~64ms)
default:
Type 1~5 = 0

Define the start delay time for
DTMF Tone Receiver.
3
Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
80-03-03
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Min. Detect Level
Automatic Route Selection
Define the minimum detection
level for DTMF Tone Receiver.
0~15
detect level 0:
–10dBm(0) to
–25dBm(15)
detect level 1:
–15dBm(0) to –
30dBm(15)
detect level 2:
–20dBm(0) to –
35dBm(15)
detect level 3:
–25dBm(0) to –
40dBm(15)
detect level 4:
–30dBm(0) to –
45dBm(15)
detect level 5:
–35dBm(0) to –
50dBm(15)
detect level 6:
–40dBm(0) to –
55dBm(15)
detect level 7: 45dBm(0) to 60dBm(15)
detect level 8: 50dBm(0) to 65dBm(15)
detect level 9: 55dBm(0) to 70dBm(15)
detect level 10: 60dBm(0) to 75dBm(15)
detect level 11: 65dBm(0) to 80dBm(15)
detect level 12: 70dBm(0) to 85dBm(15)
detect level 13: 75dBm(0) to 90dBm(15)
detect level 14: 80dBm(0) to 95dBm(15)
detect level 15: 85dBm(0) to 100dBm(15) default:
Type 1 = 10 (-20dBm)
Type 2~3 = 15
(-25dBm)
Type 4~5 = 10
(-20dBm)
2
3

2 - 129
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
80-03-04
2 - 130
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Max. Detect Level
Define the maximum detection
level for DTMF Tone Receiver.
0~15
detect level 0: 0dBm(0)
to –15dBm(15)
detect level 1:
–5dBm(0) to –
20dBm(15)
detect level 2:
–10dBm(0) to –
25dBm(15)
detect level 3:
–15dBm(0) to –
30dBm(15)
detect level 4:
–20dBm(0) to –
35dBm(15)
detect level 5:
–25dBm(0) to –
40dBm(15)
detect level 6:
–30dBm(0) to –
45dBm(15)
detect level 7: 35dBm(0) to 50dBm(15)
detect level 8: 40dBm(0) to 55dBm(15)
detect level 9: 45dBm(0) to 60dBm(15)
detect level 10: 50dBm(0) to 65dBm(15)
detect level 11: 55dBm(0) to 70dBm(15)
detect level 12: 60dBm(0) to 75dBm(15)
detect level 13: 65dBm(0) to 80dBm(15)
detect level 14: 70dBm(0) to 85dBm(15)
detect level 15: 75dBm(0) to 90dBm(15)
default:
Type 1~5 = 2 (-2dBm)
2
3

Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
80-03-05
80-03-06
80-03-07
80-03-08
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Forward Twist Level
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
Backwards Twist Level
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup – ON
Detect Time
DTMF Tone Receiver Setup –
OFF Detect Time
Automatic Route Selection
Define the forward twist level for
DTMF Tone Receiver.
Define the backwards twist level
for DTMF Tone Receiver.
Define the On detection time for
DTMF Tone Receiver.
Define the Off detection time for
DTMF Tone Receiver.
2
0~9
(1dB~10dB)
default:
Type 1 = 5 (6dBm)
Type 2 = 5 (6dBm)
Type 3 = 5 (6dBm)
Type 4 = 5 (6dBm)
Type 5 = 5 (6dBm)

0~9
(1dB~10dB)
default:
Type 1 = 0 (1dBm)
Type 2 = 0 (1dBm)
Type 3 = 0 (1dBm)
Type 4 = 0 (1dBm)
Type 5 = 0 (1dBm)

1~255
(15+ 15ms~3825ms)
default:
Type 1 = 1 (30ms)
Type 2 = 1 (30ms)
Type 3 = 1 (30ms)
Type 4 = 1 (30ms)
Type 5 = 1 (30ms)

1~255
(15+ 15ms~3825ms)
default:
Type 1 = 1 (30ms)
Type 2 = 1 (30ms)
Type 3 = 1 (30ms)
Type 4 = 1 (30ms)
Type 5 = 1 (30ms)

3
2 - 131
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Recognize Extension Location when Logging In with Netlink:
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
26-01-01
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Service
Enable/Disable ARS.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
26-01-03
Automatic Route Selection
Service – ARS Misdialed Number
Handling
If a user dials a number not
programmed in ARS, determine if
the system should Route over
trunk group 1 (0) or Play error tone
(1).
0 = Route to Trunk
Group 1
1 = Play Warning Tone
to Dialer
(default = 0)
Automatic Route Selection
Service – Class of Service Match
Access
With the ARS Class of Service
Match Access feature, you can
determine whether or not the
system should allow a call based
on the COS assigned to the Dial
Analysis Table (Program 26-02).
This change can be used to create
a tenant-like application. It then
uses the trunk group set in the
Additional Entry in Program
26-02-03 to place the out-going
call. When this feature is enabled,
the calls are routed in sequential
order, and forward – provided the
Class of Service for the trunk
groups match.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
Enable or Disable Recognize
Extension Location when logging
in with NetLink
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)
26-01-06
26-01-08
2 - 132
Automatic Route Selection
Service – DT700 Multi Log-on
for ARS
2
3




Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
26-02-01
26-02-02
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
– Dial
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
ARS Service Type
Automatic Route Selection
Enter the digits (16 digits
maximum: 1~9, 0  #, @; 800
separate entries) for the Dial
Analysis Table which is analyzed
by ARS/LCR. This table is
checked after any programmed
F-Route operations have
completed. The system then refers
to Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 to determine the routing
for the call. To enter a wild card/
don’t care digit, press Line Key 1
to enter an @ symbol. It is
important to remember that the
system checks the table numbers
in numerical order. This means
that entries for specific numbers
should be entered first (such as
your local area codes), then enter
the items containing wild card
digits. If the system sees an entry
of [email protected]@, any table entries which
follow are ignored.
For example, if 268, 269, and 270
are local exchanges, these would
be the first three table entries
which route according to the
settings made in Program
26-02-02 and Program 26-02-03
for each of the table entries. If the
next entry is [email protected]@, the system
checks no further in this program
and routes all other 2xx numbers
according to the entries made in
Program 26-02-02 and Program
26-02-03 for this table entry.
Dial Digits
(16 digits maximum)
1~9, 0,  #, or for wild
character (Press line
key 1)
(default not assigned)
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), select 0 for no ARS, 1 for
Service Type 1 – Route to Trunk
Group Number to have the
number route to a trunk group
[Refer to Program 26-02-03] or 2
for Service Type 2 – F-Route
Selected to have the dialed
number controlled by the F-Route
table. If Service Type 2 is selected
and F-Route operation is on, the
F-Route table used is determined
by Program 44-04. If F-Route
operation is off, the routing is
determined by Program 44-05.
0 = No Service (None)
1 = Route to Trunk
Group
2 = Select F-Route
Access
(default = 0)
2
3


2 - 133
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
26-02-03
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Additional Data/Service Number
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), if Service Type 1 was
selected in Program 26-02-02,
enter the trunk group number
(0~100, 0 = No Route).
If Service Type 1 (in
26-02):
Select Trunk Group
Number
(0~100, 0 = No Route)
If Service Type 2 (in
26-02):
F-Route Time
Schedule Not Used =
0~500
(F-Route Table
Number).
Refer to Program
44-05: ARS/F-Route
Table
2
3

F-Route Time
Schedule Used =
0~500 (F-Route
Selection Number).
Refer to Program
44-04: ARS/F-Route
Selection for Time
Schedule.
(default = 0)
26-02-04
26-02-05
26-02-07
2 - 134
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
ARS Class of Service
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Class of Service
(0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Dial Treatment for ARS
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Dial Treatment
(0~15) to be used.
0~15
(default = 0)
Dial Analysis Table for ARS –
Network Specified Parameter
Table
For each Dial Analysis Table
(1~800), set the Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Network
Specified Parameter Table (0~16)
to be used.
0~16
(default = 0)



Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
26-03-01
26-04-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ARS Dial Treatments – Treatment
Code
ARS Class of Service
Automatic Route Selection
Assign the Dial Treatments (1~15)
for automatic ARS dialing
translation. Assign Dial
Treatments to Service Numbers
(Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02.
The ARS Dial Treatment options
are:
3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part
of the initial call. This requires at
least eight digits in the ARS table
(Program 26-02-01).
2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed
as part of the initial call. This
requires at least eight digits in the
ARS table (Program 26-02-01).
1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as
part of the initial call. This requires
at least eight digits in the ARS
table (Program 26-02-01).
INPA - Insert the NPA specified by
NPA.
DNN - Outdial the NN number of
digits or execute the code that
follows. For example, D041234
out-dials 124. Valid entries are
0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn seconds)
and P (pause). Each digits code
counts as a digit. So for example,
if a P was added for a pause, the
entry would look like: D05P1234.
This Dial Treatment can only be
added from telephone
programming.
Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
P - Pause in analog trunk.
R - Redial the initially dialed
number, including any
modifications.
E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial
Treatments must end with the E
code.
X - When ARS is enabled, X must
be entered in the Dial Treatment
for the system to output the
extension number of the call
originator to the black box for the
E911 feature.
24 characters
maximum
(default not assigned)
Set an extension ARS Class of
Service (0~16). Automatic Route
Selection uses ARS Class of
Service when determining how to
route extension calls.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class = 0~16
(default = 0)
2
3


2 - 135
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
26-13-01
44-05-01
44-05-02
44-05-03
44-05-04
44-05-05
44-05-06
44-05-07
44-05-08
2 - 136
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Use to set an extension’s ARS
Class of Service when used for
NetLink. Automatic Route
Selection uses ARS Class of
Service when determining how to
route an extension’s calls.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
Class = 0~16
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Trunk
Group Number
Select the trunk group number to
be used for the outgoing ARS call.
0~100, 255
0 = No Setting
255 = Extension Call
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Delete
Digits
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Enter the number of digits to
be deleted (0~255) from the dialed
number.
0~255
(255 = Delete All)
(default = 0)
ARS/F-Route Table – Additional
Dial Number Table
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Enter the table number
(defined in Program 44-06) for
additional digits to be dialed
(0~1000).
0~1000
(default = 0)
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority
trunk group is used.
0 = Off (No Beep)
1 = On (Beep)s
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Internal Call
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for internal
calls (0~500).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – Gain Table
Number for Tandem
Connections
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the gain table
number to be used for the tandem
call (defined in Program 44-07).
0~500
0 = No Setting
(default = 0)

ARS/F-Route Table – ARS Class
of Service
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the Class of Service
to be used for ARS (0~16).
Extension ARS COS is
determined in Program 26-04-01.
0~16
(default = 0)
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign a priority number
(1~4). Select the Dial Treatment to
be used (0~15). The Dial
Treatments are defined in
Program 26-03-01.
0~15
(default = 0)
ARS Class of Service for NetLink
(DT700)
ARS/F-Route Table – Beep Tone
ARS/F-Route Table – Dial
Treatment
2
3






Automatic Route Selection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
44-05-09
ARS/F-Route Table – Maximum
Digit
Set the maximum number of digits
to send when using the F-Route.
0~24
(default = 0)

44-05-10
ARS/F-Route – CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500). Set the CCIS over IP
Destination Point Code (0~16367).
0~16367
(default = 0)

44-05-11
ARS/F-Route – Network
Specified Parameter Table
For each ARS/F-Route table
(1~500) assign the priority (1~4).
Assign the Network Specified
Parameter Table (0~16).
0~16
(default = 0)
51-01-01
NetLink System Property Setting
– NetLink System ID
This is the ID of each NetLink
system. Set to insure that no
overlap occurs between nodes.
0~50
(0 = No operation)
(default = 0)
51-03-01
NetLink Internet Protocol
Address List Setting – Internet
Protocol Address List
The system seeks the Primary
system based on this list.
When there is no Primary system
yet, or Fail Over occurs, Node List
is referred to establish new link.
This setting is necessary when
Program 51-01-03 is 0, or
Program 51-05-02 is other than 0.
Once the system connects to the
Primary System, this setting is
updated by the Primary system
when Program 51-13-01 is On.
So, enter IP address of the
systems which may become
Primary at least.
0.0.0.0~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~
223.255.255.254
(default = 0.0.0.0)
2
3



Operation
To place a call using ARS:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.

2.
Dial 9.

3.
You hear normal Intercom dial tone.
You hear a second, “stutter” dial tone.
Dial the outside number.

If you hear another “stutter” dial tone, you must enter your extension ARS Authorization Code.
Automatic Route Selection
2 - 137
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 138
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Description
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to the
speakers of the multiline telephone when the station is idle.
Conditions

An ACI [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] port must be used as an alternate External Music on
Hold or Background Music source when different External MOH and BGM
sources are required.

Background Music stops while the multiline terminal is in use.

Originating a call, answering a voice announcement, a ringing call, or internal
paging interrupts Background Music.

Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
B
Default Settings
Background Music (BGM) is allowed
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)

Locally provided Background Music source (i.e., CD player, Radio, NEC Audio
Emcee).

PGD(2)-U10 ADP if different external MOH and BGM sources are required.
Background Music
2 - 139
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Music on Hold
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
10-24-01
Daylight Savings Setup –
Daylight Savings Mode
Enable/Disable the system ability
to adjust the time for daylight
savings/standard time.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

10-38-01
BGM Resource Setup – BGM
Resource Type
Configure the Background Music
Source input (0) for CD-CP00-US
or (1) for ACI Port.
0 = CD-CP00-US
(MOH/IN)
1 = ACI Port
(default = 0)

BGM Resource Setup – ACI Port
Number for BGM Source (only
used if Program 10-38-01 is set
to 1)
Program the ACI Port to be used
for BGM (0~96).
0~96
(default = 0)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for COS
1~15)

10-38-02
20-06-01
20-13-30
2 - 140
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension to turn
Background Music on and off.
2
3

Background Music
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1.
Press idle Speaker.
2.
Dial 725.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Background Music
2 - 141
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 142
Background Music
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Barge-In
Description
Barge-In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call, including
Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the
parties on the initial call. With Barge-In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy
co-worker right away.
There are two Barge-In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen to another user’s conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode,
the caller Barging In can listen and join another user’s conversation.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under
federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state
laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation,
such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of
all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Conditions

An extension user can barge-in on a conference.

An extension user cannot barge-in on an Intercom call if one of the intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.

With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a barged into call can be placed on hold by the originator
of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension that barged into the call are
placed on hold.

With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is barged into can be placed on Park by the
originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in Park. The extension
which barged into the call is dropped.

When Program 20-13-10 is set to 1 (Monitor), only one party can barge into the call.

Privacy blocks Barge-In attempts.

Function keys simplify the Barge-In operation.
Barge-In
2 - 143
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.

With Version 5000, the Barge-In key has been enhanced to allow for additional data to be
assigned to the key. The additional data can be set to:


Nothing (same as before).

Extension Number (when pressed it will Barge-In to that Extension).

 (when pressed, it will Barge-In to the Extension that Call Forward Both Ring is set to. If no
Forward Both Ring is set it will ask as though no additional data is set [Basic Barge-In
Functionality]).
When using Barge-In, the maximum number of conference ports supported is 32 (two
original participants and a maximum of 30 Barge-In participants).
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Monitoring
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Off-Hook Signaling
2 - 144
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Park
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Set up Item 02 for single digit
Barge-In. For example, you can
assign Item 02 to use digit 5 for
Barge-In. This allows you to
program a function key with an
extension number plus the
Barge-In code (i.e., 5). This allows
one-touch access to the Barge-In
feature for extension.
(default not assigned)
Assign a function key for Barge-In
(code 34).
Optional additional data can be
assigned as extension number
or  (Version 5000 or higher
required).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

15-07-01
20-06-01
Barge-In
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
2
3


2 - 145
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode or
Monitor mode.
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 1 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Allow (1)/Deny (0) an extension
user ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the
Barge-In feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

20-18-07
Service Tone Timers – Intrusion
Tone Repeat Time
After a user barges in, the system
repeats the Barge-In tone after
this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
21-01-03
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
Program the time an extension
must wait before using the
Barge-In feature can be used on a
call (this timer waits until it expires
before putting a call in a talk
state). This time also affects Voice
Over.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-32
20-14-11
3



Operation
To Barge-In after calling a busy extension:

The time in Program 21-01-03 must expire before you can Barge-In.
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
2 - 146
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To Barge-In without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial 710.
- OR -
Press Barge-In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 34).
3.
Dial busy extension.

The extension user hears a warning tone.

The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.

The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
To Barge-In to a Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).

2.
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a callback to the extension.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the
Conference, depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the
joined party. If a Conference is not possible:

The extension user hears a warning tone.

The DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.

The Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
Not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
- OR -
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
Barge-In
2 - 147
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 148
Barge-In
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Battery Backup – System Memory
Description
The battery on the CD-CP00-US retains the Clock/Calendar and Last Number Redial (LNR) buffers for
each station when the CD-CP00-US encounters a power loss. With a fully charged battery, the settings
are retained for approximately three years.
The system programmed memory (Customer Database) is stored in Nonvolatile Memory and can be
erased only by performing a First Initialization.

For additional storage time, the database and Caller ID History can be copied to the Compact Flash card on the
CD-CP00-US.
Conditions

The battery on the CD-CP00-US should be removed during long term storage but must be
installed (protection against loss of power) just before blade installation to provide battery
backup for System Memory.

When fully charged, the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years.

You should replace the CD-CP00-US battery every three years.

During normal operation, the battery is continually recharged using a built-in charging
circuit from the CD-CP00-US.

To prevent loss of the Caller ID History, you should save the database before storing the
CD-CP00-US.

Battery backup on the CD-CP00-US does not protect the following:

Callback

Off-line Status (for programming system or station assignments)

Repeat Redial

Trunk Queuing/Camp-On

Caller ID History
Default Settings
None
 The battery must be installed on the CD-CP00-US prior to programming a customer database.
Battery Backup – System Memory
2 - 149
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Power
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
90-03-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Save Data
Save the programmed data on the
SRAM and Flash ROM to the
16MB/32MB ATA removable
Compact Flash memory card. This
program should be used after
changing the programmed data.
2
3
Dial 1 + Press Hold
(default not assigned)

Operation
None
2 - 150
Battery Backup – System Memory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Battery Backup – System Power
Description
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during
commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected and fully charged,
full system operation can be maintained for an extended time. Actual time depends on system
configuration, traffic conditions, and the capacity of the batteries.
Conditions

During normal operation, the batteries are continually recharged by a built-in charging
circuit.

The CD-CP00-US is equipped with batteries for system battery backup.

An External Battery Pack can be connected to the system to provide extended time during
a commercial power outage. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
for further details.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
CD-CP00-US
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Power
2 - 151
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming
None
Operation
None
2 - 152
Battery Backup – System Power
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Description
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the system
is operated as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any multiline
terminal or the same key can appear on multiple terminals. This feature allows efficient call
handling when numerous CO calls are received and a limited number of CO line key
appearances are available.
Once a Call Appearance (CAP) Key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk
call. For example, the user can place the call on hold, transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a
park orbit. An incoming call is answered on the first available CAP key, beginning with the
lowest numbered key. If keys 1~3 are Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, for example, the first
incoming call is answered on key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call is answered on key 2. If
keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call is answered on key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional
incoming calls queue for the first available key.
C
Conditions

A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on
a line key. The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key, or as a Call
Appearance Key. A CAP is dynamic because it is used for any trunk call. An
8-button multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the telephone to
process all trunks, eight trunks at a time.

Multiline terminals can be assigned to the same CAP Key. Trunk calls that
appear on the same CAP Key at multiple stations have the same visual
appearance of the call (Busy or Hold).

Any held call left on a CAP key for more than the programmed time recalls to the
multiline terminal where the call was originally put on hold.

When a multiline terminal (other than the one that originally initiated or received
a call) is used to retrieve a held call, the SMDR records a transfer to the multiline
terminal where the call was retrieved.

Only outside lines use a CAP key.

A multiline terminal can have multiple CAP keys assigned to it.

Outside lines reside on the CAP key in the order of lowest to highest line key
number on the station. For instance, when line keys 1, 2 and 3 are CAP keys,
the first call resides on line key 1, the second call resides on line key 2 and third
call resides on line key 3.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
2 - 153
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

All Flexible Line keys on a multiline terminal can be assigned as CAP keys in System
Programming.

A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one Call Appearance key.

For Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, trunks must be assigned to trunk group 1 or higher
(Program 14-05-01). Trunk Group 0 means KF (Key Function) mode.

CAP Keys can be programmed from 0001~9999. 0000 assigns the next available CAP
Key.

Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03) and Call Appearance (CAP) Key (08), codes
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.

If you have both trunk line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys, the line key has priority.
An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered, the trunk line keys lights, not
the CAP Key. When you access the trunk for an outgoing call, the Trunk line key lights, not
the Call Appearance (CAP) Key.

With Version 4000 or higher software, CAP keys can only be assigned or used if Program
20-02-03 is set to Original (0).

A system can have only CAP keys or Loops keys.

When SV telephones are installed, CAP key mode must be used. When UX telephones are
installed, Loop key mode must be used.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
SV8100 Terminals only
Required Component(s)
None
2 - 154
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Secondary Incoming Extension
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
2 - 155
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-02-23
20-06-01
20-11-19
2 - 156
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
(08 + XXXX = CAP
key where XXXX is the
CAP orbit number
0001-9999)


System Options for Multiline
Telephones – UX5000 Phone
Operation Mode
Selects the Loop Key operation
like the UX5000 terminal, or the
CAP Key operation like the
SV8100 terminal.
0 = Original Operation
Mode (CAP Key)
1 = UX5000 Special
Operation Mode (Loop
Key)
(default = 0)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
2
3


Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Hold – Hold
Recall Time
A call on Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold
after this time. This time works
with the Hold Recall Callback
Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
System Options for Hold – Hold
Recall Callback Time
A call that is parked longer than
the programmed time recalls the
extension where it was initially
parked.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
24-01-03
System Options for Hold –
Exclusive Hold Recall Time
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on
Hold after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
24-01-04
System Options for Hold –
Exclusive Hold Recall Callback
Time
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not
picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
System Options for Hold –
Forced Release of Held Call
Depending on the setting of
Program 14-01-16, the system
disconnects calls on Hold longer
than this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800)
System Options for Hold – Park
Hold Time - Normal
Set the Park Hold Time. A call
that is parked longer than the
programmed time recalls the
extension where it was initially
parked.
Refer to Flexible System
Numbering on page 2-653 for
setting Flexible Timeouts for Class
of Service.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
Set the Extended Park Hold Time.
A call that is parked longer than
the programmed time recalls the
extension where it was initially
parked.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 300)
24-01-01
24-01-02
24-01-05
24-01-06
24-01-07
System Options for Hold – Park
Hold Time - Extended (Recall)
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
2
3







2 - 157
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal:
1.
Go off-hook using the handset and wait for internal dial tone.
- OR -
Press Speaker and wait for internal dial tone.
2.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9).
3.
Dial the outside party (the Call Appearance key lights). Begin your conversation.
4.
Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
5.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
To receive an incoming call, put it on hold and then retrieve it using a multiline terminal:
1.
Receive CO/PBX incoming ring.
2.
Go off-hook using the handset, or press Speaker (the Call Appearance key lights). Talk with
outside party.
3.
Press Hold (the Call Appearance key flashes).
4.
Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call.
2 - 158
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page automatically displays
for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and ITL-320C-1 terminals.
Description
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are software extensions available on the Basic and Expanded Port Packages. A
Call Arrival Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple
stations. Call Arrival Keys are busy only when ringing and are not used during talking.
Call Arrival Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions (VE). In virtual extension mode, the key acts as
a secondary extension. Up to 256 CAR/VE keys are provided.
Conditions

CAR keys and virtual extensions share 256 available ports/extensions.

The 256 available ports/extensions are assigned per extension for CAR key mode or virtual
extension (VE) key mode.

More than one extension can share a CAR key.

An extension can have more than one CAR key assigned.

Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key.

If multiple CAR/SIE/VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time, the CAR/SIE/VE key
on the lowest Line Key is answered first.

In Version 3000 or higher software, the system can be programmed to blink the page
number of a DT300/DT700 DESI-Less terminal when it receives an incoming call, or switch
to the page of the incoming call. Also, a default page can be defined for the DESI-Less
terminal to change to when it goes idle or when it has answered a call.

DT300/DT700 terminals installed in a SV8100 with the IPK/IPK II Migration system do not
support the DESI-Less page switching and blinking.

DESI-Less screen page switching only applies to idle terminals. If a terminal is not idle, the
screen will not switch if another call comes in until the phone goes idle.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
2 - 159
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Virtual Extensions
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-01-01
2 - 160
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Numbering – Service
Code
Set system numbering plan.
Refer to UNIVERGE
SV8100 System
Program Manual
2
3

Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
11-04-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Virtual Extension Numbering
Assign virtual extension numbers.
Up to eight digits
1 201
2 202
3 203
~
~
2
3

99 299
100 3601
~
~
256 3857
15-01-01
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Extension Name
Define the extension/virtual
extension name.
Up to 12 characters
Default:
STA 101 = Ext 101
STA 102 = Ext 102,
etc.

15-01-05
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Restriction for Outgoing Disable
on Incoming Line
Enable (1)/Disable (0) supervised
dial detection for an extension.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)

15-02-07
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Hold for CO
Lines
Assign automatic hold (or
disconnect) for CO lines.
0 = Hold
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
(default = 1)

15-02-21
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Virtual Extension
Access Mode (when idle Virtual
Extension key pressed)
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension/Call Arrival Key (CAR)
should function as a DSS key, a
Virtual Extension, or a CAR key.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing
(1) is selected, the key functions
as a virtual extension and can be
used for incoming and outgoing
calls. When Ignore (2) is selected,
the key functions as a CAR key
and can receive incoming calls
only.
Virtual Extension Key
Mode
0 = DSS
1 = Outgoing
2 = Ignore
(default = 2)
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
(03 + ICM = VE or
CAR where ICM is the
extension number of
the VE or CAR)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys


2 - 161
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-08-01
15-09-01
15-10-01
15-11-01
15-18-01
2 - 162
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the
function key on the key telephone,
select the ring tone when receiving
a call on that key.
For ACD CAR keys, only tone
pattern 1 (entry 0) can be used.
The remaining patterns are not
checked with this feature.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring
Tone Extension
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
(default = 0, Tone
Pattern 1)
Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or
Virtual Extension Group Answer
Key which is defined in Program
15-07.
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
(default = 0)
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Order Setup
When two or more virtual
extensions are set on a function
key on the telephone, and the tone
pattern by which the sound of
each extension differs, the priority
of ring sound is set up.
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
Order 1 Pattern 0 =
Pattern 1 (default)
Order 2 Pattern 1 =
Pattern 2 (default)
Order 3 Pattern 2 =
Pattern 3 (default)
Order 4 Pattern 3 =
Pattern 4 (default)


Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
Assign the delayed ringing options
for an extension Virtual Extension
or Virtual Extension Group Answer
keys (defined in Program 15-09).
Day/Night Mode: 1~8
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
(default = 0)
Virtual Extension Key Enhanced
Options – Virtual Extension Key
Operation Mode
Define whether calls to a Virtual
Extension Key land on the Virtual
or on the extension / CAP / CO
appearance.
 This is assigned for the
Virtual Extension Key not the
extension it resides on.
0 = Release
1 = Land On the Key
(default = 0)
3



Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-18-02
20-04-03
20-06-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Virtual Extension Key Enhanced
Options – Display Mode When
Placing a Call on Virtual
Extension Key
Define if calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual
Extension Key name or the name
of the extension it resides on.
0 = Secondary
Extension Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
(default = 0)
System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring
the extension after this time.
0~64800
(default = 10 seconds)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3



Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the Appearance
function keys using Service Code
752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to answer an incoming call on a
Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
set to off for this option to work.
1 = Off
0 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable/Disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
(default = 0)

23-04-01
Ringing Line Preference for
Virtual Extensions
When an extension has a virtual
extension assigned to a
Programmable Function Key,
program this option to determine
the priority for automatically
answering the ringing calls when
the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is
selected, when the user lifts the
handset, the user answers a
ringing call from any group.
00~64
(0 or 00=Don’t Care)
(default = 00)
20-07-10
20-10-08
20-13-27
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys



2 - 163
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Press the flashing Call Arrival (CAR) Key.
To place a call to a Call Arrival (CAR) Key:
1.
Lift the handset, or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the CAR key extension, or press the Call Arrival (CAR) Key.

The operation depends on the setting in Program 15-02-21.
To program a Call Arrival (CAR) Key on a telephone:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press Hold once for Immediate Ring

7.
To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.
Dial the Mode number in which the key rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
8.
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
Press Hold to set up Delayed Ring.
- OR -
Skip to Step 10.
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
10.
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
Press Speaker.
2 - 164
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Duration Timer
Description
Call Duration Timer lets a multiline terminal with an LCD time their trunk calls on the telephone display.
This helps users that must keep track of their time on the telephone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call
Time begins as soon as the user answers the call.
Conditions

The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park.

The Call Duration Timer (Program 20-13-36) is not displayed for inbound ACD calls.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Call Duration Timer
2 - 165
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-09-06
20-13-36
21-01-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminals LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

System Options for Outgoing
calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
The system waits for this time to
expire before starting the Call
Timer.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)

2
3
Operation
To time your trunk calls:
1.
Place a trunk call.

2 - 166
The timer starts automatically.
Call Duration Timer
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Description
The Call Forwarding – Centrex feature allows a station to forward an incoming PBX/Centrex CO call to
an outside location using the same PBX/Centrex CO line to free the line for additional use.
Call Forwarding – Centrex supports the following:

Call Forward – Immediate

Call Forward – Busy

Call Forward – No Answer

Call Forward – Busy/No Answer
Conditions

Call Forwarding – Centrex calls transferred from another station are forwarded when the
transferred Trunk is assigned as PBX in Program 14-04-01.

The following incoming calls follow Call Forwarding – Centrex when the incoming trunk is a
PBX/Centrex trunk:

DIT/ANA

Station Transfer

Automated Attendant Transfer

DISA Calls

Call Forwarding – Centrex is not supported for Call Forward Both Ring Split.

A maximum of 24 digits can be assigned in the destination for Call Forwarding – Centrex.

When a trunk is set to CTX/PBX, and is set for Call Forwarding – Centrex to an incorrect
number, the call recalls and follow CO incoming ringing (i.e., DIL, Normal Ring Group
Programming).

When Call Forwarding – Centrex is set and all trunks are changed in Program 14-04-01
from PBX to Trunk, Call Forward is cleared from memory.

When DND and any Call Forwarding – Centrex is set, the call forwards immediately.

Call Forwarding – Centrex does not follow the Code Restriction of the stations.
Call Forwarding – Centrex
2 - 167
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
PBX/Centrex CO line
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Code Restriction
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
PBX Compatibility
Virtual Extensions
Voice Response System (VRS)
2 - 168
Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
2
Allocate the circuits on the
CD-CP00-US ETUs for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection. Program 14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Supervision Enable (1) loop
supervision for each trunk that
should be able to use Call
Forwarding – Centrex.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available

11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Assign the Call Forward All Split
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy Split
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Assign the Call Forward No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Enable/Disable loop supervision
for the trunk.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 1)
14-01-13
Call Forwarding – Centrex
3


2 - 169
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Indicate if the trunk is installed
behind a PBX (1) or not (0). There
is one item for each Night Service
Mode.
0 = Stand Alone
(Trunk)
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
2 = Not Used
3 = CTX assume 9
(default = 0)
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

System Options for Transfer –
Hook Flash Sending Timer When
the System Answers
Automatically
Set the time the system waits
before sending the hookflash for
the Centrex Transfer after
answering the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 2)
24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Assign Call Forwarding Type and
the destination numbers for CTX/
PBX all call, no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Assign Call Forwarding Type and
the destination numbers for CTX/
PBX busy calls.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

14-04-01
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
24-02-13
2 - 170
Behind PBX Setup
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
2
3



Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding – Centrex:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 3 (CTX/PBX).
4.
Dial 1 (Set).
5.
Dial number to Centrex Forward to.
6.
Hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding – Centrex:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Split Service Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial 3 (CTX/PBX) or 0 (All).
Call Forwarding – Centrex
2 - 171
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 172
Call Forwarding – Centrex
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Forwarding
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Desktop terminal and the Mobile Extension can
both ring. If neither extension answers, the call is forwarded to Voice Mail.
Description
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension or an off-premise
number. Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work
area. The types of Call Forwarding are:

Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or unanswered.

Call Forwarding – Centrex
When using PBX/Centrex trunks, calls to the extension perform a Centrex transfer using
Immediate, Busy and No Answer Forwarding.

Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.

Call Forwarding with both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded
extension ring (not for Voice Mail).

Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).

Call Forwarding Follow Me
Refer to Call Forwarding with Follow Me on page 2-187 for more information.

Live Monitor
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to VM8000 InMail System Guide for
more information.
Call Forwarding
2 - 173
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Call Forwarding reroutes calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension.
Call Forwarding can also be split, allowing internal and external calls to forward to different destinations.
The extension user can enable Call Forwarding from their telephone. An extension user can also set the
forwarding for another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination. To redirect
calls while a user is at another telephone, use Call Forwarding with Follow Me. A periodic VRS
announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Conditions
2 - 174

Virtual Extensions can be set to Call Forward. Program 15-02-21 must be set to a 1 to
allow the Virtual Extension to place outgoing calls.

If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Both Ring, calls do not
continue routing to other extensions in the chain (Version 2500 or lower software).

If an extension in a call forward chain has Call Forward with Follow Me set, calls do not
continue routing to other extensions in the chain.

If the extension has Call Forward-Both Ring set to another extension, it will only continue to
forward if the Both ring location is forwarded (B/NA or NA) to VM and no where else
(Version 3000 or higher software is required).

Call Forwards can be chained allowing calls to forward from one extension to the next. Up
to 32 extensions can be linked in a call forward chain.

Periodic reminder message requires a PZ-VM21 daughter board for Voice Response
System (VRS).

Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.

Ring Groups do not follow Call Forwarding.

Call Forward Split does not allow for Call Forward with Follow Me.

If Call Forwarding off premise, a trunk access code must be included in the forwarding
number.

Call Forward with Follow Me allows for a single station to set follow me for multiple stations.
When canceling Call Forward with Follow Me, the use must specify the station to cancel or
cancel all.

The telephone must be idle to enable call forwarding with a Programmable Function Key, or
receiving dial tone to enable call forwarding with a service code.

Call Forward for any Extension to Destination cannot be set or canceled from a Virtual
Extension.

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override allows for Overriding a Call Forwarding or DND
setting at another extension.
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing their telephone.

An extension user can forward their calls to a Department number.

A DSS key indicates a Call Forwarding indication for extensions.

When DND All and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If
Busy and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy
forwarding.

Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.

If an extension Class of Service denies Call Forwarding (Program 20-11-01~Program
20-11-05, off), the extension can still dial the service code to Set/Cancel Call Forwarding,
but it cannot set any data.

Call Forward Both Ring Split does not work to an off-premise destination.

If an IP telephone has forwarding set and then loses connection, it follows the forwarding.

If an IP phone has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses
connection, it follows the Busy forwarding location.

When the following are done in sequence,

Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set to extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is set on extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is cancelled on extension
then,
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set back on the extension.

When the following are done in sequence,

Call Forwarding No Answer is set to extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is set on extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is cancelled on extension
then,
all Call Forwarding is cancelled.

Call Forwarding
Any settings in Programs 24-09-04 and 24-09-05, copies the information to Programs 24-09-02 and
24-09-03 and is changed to Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer.
2 - 175
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
When the following are done in sequence,

Call Forwarding Busy is set to extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is set on extension

Call Forwarding Immediate is cancelled on extension
then,
Call Forwarding Busy/No Answer is set back on the extension.

The @ and P characters are not supported in the call forward destination. These
characters are only supported on a one touch/DSS key and in speed dial bins.

If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated, the calling
station will receive a busy tone. Call Forward Both Ring is not followed.

With Version 8000 or higher software, if Program 20-11-30 is set to 0 (Off), the Call FWD
setting is displayed on the terminal LCD screen when idle.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals and Virtual Extensions
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 176
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Department Calling
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for setting
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 733)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for Each
Trunk Line
Set the service code for canceling
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 734)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Set the service code for setting the
destination for automatic trunk
transfer.
MLT
(default = 735)
11-10-18
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box
Set the service code for setting
automatic transfer for each trunk
line.
MLT
(default = 722)

11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– All
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding all calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 741)

11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for busy calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 742)

11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
Call Forwarding
3



2 - 177
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– No Answer
Set the service code for setting call
forwarding for no answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 743)

11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy/No Answer
Set the service code for setting
call forwarding for busy or no
answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 744)

11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Both Ring
Set the service code for setting
call forwarding for busy or no
answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 745)

11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call
Forwarding – Follow Me
Set the service code for setting
call forwarding for follow me.
MLT, SLT
(default = 746)

11-11-08
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Do Not
Disturb
Set the service code for setting
call forwarding for Do Not Disturb.
MLT, SLT
(default = 747)

11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward all
split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward
busy split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward no
answer split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward
busy or no answer split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward the
both ring split.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward all
destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 790)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy Destination
(No Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward
busy destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 791)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward no
answer destination with no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 792)
11-11-53
11-11-54
2 - 178
3





Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
Busy No Answer Destination (No
Split)
Set or Cancel the call forward
busy or no answer destination with
no split.
MLT, SLT
(default = 793)
11-11-58
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call forward
with Personal Greeting
Set the service code for setting
call forwarding with Personal
Greeting.
MLT, SLT
(default = 713)

11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Customize the Service Codes
which are used for bypass calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)

11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
Customize the one-digit Service
Codes used when a busy or ring
back signal is heard.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

11-11-55
20-06-01
20-09-01
20-09-07
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Call Forwarding
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3




2 - 179
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On the ability to set
and cancel Call Forwarding for a
CAR or Virtual Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

20-11-30
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Disable Call
FWD Indication on LCD
When set to On (1), Call FWD
setting is not shown on the
terminal LCD.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)
20-13-05
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension to
receive off-hook Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension user to
manually (0) or automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
An example of an off-hook signal
is the tone heard when receiving a
second call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Transfer –
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding
interval. For an unanswered call,
Call Forward No Answer occurs
after this interval.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-23
20-13-06
24-02-03
2 - 180
2
3


(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)


Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
24-09-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Type:
Assign Call Forwarding Type and
the destination numbers for each
extension/virtual extension.
2
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding
with
both ring
2 = Call Forwarding
when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all
calls
4 = Call Forwarding
busy
or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding
when busy
(default = 0)

24-09-02
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
Assign CO Call Forwarding
Destination for ring, all call and no
answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-03
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for Both ring, All
Call, No Answer
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for ring, all call and no
answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-04
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Assign CO Call Forwarding for
busy destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-05
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding
for busy destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Assign Call Forwarding for CTX/
PBX all call, no answer
destinations.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Assign Call Forwarding
destinations for busy CTX/PBX
calls.
1~9, 0, #, , R,
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

3
Operation
To set Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
Call Forwarding
2 - 181
Issue 12.0
2.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function Keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-2019.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key lights.
To cancel Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 10)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-2019.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
2 - 182
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 13 or SC 751, Key Code 13)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward – Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751, Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on.
To cancel Call Forward – Both Ring at a forwarding station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Both Ring Service Code (default: 745).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
Call Forwarding
2 - 183
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To set Call Forward – Follow Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the station number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key goes on.
To cancel Call Forward – Follow Me from the destination station:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Follow Me Service Code (default: 746).
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys.
(Program 15-07-01, 10 or SC 751, Key Code 15)
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded, or 0 to cancel all extensions.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off.
To set Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (Default: 790).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
2 - 184
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default: 790).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number which is forwarded.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To cancel Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Busy/No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code (default:
793).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Dial the station number, which is forwarded.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward – Immediate using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-2019.
Call Forwarding
2 - 185
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To cancel Call Forward – Immediate at a forwarding station:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Immediate Service Code (default: 741).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
To set Call Forward – Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (Default: 744).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the destination extension or off-premise number.
5.
Press Speaker or hang up.

Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page on page 2-2019.
To cancel Call Forward – Busy/No Answer using a Virtual Extension:
1.
Press the idle Virtual Extension key.
2.
Dial the Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Service Code (default: 744).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
4.
Press Speaker or hang up.
2 - 186
Call Forwarding
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Description
While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the
co-worker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker’s desk longer than
expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me
from the co-worker’s telephone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the
initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions

Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.

Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station.

Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming. DIL calls
ring an idle Department Group member, then follow Program 22-08 programming then
Program 22-05 programming.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
2 - 187
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-11-07
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call
Forwarding – Follow Me
Assign the service code of Call
Forward Follow Me.
MLT, SLT
(default = 746)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
(15 = Call Forward with
Follow Me)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

20-06-01
20-11-05
2 - 188
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
2
3

Call Forwarding with Follow Me
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal:
1.
At a multiline terminal, other than your own, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program
11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the Extension to forward.

The multiline terminal with display indicates on the display of the telephone which Call Forward Follow Me is
set. Also, the Programmed Follow Me Flexible Line Key flashes (if assigned) when Follow Me is set.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own multiline terminal:
1.
At your multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
- OR -
Press the Call Forward Follow Me key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: Code 15).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone:
1.
At a single line telephone, other than your own, lift the handset and dial the Service Code (746
Program 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 1 to set.
3.
Dial the extension to forward.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone:
1.
At your single line telephone, lift the handset and dial Service Code (746, Program 11-11-07).
2.
Dial 0 to cancel.
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel All Forward Follow Me).
- OR -
Dial the extension number with Follow Me set.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
2 - 189
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 190
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Description
Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By
enabling Call Forward, Off-Premise, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls
while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any telephone number the user
enters, such as a mobile phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can
route the off-site telephone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route
Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions

Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1

Direct Inward Lines 1

DISA, DID and Tie Line calls to the forwarded extension 1

Transferred calls 1
Off-Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, Call Arrival (CAR) Keys, or Ring
Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Program 22-04 and
Program 22-05).
Conditions
1.

If a call that forwards Off-Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID, and the
called party does not answer before the time in Program 34-07-05, the call recalls to the
station that performed the transfer.

Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.

The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24
digits.

Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from
receiving Department Pilot Calls.

If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10~17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (refer to the Programming section).
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 191
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

DID calls to an extension with Off-Premise Call Forwarding set do not recall if there is no
answer.

Door Boxes must be programmed for the calls to be transferred Off-Premise.

The outside number Call Forwarding dials can be only a number normally allowed by the
forwarded extension Toll Restriction.

In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS, callers to an extension forwarded
off-premise hear, “Please hold on, your call is being rerouted.” This option can be disabled
in Program 40-10-01 by setting it to disable.

When a station is in DND and any Call Forwarding Off Premise is set, the call forwards
immediately.

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Forwarding
Code Restriction
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Do Not Disturb
2 - 192
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Door Box
Virtual Extensions
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Allocate the circuits on the
CD-CP00-US ETUs for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection. Program 14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Supervision Enable (1) loop
supervision for each trunk that
should be able to use Call
Forwarding Off-Premise.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available
2

11-07-01
Department Group Pilot
Numbers – Dial
Assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-01
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– All
Assign the Call Forward All
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 741)

11-11-02
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy
Assign the Call Forward Busy
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 742)

11-11-03
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– No Answer
Assign the Call Forward No
Answer Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 743)

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
3

2 - 193
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-04
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Busy/No Answer
Assign the Call Forward Busy No
Answer Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 744)

11-11-05
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Call Forward
– Both Ring
Assign the Call Forward Both Ring
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 745)

11-11-45
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All (Split)
Assign the Call Forward All Split
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-46
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy (Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy Split
Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-47
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer (Split)
Assign the Call Forward No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

11-11-48
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
(Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy No
Answer Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-49
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Both Ring (Split)
Assign the Call Forward Both Ring
Split Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-11-52
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward All Destination (No
Split)
Assign the Call Forward All for any
Extension Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 790)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy Destination
(No Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy for
any Extension Service Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 791)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Assign the Call Forward No
Answer for any Extension Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 792)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Set/Cancel
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Destination (No Split)
Assign the Call Forward Busy No
Answer for any Extension Service
Code.
MLT, SLT
(default = 793)
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Enable/Disable loop supervision
for the trunk.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 1)
11-11-53
11-11-54
11-11-55
14-01-13
2 - 194
3







Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-11-12
20-13-05
20-13-06
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive off-hook Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2
3

2 - 195
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
21-03-01
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
24-02-07
24-09-01
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Used to set the Trunk Route Table
for Automatic External Call
Forward.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
0~100
(0 = No setting)
(default = 1)
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
Timer starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires,
a warning tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800)
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Type
Assign Call Forwarding Type and
destination numbers for each
extension/virtual extension.
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding
with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding
when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all
calls
4 = Call Forwarding
busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding
when busy
(default = 0)

3


24-09-02
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
Assign CO Call Forwarding
destination numbers for both ring,
all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-03
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for both ring, All
Call, No Answer
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding
destination numbers for both ring,
all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-04
Call Forward Split Settings – CO
Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Assign CO Call Forwarding busy
destination numbers.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-05
Call Forward Split Settings –
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Assign Intercom Call Forwarding
busy destination numbers.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-06
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for All Call, No Answer
Assign Call Forwarding
destination numbers for CTX/PBX
for all call and no answer.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

24-09-07
Call Forward Split Settings – Call
Forwarding Destination for CTX/
PBX for Busy
Assign Call Forwarding
destination numbers for CTX/PBX
for busy.
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

2 - 196
2
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-07-07
25-07-08
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller
or any Trunk-to-Trunk (such as
Tandem Trunking) conversation
can talk before the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3600)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
Determine how long the system
waits before disconnecting a DISA
or any trunk-to-trunk (such as
Tandem Trunking) call after the
Long Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
2
3


Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – Normal (0) Trunks:
Program
Number
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
13-01-01
13-04-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Automatic Transfer for each
Trunk Line
Customize the service code to be
used to set the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature.
MLT
(default = 733)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Canceling the
Automatic Transfer for each
Trunk Line
Customize the service code to be
used to cancel the Automatic
Trunk Forwarding feature.
MLT
(default = 734)
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Setting the
Destination for Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Customize the service code to be
used to set the destination for the
Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature.
MLT
(default = 735)
Speed Dialing Option Setup –
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed
Dialing number will dial an outside
number (seizing a trunk as
assigned in Program 13-05) or an
Intercom number (0 = Trunk
Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode
(default = 0)
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the Common and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and
names which are to be used for
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key
1)
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2
3





2 - 197
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-01-26
20-06-01
20-07-05
22-02-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Mode
Enable (1)/Disable (0) each trunk
ability to use Step Transfer.
0 = Normal Transfer
(Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
(default = 0)

Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Incoming Call Trunk Setup –
Incoming Type
Assign the incoming trunk type for
each trunk. There is one item for
each Mode. When using
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding the
trunks must be set for Normal (0).
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)


24-02-11
System Options for Transfer –
No Answer Step Transfer
Assign the amount of time each
transfer destination rings before
step transfer is performed.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
24-02-12
System Options for Transfer –
No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Define the time that elapses
before the automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is
performed.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dialing number
bin (0~1999) to a trunk and the
mode which should be used as the
destination of the Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
0~1999
24-04-01
2 - 198
(default = 1999)
2
3


Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – DID (3) Trunk Forwarding by Department Groups:

Refer to Departmental Calling for additional Department Group programming.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot
Numbers – Dial
Assign pilot numbers to the
Extension (Department) Groups
you set up in Program 16-02.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Setup for Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the Automatic Trunk
Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 602)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to cancel the Automatic
Trunk Forwarding feature for a
Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 603)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
Customize the service code to be
used to set the destination for the
Automatic Trunk Forwarding
feature for a Department Group.
MLT
(default = 604)
Speed Dialing Function Setup –
Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
Determine if dialing an Speed
Dialing number will dial an outside
number (seizing a trunk as
assigned in Program 13-05) or an
Intercom number (0 = Trunk
Dialing Mode, 1 = Extension
Dialing Mode).
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode
(default = 0)
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the Common and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and
names which are to be used for
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key
1)
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
11-11-26
11-11-27
13-01-01
13-04-01
14-01-04
14-01-05
2






Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Gain Level for
Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program
14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type
2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
1~63(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Gain Level for
Conference and Transfer Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB [Program
14-01-04 = 32 (CODEC Gain Type
2)] can be used to set the transmit
CODEC gain type for multiline
Conference or transferred calls.
1~63(-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 16 (-8dB)]

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
3
2 - 199
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-06-01
15-07-01
16-02-01
20-06-01
20-11-17
24-05-01
2 - 200
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Programmable Function Keys
Department Group Assignment
for Extensions
Class of Service for Extensions
Set the priority order number 1~4.
0 = Not Specify
1~100 : (Trunk Group
Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 +
Route Table Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order
Number 1 = 1 (Trunk
Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4
= 0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0
(Not Specified).

Assign an Automatic Forwarding
at Department Group key (58) or a
Delayed Forwarding at
Department Group key (59) for an
extension user.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Set up the Department Group
called by the pilot number and the
extension priority when a group is
called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.
Department Groups
1~64
Priority 1~999
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Default = 1
extensions in
Department Group 1
with priority in port
order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority = 256
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn On or Off an extension in a
Department Group ability to use
the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Department Group Transfer
Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dialing number
bin to be used as the destination
of the Department Group
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding.
0~1999
(default = 1999)
2
3




Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding – DID (3) Trunk Forwarding Using DID Translation Table:

Refer to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) for additional DID programming.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 1
22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 2
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1-2000), specify the first
and second Transfer Destinations
if the callers receives a busy or no
answer (action defined in Program
22-11-04).
 If the Transfer Destinations
are busy or receive no
answer, those calls are
transferred to the final
transfer destination (Program
22-10).
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming
Group
101 = (Not Used)
102 = In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or InMail
201~264 = Extension
Group
400 = Valid Extension
Number
401 = DISA
501~548 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000~999 = Speed
Number (000~999)
(default = 0)
2
3


Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal only, press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys (Program
15-07-01, Program 15-07-10~Program 15-07-15 or SC 751 Key Code 10~15).
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial the Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + Number (9+2142622000).

Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #9 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 201
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise non-split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
3.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code.
3.
Dial 1 (Set).
4.
Dial 1 (Internal) or 0 (External).
5.
Dial Trunk Access Code (default: 9) + number (9 + 2142622000).

Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 704 + Line Group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #9 + Line
number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5).

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise Split:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
2.
At a single line telephone, lift the handset.
3.
Dial the Call Forward Access Code (default not assigned).
4.
Dial 0 (Cancel).

If Internal and External are set both are canceled.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function key flashes.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes

These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.
2 - 202
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:

This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751, code
54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3.
Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4.
Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press Call Forward (Device) key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751, code
54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial 0 (Cancel).
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding:
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.

The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry overwrites any
existing number defined in the bin.
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 203
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 735.
3.
Dial trunk port number (7 001~200) to be defined.
4.
Select the mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Step Transfer) (follows the predefined destination in
Program 24-04-01) Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:

The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 733.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 734.
3.
Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Department Group Line Forwarding:
Method 1
Set the Destination and Forward the Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Enter the telephone number, which is the destination of the forwarded trunk.

2 - 204
The number is stored in the Speed Dial bin number assigned in Program 24-04-01. This entry overwrites any
existing number defined in the bin.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.
Press Hold to accept the entry.
7.
Repeat from Step 3 to define another time mode entry or press Speaker to hang up.
Issue 12.0
Cancel the Line Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 604.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Select the time mode (1~8) to be defined.
5.
Press the Exit key.
6.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Method 2 (follows the pre-defined destination in Program 24-05-01)
Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding:

The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13-04-01 for the line to forward.
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 602.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 603.
3.
Dial the Department Group number (01~64) to be defined.
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
2 - 205
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 206
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Description
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful,
for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
2 - 207
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Customize the Service Code
which is to be used for Call
Forwarding/DND Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
Customize the 1-digit Service
Code used for DND/Call Forward
Override.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
2
3



(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-13-04
2 - 208
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn On or Off the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)


Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:
1.
Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2.
Press the Override key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 37).
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
2 - 209
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 210
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Monitoring
Enhancements
ACD Call Monitoring Enhancement: With Version 9000 or higher system software and the V9000
Enhancement license, users have the capability to enable ACD Call monitoring (15 Feature key) for
any call. In previous software versions, ACD Call Monitor only worked when the system was
configured for ACD and only ACD agent calls could be monitored. With Version 9000 software ACD
Call Monitor will function even if the system is not configured for the ACD feature.
Description
Call Monitoring allows selected multiline terminal users to monitor another user’s conversation without
participating. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to that station user. Without the audible
alert (silent monitor), no indication is provided to either the monitored station or the outside party.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor,
retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under
federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any
practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state
laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation,
such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of
all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability
Call Monitoring with Coaching Ability allows the transmit path to be opened only to the monitored station,
to provide the Coaching ability for the person that is performing the Call Monitoring. Press the MIC key,
or dial Feature + 1 to toggle the Coaching ability on and off.
Conditions

An extension set as an operator in Program 20-17-01 cannot be monitored using the ACD
Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement.

The ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement feature requires Version 9000 or
higher software and the V9000 Enhancement license.
Call Monitoring
2 - 211
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

While using the ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement, if the monitored
extension places the call on hold or transfers the call monitoring is stopped.

The ACD Call Monitoring (15 Feature key) Enhancement is supported on trunk calls and is
not supported on internal calls.

If an extensions class of service has Program 20-13-06 or Program 20-09-07 enabled, the
ACD Call Monitoring (15 Feature key) Enhancement does not work.

No alert tone is provided to callers when using the ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature key)
Enhancement feature.

Speech path is not supported for the ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement
feature even when Program 20-13-10 is enabled.

A maximum of 32 extensions can be monitored using the ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature
key) Enhancement feature.

Call Monitoring is allowed for internal calls.

An extension user cannot Monitor an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using
Hands-free Answerback. Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker.

An extension user cannot monitor a conference, however an extension programmed for
Call Monitor can barge In to a conference.

With Program 20-13-10 set to 0, a call, which has been barged into, can be placed on hold
by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which is
monitoring the call, are placed on hold.

The handset and microphone are muted during Call Monitoring.

Live Record does not work for Call Monitor calls.

While being monitored, an extension cannot receive Voice Over.

When a monitored extension places a call on hold, Call Monitor is automatically finished.

With Program 20-13-10 set to 1, a call which is being Monitored can be placed on park by
the originator of the outside call, but only the outside caller is placed in park. The extension
which is monitoring the call is dropped.

When Program 20-13-10 is set to 0 (OFF), coaching is not permitted. When Program
20-13-10 is set to 1 (On), Program 20-13-45 takes effect.

When Silent Monitor Mode is used, MIC or Feature + 1 can be used to activate speech path
to the internal and external parties.
Default Setting
Disabled
2 - 212
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
ACD Call Monitor (15 Feature key) Enhancement requires:

Version 9000 or higher system software

V9000 Enhancement license
Related Features
Barge-In
Conference
Hold
Intercom
Park
Programmable Function Keys
VM8000 InMail
Call Monitoring
2 - 213
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)
11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Customize the one-digit Service
Codes used for Barge-In.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-02-27
20-06-01
20-09-07

Select whether or not ACD Call
Monitor provided in the ACD Mode
works in normal business mode.
0 = Off (ACD Mode)
1 = On (Business
Mode)
(default = 0)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3

System Options for Multiline
Telephones – ACD Monitor for
Business Mode
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
2




This setting must be Disabled (0)
for the Call Monitoring
Enhancement to function.
2 - 214
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the extension Barge-In for
Speech mode or Monitor mode
(i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Barge-In at the receiving
extension (i.e., Barge-In receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
2
3

This setting must be Enabled (1)
for the ACD Call Monitoring
Enhancement to function.
20-13-17
20-13-32
20-13-45
20-14-11
20-17-01
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Allow (1)/Deny (0) the extension
user ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines
if the monitored parties receives
the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the
Barge-In feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
Define the extension numbers
which are to be used by operators.
Up to eight digits
(default = 101)
Service Tone Timers – Intrusion
Tone Repeat Time
Call Monitoring
After a user Barges In, the system
repeats the Barge-In tone after
this time. Normally, you should
disable this time by entering 0.
(This time also affects any other
type of call interruption features,
such as Voice Mail Conversation
Recording, Voice Over, etc.)




Extensions defined in this program
cannot be monitored using the
Call Enhancement feature.
20-18-07

0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)

2 - 215
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
21-01-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
Program the time an extension
must wait before using the
Barge-In feature can be used on a
call (this time expires before a call
is put in a talk state). This time
also affects Voice Over.
2
3
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)

Operation
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before it can be Monitored. Listen for busy/ring or busy
tone.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension:
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34).
- OR -
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks.
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
To Call Monitor without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Press Speaker or lift handset.
2.
Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 34).
3.
Dial a busy extension.

If Monitoring is not possible:

the extension user hears a warning tone.

the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group.

the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability:
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34).
2 - 216
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 12.0
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
- OR -
1.
Dial the extension number of the busy party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710.
3.
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off.
To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Press Speaker or lift the handset.
2.
Dial 710 or press the Barge-In key (Program 15-07 or SC 751:34).
3.
Dial a busy extension.
4.
Press MIC or Feature + 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station.
To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension using ACD Call Monitor (Version 9000 or higher):
1.
Call a busy extension.
2.
Press the ACD Terminal Speech Monitor key (Program 15-07 or SC 752:*15).
Call Monitoring
2 - 217
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 218
Call Monitoring
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Redirect
Description
Call Redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on a
call and another rings in to your extension. Press the Call Redirect key to transfer the call, allowing you
to continue with your current call.
This feature works with the following calls:

Normal trunk call

DID

DISA

DIL

E&M

ICM
The following calls cannot be redirected with the feature:

ACD

Transferred

Department Group (all ring mode)

Door Box

Virtual Extension
Conditions

After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call does not recall to the extension.

The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.

When a call is Redirected to another phone it does not follow the forwarding on that phone.

Call Redirect is not supported with AspireNet.

A call cannot be redirected across a CCIS Network.

Call Redirect is not supported when using UCB voice mail.
Call Redirect
2 - 219
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
2 - 220
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2
3

Call Redirect
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-11-16
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3


Operation
To redirect a ringing call:
With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 49
+ Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset.
Call Redirect
2 - 221
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 222
Call Redirect
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Description
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without
hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating
the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy
extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in queue for a
busy extension without being forgotten.
Conditions

Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).

If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a
callback.

Off-Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to
Camp-On and/or DID callers from automatically camping on.

Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp-On operation.

An extension user may Transfer a call to a busy extension.

Trunk Queuing lets an extension user camp-on to a trunk.

Call Queuing must be disabled also to disable Call Waiting.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Call Waiting/Camp-On
2 - 223
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Callback
Off-Hook Signaling
Programmable Function Keys
Transfer
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Second Call
for DID/DISA/DIL
This service code enables Second
Call to each extension when
Program 20-09-01 (Second Call)
is set to 0 (disable).
MLT
(default = 679)
11-12-04
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Set Camp-On
Customize the Service Code,
which is to be used for setting
Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 750)

11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Cancel Camp-On
Customize the Service Code,
which is to be used for cancelling
Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 770)

11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Waiting Answer/
Split Answer
If required, use this program to
change the code users dial to Split
while on a call.
SLT
(default = 794)

11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Camp-On
Customize the 1-digit Service
Code used for setting Camp-On.
(default = #)
11-11-23
2 - 224
3


Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
15-02-06
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Hold Key Operating
Mode
Set the function of the Multiline
Hold key. Hold can activate
normal Hold or Exclusive Hold.
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(default = 0)
15-02-12
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Off-Hook Ringing
Set the telephone off-hook
signaling.
0 = Muted Off-Hook
Ringing
1 = No Off-Hook
Ringing
2 = Not Used
3 = Beep in Speaker
(SP)
4 = Beep in Handset
(HS)
5 = Speaker & Handset
Beep
(default = 5)

Assign a function for Camp-On
(code 35). This key is also the
Callback key.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
2

20-01-08
System Options – Trunk
Queuing Callback Time
Set the Trunk Queuing callback
time. A Trunk Queuing Callback
rings an extension for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15)

20-01-09
System Options – Callback/
Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queueing
request after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800)

20-03-01
System Options for Single Line
Telephones – SLT Call Waiting
for Answer Mode
For a busy single line (500/2500
type) telephone, set the mode
used to answer a camped-on trunk
call.
For ESL sets, enabling this option
(1) allows the user to dial Service
Code for Voice Mail Conversation
Record.
0 = Hookflash
(Hooking)
1 = Hookflash +
Service Code 654
(default = 0)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Call Waiting/Camp-On
3


2 - 225
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-35
20-18-06
21-01-18
2 - 226
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook signaling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Service Tone Timers – Interval of
Call Waiting Tone
Set the time between call waiting
tones. This timer also sets the
interval between off-hook signaling
alerts.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Reset Dial After Failure of
Trunk Access
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to continue to dial codes or
extensions after receiving Trunk
Busy. This must be Enabled for
this feature to work.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DDI/
DIL/ E&M Override
3




Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To Camp-On a busy extension:
1.
Call the busy extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Do not hang up.

To camp-on to a trunk, refer to Trunk Queuing/Camp-On on page 2-1637.
To cancel a Camp-On request:
1.
Hang up.
2.
At a multiline terminal, press Speaker and dial 770.
- OR -
At a multiline terminal, press the Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:

Listen for Call Waiting Tones.
1.
Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls.

The operation depends on the setting in Program 20-03-01.

This operation is valid only before the caller performs the camp-on operation (refer To Camp-0n a busy
extension – step 2).
Call Waiting/Camp-On
2 - 227
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 228
Call Waiting/Camp-On
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Callback
Description
When an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can leave a Callback
request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back,
hoping to find it idle.
The system processes Callback requests as follows:
1.
Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.

Caller can place or answer additional calls in the meantime.
2.
When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3.
Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy or unanswered)
extension B.

4.
If caller A does not answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When
Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset.
When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to
answer the Callback ring.
Conditions

An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.

Call Arrival (CAR) Key (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp-On
Programmable Function keys (code 35).

If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension Camps-On to
the busy extension.

Function Keys simplify Callback operation.

The Callback feature is not available when calling a busy station from a Wireless DECT
(SIP) handset.
Default Setting
Enabled
Callback
2 - 229
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp-On)
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-05
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Cancel Camp-On
If required, redefine the service
code used cancel Camp-On.
MLT, SLT
(default = 770)

11-12-44
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Callback Test for SLT
If required, redefine the service
code used for SLT Callback Test.
SLT
(default = 799)

11-16-05
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Camp-On
If required, redefine the service
code used to set Camp-On.
(default = #)

15-02-11
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Callback Automatic
Answer
Enable (1)/ Disable (0) Callback
Automatic Answer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)
2 - 230
3

Callback
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
15-07-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2
3

20-01-07
System Options – Callback Ring
Duration Time
Set the time of the Callback ring.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 15 seconds)

20-01-09
System Options – Callback/
Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and
Trunk Queuing requests after this
time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 64800
seconds)

Operation
To place a Callback:
1.
Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2.
Dial # or press the Callback key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
3.
Hang up.
4.
Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back.

If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your co-worker uses
their telephone for the first time.

If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you
lift the handset. If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing line appearance to
place the call.
To cancel a Callback:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker and Dial 770.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal, press Camp-On key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 35).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset and dial 770.
Callback
2 - 231
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To test Callback at a single line telephone:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 799.
3.
Hang up.
4.
When the telephone rings, lift the handset.

5.
You hear the Hold tone.
Hang up.
2 - 232
Callback
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Caller ID Call Return
Description
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID information captured with
the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail user that is
checking messages.
Conditions

A caller using a telephone without Softkeys, calling from outside the system, or from a
remote system is prompted to hear Caller ID information and return a call.

Return Call is available for subscriber messages and public messages.

Return Call is accessible to a subscriber during and after message playback.

Return Call is available for new and old messages.

Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in
voice conversation Mode.

On the UM8000 Mail, one minute before disconnecting the original caller, voice mail plays a
warning prompt and immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate dropping
the call.

When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone, and Caller ID
information is unavailable, the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank.
When Caller ID is disabled on the system, voice mail displays the message count.

On the UM8000 Mail, from the subscriber options Softkey menu, a subscriber can access a
Softkey menu that allows selection of name or number to be displayed on the LCD during
message playback. The default is name. Voice mail uses this setting to determine the initial
display on the LCD during playback.

Voice mail continues to display Caller ID on the LCD while the post-message playback
menu is still displayed on a telephone equipped with Softkeys.

On the UM8000 Mail, during return call, the voice mail port is in conference with the box
owner and messages.

When Centralized Voice Mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only Caller ID
number when voice mail answers incoming CO calls and performs an Await-Answer
transfer to the remote user. A Call that forwards to voice mail from the remote system does
not have Caller ID information.

Live Record is not available when using Return Call.
Caller ID Call Return
2 - 233
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

A Telephone used as an ACD Plus agent or supervisor station should not have mailboxes
that support Softkeys. Softkeys can be disabled per mailbox in Access Codes Options by
enabling Hands Free Play for a particular station.

On the UM8000 Mail, the Return Call feature is enabled per mailbox in Subscriber/Access
Options and can be enabled for internal numbers only or for both internal and external
numbers.

To use this feature for long distance calls, ARS must be programmed for the voice mail
ports set to dial out. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for detailed
programming instructions.

On the UM8000 Mail, the Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options
line of System/Switch/Switch Information Screen to enable this voice mail feature. Default
is RCV=6,10 where 6 is the number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call, and 10 is
the number of minutes a retuned call can last.

On the UM8000 Mail, a trunk access code must be entered on the Return call outdial
access code line of System/Switch/Dialing Codes screen so the Return Call feature can
access a trunk to return the call. When this is not entered, the mailbox user is not prompted
to return the call even when Caller ID information is available.

Use Program 14-01-22 Caller ID to Voice Mail to enable or disable per trunk the ability to
send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.

After the call is ended by either party, the voice mail user is disconnected.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
2 - 234

UM8000 Mail

VM8000 InMail
Caller ID Call Return
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Related Features
UM8000 Mail
VM8000 InMail
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-01-22
14-02-10
15-02-04
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID to Voice Mail
Enable/Disable the system ability
to send the Caller ID digits to voice
mail.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)

Analog Trunk Data Setup –
Caller ID
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a trunk to
receive Caller ID information.
Trunks 1~200
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)

Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Redial (Speed Dial)
Control
Control the function of the
extension Redial key when used
with Speed Dialing. The Redial
key can access either the
Common or Group Speed Dialing
numbers.
0 = Common and
Individual Speed
Dialing
1 = Group Speed
Dialing
(default = 0)

Caller ID Call Return
2
3
2 - 235
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To return call from the UM8000 Mail:
1.
While listening to a message with CID information press More, More then Call softkeys.
- OR -
Dial #, 0.
2.
To exit from the call, hang up.
To return call from the VM8000 InMail:
1.
While listening to a message with CID information press More, More then Call softkeys.
- OR -
Dial 6, 2 (MC).
2.
To exit from the call, hang up.

If you hear “Your call cannot go through,” your system Caller ID is not properly set up. You will be returned to the
listen mode for the message you were listening to when you tried the Make Call.
2 - 236
Caller ID Call Return
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Caller ID
Enhancements
Pressing the Left Cursor Key twice (on equipped terminals) displays the Incoming Call History
(Version 3000 or higher software).
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) software, calls to a busy extension or busy tones returned to the
caller are logged in the Caller ID List. When a busy call is logged, the Caller ID List key flashes the
same as it does with a new missed call.
Memo Display Function
With Version 4000 or lower software, the SV8100 can display matching Caller ID but is limited to 12
characters. With Version 5000 or higher software, it can display up to 28 Characters per line and up
to three lines of information for a total of 84 characters (Maximum 28 digits x 3 lines). If needed, the
system can be set to use any one of three available display lines. Additionally, the original CID
information can be seen while on the call by pressing the right cursor button on the phone. The Memo
Display Function requires Version 5000 or higher software and the Version 5000 Enhancement
license.
Description
Caller ID allows a display terminal to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the Directory
Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as pre-answer display. With
the pre-answer display, the user previews the caller’s number before picking up the ringing line.

On the CD-CP00-US for Caller ID (also used for DTMF receivers and Call Progress Tone Detection) 32 resources are
available. The PZ-BS10 provides an additional 64 resources.
Second Call Display
While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom call.
For incoming trunk calls, the display shows the Caller ID or ANI data or the trunk name if Caller ID or ANI
are not installed. (Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) on page 2-1561 for more
information on ANI compatibility.) For incoming Intercom calls, the display shows the calling extension
name.
Caller ID supports the Telco Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND)
service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the
first and second ring burst of an incoming call. Two types of Caller ID message formats are currently
available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the
Telco sends only the caller’s telephone number (DN). The DN has seven or 10 digits. In Multiple
Message Format, the Telco sends the DN and the caller’s name. The DN for this format also has seven
or 10 digits, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.
Caller ID
2 - 237
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The telephone display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-ACD calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all trunk calls, including:

Ring Group calls

Calls transferred from another extension

Calls transferred from the VRS

Calls transferred from Voice Mail (unscreened)

Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 50 calls (total of abandoned and answered/unanswered). New calls replace
old calls when the buffer fills.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, to indicate a
new call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
This Caller ID data from the temporary memory can be saved in either Speed Dial bins or in One-Touch
keys making them available for placing future calls.
Cursor Key Operation
By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus. The
flow chart below shows the menu access sequence. If the terminal is not allowed to have the Dial
Preview feature, these menus cannot be accessed.
Figure 2-1 Left Cursor Key Operation Flow Chart
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call DN in
the DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).
2 - 238
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through the 1st-Party TAPI driver. This
allows for off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer could
search for a caller’s records and display their account status even before a customer service
representative picked up the telephone.
Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail
A Caller ID/ANI trunk can send Remote Log-On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail. When a
trunk 001 receives the Caller ID as 12345, the protocol becomes 6000112345.
Display Reason for No Caller ID Information
With Caller ID enabled, the system provides information for analog calls that do not detect the Caller ID
information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display shows PRIVATE. If the
system cannot provide Caller ID information because Telco information is not detected, the display
shows NO CALLER INFO.
Calling Party Number Information
When using the Wireless DECT (SIP) telephone, the system can provide the Caller ID information for an
external call if it is provided by the Telco.
Option to Enable Caller ID Name for SLT
System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Caller ID.
Add Trunk Access Code to Caller ID with Wireless DECT (SIP) – Phones
UNIVERGE SV8100 SIP DECT Phones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 can hold incoming call history. This
history is created based on the Caller ID information element contained in the call Setup message which
is transmitted from the UNIVERGE SV8100. This information allows users to return calls dialing the
number stored.
The stored number, however, does not contain the trunk access code. Without this code, the system
may not be able to seize an outside line to complete the call.
With this feature, when an Wireless DECT (SIP) user receives an incoming trunk call, the trunk access
code defined in programming can be added to the Caller ID. This allows the system to seize an outside
line and then dial the stored number.

This function is applied only to incoming ISDN calls. It does not apply to incoming extension calls.

Caller ID must be available for this feature to work.

The maximum number of Caller ID digits is 20. If the total number of digits [trunk access code
(Program 10-02-05) and Caller ID] is over 20, the remaining Caller ID digits are not dialed.
For example:
Trunk Access Code (Program 10-02-05): 123456# (eight digits)
Incoming Caller ID: 12345678901234567890 (20 digits)
UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless Dials: 123456#123456789012
Caller ID
2 - 239
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
An additional digit (such as 1) may be required to complete the call (Program 10-02-04).
For example:
Incoming Caller ID shows: 2125551212.
If your area code is NOT 212, define a 1 in Program 10-02-04. When callback is executed, the
system prefixes 1 on the digits dialed string.
Caller ID Sender Queuing Added
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system can provide Caller ID (calling party number) to a single line telephone
with a display.
The system can queue incoming calls to the single line telephone if the system Caller ID sender
resources are busy. Refer to Program 20-19-05 in the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual.
If the single line telephone user lifts their handset while an incoming call is waiting in queue, they hear
silence (no dial tone) and cannot dial out. When the single line telephone user goes back on-hook, the
system immediately sends the queued call to the single line telephone without Caller ID.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type for Single Line Telephone
An option (Program 15-03-11) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select either FSK or
DTMF as the Caller ID type to be received by a single line telephone.
Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type from Analog Trunk
An option (Program 14-02-16) is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select the type of Caller
ID signal from an analog trunk – FSK or DTMF.
Conditions
2 - 240

To have pre-answer Caller ID from the voice mail, the call must be an unscreened transfer.

Caller ID is provided by the CD-CP00-US. The PZ-BS10 blade, which plugs into the
chassis, can provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed.

Caller ID Name can display up to 12 characters.

Caller ID Number can display up to 11 characters.

A Caller ID Number with more than 12 digits follows Program 20-19-01 (first 10 or the last
10 digits).

Caller ID information can be stored in Speed Dialing or One-Touch bins.

Caller ID can be displayed for incoming calls and transferred calls.

ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information call-by-call. To do this, insert the Caller ID
block code (e.g., .67) in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

Trunks with Privacy Release enabled display Caller ID until the call is answered. To view it
after the call has been picked up, press the line key, which sets the call to private mode. To
keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.

An extension user can display the Caller ID information for a call in Park if Automatic
Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (Preselect).

An extension user can display the Caller ID information for multiple incoming calls without
answering the call by pressing the line key if Automatic Handsfree in Program 15-02-08 is
set to 0 (Pre-select).

Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.

ANI/DNIS can use the Caller ID tables for routing. Refer to T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS
Compatibility) on page 2-1561 for more information.

The system can send Caller ID digits to the voice mail if allowed in Program 14-02-10.

When more than 20 characters are set in Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller
ID Data, either the first or last character is missing (based on the entry in Program
20-19-01).

If Program 20-09-06: Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service): Incoming Time
Display is set to 1 (On), the first line displays the time and date.

When you shut down the system, incoming history data is cleared. But you can back up the
history data by pressing Speaker + #  # 9.

Program 15-07-01 button (63) when enabled, removes the CPN from the setup message
when making an outbound ISDN call, this is a toggle enable/disable button and can be
used on a Call-by-Call basis. Programs 14-01-20, 14-01-21 and 20-08-15 are used for
copper trunks only and can be set only per trunk/Class of Service.

SLT users cannot block an incoming call based on the incoming Caller ID information on a
station-by-station basis.

The CD-CP00-US has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection. When a
is PZ-BS10 installed there are 64 resources available.

When Program 10-09-01 is set to 0 (Common) and Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 1
(Yes), all DTMF/Dial Tone Detection resources are always allocated to analog trunks, not
analog extensions. However, if Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to 0 (No), all DTMF/Dial
Tone Detection resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions.

For the Caller ID List to show calls to a station that received a busy tone, Program 15-02-57
must be set to 1 (On).

When Program 15-02-57 is set to 1 (On) and Program 15-02-34 is set to 0 (Trunk), only
outside calls are shown in the Caller ID List.
Caller ID
2 - 241
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Memo Display Function
With Version 4000 or lower software, the SV8100 can display matching Caller ID but is limited to 12
characters. With Version 5000 or higher software, it can now display up to 28 Characters per line and
up to three lines of information for a total of 84 characters (Maximum 28 digits x 3 lines). If needed, the
system can be set to use any one of three available display lines. Additionally, the original CID
information can be seen while on the call by pressing the right cursor button on the phone.
Conditions

The Memo Display Function requires Version 5000 or higher software and the Version
5000 Enhancement license.

In a CCIS network the Memo Display Function is only supported for DID calls directed
across CCIS to a remote system.

Calls forwarded or transferred across CCIS do not support the Memo Display Function.

Memo information cannot be programmed via telephone programming or service access
code, only via Web Pro and PC Pro.

The Memo Display function is only supported on Multiline terminals.

The Memo Display function is only supported for incoming trunk calls with Caller ID
information.

The destination station must be idle for the Memo Display function to work.

The Memo Display function will only search the Common Speed Dial bins, it will not search
Group or Station speed dial bins.

Find the abbreviation area the side of incoming system when trunk incoming via
networking.

When calls are directed to a virtual extension, the virtual extension must be set to ring for
the Memo Display function to work.

Pressing the right Cursor key on the telephone toggles the display between the actual
incoming Caller ID information and the Memo Display settings for that incoming Caller ID
information.

When a call is on hold, pressing the Feature Key and the line key the call resides on
displays the actual incoming Caller ID information.
Default Setting
Disabled
2 - 242
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display and Single Line Telephones equipped to receive Caller ID.
Required Component(s)

CD-4COTB with PZ-4COTF Daughter Board

CD-2BRIA with PZ-2BRIA Daughter Board

CD-PRTA
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Caller ID Call Return
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Dterm Cordless II/Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephones
Park
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Station Message Detail Recording
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
VM8000 InMail
Caller ID
2 - 243
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
10-02-04
Location Setup – Area Code
Enter the local area code.
(default not assigned)

10-02-05
Location Setup – Trunk Access
Code
Enter the trunk access code digits
required to place an outgoing call.
Dial up to eight digits
0~9, , #
(default not assigned)

10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Allocate the circuits (1~16 or
1~64) on the CD-CP00-US for
either DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection.
 The CD-CP00-US has 32
resources for DTMF
receiving and Dial Tone
detection. When a PZ-BS10
is installed there are 64
resources available.
 When Program 10-09-01 is
set to 0 (Common) and
Program 14-02-10 (Caller ID)
is set to 1 (Yes), all DTMF/
Dial Tone Detection
resources are always
allocated to analog trunks,
not analog extensions.
However, if Program
14-02-10 (Caller ID) is set to
0 (No), all DTMF/Dial Tone
Detection resources can be
used for both analog trunks
and analog extensions.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available.
This service code is used to back
up the programmed data on the
SRAM and Call History to the
Flash ROM.
While saving the database, it may
cause system lock up.
MLT
##9
11-15-03
2 - 244
Service Code Setup,
Administrative (for Special
Access) – Backup Data Save
3


Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Enable/Disable the system from
automatically blocking outgoing
Caller ID information when a user
places a call.If allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code (defined in 14-01-21)
before the user dialed digits.
If prevented (i.e., block disabled),
the system outdials the call just as
it was dialed by the user.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Enter the code, up to eight digits,
that should be used as the Caller
ID Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before
dialed digits if Program 14-01-20
is set to ‘1’.
Trunks 1~200
Dial (up to eight digits)
67
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID to Voice Mail
Enable/Disable the system ability
to send the Caller ID digits to voice
mail.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Analog Trunk Data Setup –
Caller ID
Enable (1) or Disable (0) a trunk to
receive Caller ID information.
Trunks 1~200
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Set whether pressing a key
accesses a One-Touch Key (1) or
preselects the key (0).
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
(default = 1)
15-02-15
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Storage of Caller ID for
Answered Call
Enable (1) or Disable (0) ability of
extension to store Caller ID for
answered calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
15-02-40
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Additional Dial for Caller
ID Call Return
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using Caller
ID Call Return.
Up to four digits
(0, 1~9, #, )
(default not assigned)

15-02-57
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Caller Log on Busy
When a call to a station returns
busy to the caller, turn On or Off if
the call should be logged in the
Call history log as a busy call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)

14-01-20
14-01-21
14-01-22
14-02-10
15-02-08
Caller ID
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID Block Code
3






2 - 245
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-03-09
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Caller ID Function –
For External Module
Enable/Disable the Caller ID FSK
signal for an external Caller ID
module or a 3rd-Party vendor
telephone with Caller ID display.
If voice mail is used, this setting
must be disabled or the system
integration codes for disconnect
are incorrect. For Caller ID Sender
Queuing, set this option to “1”.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
2
3

15-03-10
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Caller ID Name
Determine whether or not a single
line telephone should display the
Caller ID name.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)


00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – LCD Display
Holding Time
Determine the time a user display
shows Caller ID for a second
incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-08-15
20-09-02
2 - 246
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Turns Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)


Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-04
20-13-06
20-19-01
20-19-05
20-20-01
20-20-02
20-20-03
Caller ID
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

System Options for Caller ID –
Caller ID Displaying Format (If
displaying digits are more than
12 digits)
Determine whether the first 10
digits or last 10 digits should be
displayed when Caller ID exceeds
12 digits.
0 = First 10 digits
(Upper)
1 = Last 10 digits
(Lower)
(default = 0)

System ID Options for Caller ID –
Caller ID Sender Queuing Time
(Sender Wait)
With the Caller ID Sender Queuing
option, determine the time an
incoming call waits in queue for a
DSP resource to become
available. If a resource becomes
available during this time, the call
immediately rings the single line
telephone with Caller ID. If the
time expires before a resource
becomes available, the system
rings the single line telephone
without Caller ID (until the queuing
time expires, the single line
telephone does not ring). If the
queuing timer is set to 0, the
system does not queue the
incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Private Call
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as a private
call.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = PRIVATE)

Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Call from Out of Service
Area
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as an
out-of-service area call.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = OUT OF
AREA)

Message Setup for Non-Caller ID
Data – Call Information with
Error
Enter the text to be displayed for
Caller ID when a user receives a
call which is classified as a call
with a CID error.
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
(default = NO CALLER
INFO)

3

2 - 247
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
90-03-01
90-04-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Save Data
Load Data
Save the programmed data on the
SRAM and Flash ROM to the
16MB/32MB ATA removable
Compact Flash memory card.
Also, used to save stored Caller ID
if permanently saved with service
code #*#9 (11-15-03).
Dial 1 + press Transfer
(Press Transfer to
cancel.)
Load the system data from the
inserted Compact Flash Memory
to the SRAM and Flash ROM in
the system.
Also, used to load stored Caller ID.
Dial 1 + press Transfer
(Press Transfer to
cancel.)
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
2
3


Memo Display Function:
Program
Number
13-01-03
13-04-01
13-04-08
13-04-09
13-04-10
2 - 248
Level
Program Name
1
Speed Dialing Option Setup –
Number of Common Speed
Dialing Bins
Designate the bins the system
uses for System Speed Dialing.
0~2000
0 = No Common
Speed Dialing
(default = 1000)
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the System and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and
names.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key
1)
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)
2
3


Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Memo Display 1
This can only be set using Web
Pro or PC Pro and determines
what will be displayed on line 1 of
the multiline telephone when
Program 15-02-58 is set to memo.
Maximum of 28
characters
(default not assigned)
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Memo Display 2
This can only be set using Web
Pro or PC Pro and determines
what will be displayed on line 2 of
the multiline telephone when
Program 15-02-58 is set to memo.
Maximum of 28
characters
(default not assigned)

Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Memo Display 3
This can only be set using Web
Pro or PC Pro and determines
what will be displayed on line 3 of
the multiline telephone when
Program 15-02-58 is set to memo.
Maximum of 28
characters
(default not assigned)


Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
15-02-58
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Mode of
Incoming Trunk
Determines if the incoming CID or
the Memo 1/2/3 setting will be
displayed for a matching CID
number.
2
3
0 = CID
1 = Memo Information
(default = 0)

Operation
Storing a Number:
To store a Caller ID number in an Speed Dial bin:
1.
With a multiline terminal idle, the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301
STA 301
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 3. The display shows:
LIST MENU
Redial CID
3.
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##:


xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store
DEL
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
 = Preview List
 = Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
Caller ID
2 - 249
Issue 12.0
4.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS - Store in System Speed Dial bin.
5.
Press the STA or SYS Softkey. The display shows:
Store to SYS: COMMON
ENTER BIN
6.
Dial the Speed Dial bin in which the number is to be stored. If you press Hold, the next available
Speed Dial bin is used. The display shows:
SYS XXXX:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx

7.
If all Speed Dial bins are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
Press HOLD. The display shows:
SYS XXXX
-
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number.
Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit . . .
1
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2 - 250
Æ ¨
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names (Continued)
Use this keypad digit . . .
0
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
0

9.
#
“
$
%
&
’
(
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü

Enter characters:

#
!
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
? B E

S
¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed
- ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use
the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
HOLD
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Press Transfer. The display shows:
SET SYS
10.
Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to idle.
To store a Caller ID number in a One-Touch key:
1.
With a telephone idle, the display shows:
1-01 FRI 09:00AM
301
STA 301
LIST DIR ICM PROG
2.
Press the LIST Softkey.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 3. The display shows:
LISTlMENU
Redial CID
Caller ID
2 - 251
Issue 12.0
3.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press the CID Softkey (Caller ID). The display shows:
##:

xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
Store
DEL

## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
 = Preview List
 = Next List
Store = Store in List
DEL = Delete from List
4.
Press the STORE Softkey. The display shows:
##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
mm-dd hh:mm
STA SYS
## = List Number
xx = Caller ID number
mm-dd hh:mm = incoming date and time
STA = Store in Station Speed Dial bin.
SYS = Store in System Speed Dial bin.
5.
Press the STA Softkey. The display shows:
Store to ONE-TOUCH
ENTER BIN
6.
Press the One-Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1~9, 0. If you press Hold, the
next available One-Touch key is used. The display shows:
Key ##:
xxxxxxxxxxxxx

7.
If all One-Touch keys are used, the display shows TABLE IS FULL.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY ##
-
8.
Enter the name to be associated with the stored number. Refer to Table 2-8 Keys for Entering
Names on page 2-250.
2 - 252
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.
Press Hold. The display shows:
KEY PROG
10.
Issue 12.0
ONE TOUCH
Press Speaker.

The telephone returns to idle.
Temporary Memory
An unanswered call causes the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08) to flash, indicating a new
call was placed in the temporary memory. If enabled in programming, the telephone display shows
CHECK LIST.
1.
Press the Call History key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 08), press the LIST Softkey and CID.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice.

The last addition to the list is displayed.
2.
Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory.
3.
Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry.
4.
The Call History key remains on as long as entries remain in memory.
5.
To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list, with the number to be dialed
displayed, press a line key or Speaker. (Refer to Table 2-8 Keys for Entering Names on page
2-250.)

The outgoing call is placed.
To display Caller ID for a call in Park:

Program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (preselect) for this feature.
1.
With Program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in park, press the PARK key. (Program 15-07
or SC 752: 04.
With Program 15-02-08 set to 1 (One-Touch) and a call in park, press RECALL then the PARK key
(Program 15-07 or SC 752 04).
Checking your Answered/Unanswered Caller ID Calls:
To review the last 50 outside calls your extension received:
1.
At a display multiline terminal, press the LIST Softkey.
- OR -
Press the Left Cursor Key twice and skip step 2.
Caller ID
2 - 253
Issue 12.0
2.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Press CID.

The first row of your display shows the Caller ID number. If there is an “” next to the call record number in the
left-hand corner, this indicates that it is a call you missed (unanswered). The second row shows the date and time
of the call.

Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer.
3.
If the Caller ID includes a name, you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller.
4.
To call the displayed number, press a line/Call Appearance (CAP) Key.
- OR -
To erase the displayed number without returning the call, press the DEL Softkey.
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 254
Caller ID
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Enhancements
Flexible Ringing by Caller ID feature added with Version 3000 or higher software.
With Version 8000 or higher software, the number of Tone Patterns has increased from four to
eight.
Description
The Caller ID – Flexible Ringing feature provides several different options for rerouting calls based on
the Caller ID received.
Reject/Reroute “Private” Caller ID Calls
When an analog or ISDN trunk call is received with “Private” Caller ID information, the SV8100 can
reject the call by playing a VRS message or it can route the call to an alternative extension or incoming
ring group programmed in Program 22-18-01.
Reject/Reroute Based on Entry in SPD Table
When an analog, ISDN or IP trunk call is received with regular Caller ID information, the SV8100 can
reject the call by playing a VRS message if the Caller ID number matches the Speed Dial group number
programmed in Program 22-16-01 and Speed Dial entry in Programs 13-02-01 and 13-04-01. The
analog, ISDN or IP trunk call can also be routed to an alternative extension or incoming ring group if the
Caller ID number matches the common or group Speed Dial table (Program 13-04).
This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per-trunk basis.
Programming Examples for Flexible Ringing by Caller ID:

To refuse the “Private” Caller ID incoming call:
Program 14-01-27: 1 (reject)
Program 20-07-24: 1 (Enable for COS)
Program 22-18-01: 0 (no transfer)
Program 40-10-06: 2 (VRS message 2)
then,
Turn on the Private Call Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-32) or Programmable
Function Key (code 86).
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
2 - 255
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
To transfer the “Private” Caller ID incoming call to extension 301 as ring pattern 2:
Program 14-01-27: 1 (reject)
Program 22-18-01: 1 (extension number)
Program 22-18-02: 301 (extension 301)
Program 22-18-03: 2 (ring pattern 2)
then,
Turn on the Private Call Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-32) or Programmable
Function Key (code 86).

To transfer the “Private” Caller ID incoming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring pattern 3:
Program 14-01-27: 1 (reject)
Program 22-18-01: 2 (incoming ring group)
Program 22-18-02: 2 (group 2)
Program 22-18-03: 3 (ring pattern 3)
then,
Turn on the Private Call Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-32) or Programmable
Function Key (code 86).

To reject the call with “2142622000” Caller ID incoming call:
Program 14-01-27: 1 (reject)
Program 20-07-25: 1 (Enable for COS)
Program 22-16: 64 (Speed Dial group 64)
Program 13-02; Group 64: 1000 - 1099
Program 13-04-01; Table 1000: 2142622000
then,
Turn on the Caller ID Refuse mode using the service code (Program 11-10-34) or Programmable
Function Key (code 87).

To transfer the call with “2142622000” Caller ID incoming call to extension 301 as ring pattern 1:
Program 13-04-01: 2142622000
Program 13-04-03: 1 (extension number)
Program 13-04-04: 301 (extension 301)
Program 13-04-05: 1 (tone pattern 1)

To transfer the call with “2142622000” Caller ID incoming call to incoming ring group 2 as ring
pattern 2:
Program 13-04-01: 2142622000
Program 13-04-03: 2 (incoming ring group)
Program 13-04-04: 2 (group 2)
Program 13-04-05: 2 (tone pattern 2)
2 - 256
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Conditions

Caller ID Matching.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 compares the Caller ID and programmed Speed Dial and allows/
denies as indicated below.

The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result is
used.

The maximum number of VRS message channels that can be used simultaneously is 16.
These channels are also shared with the voice mail.

This feature does not work with incoming trunk calls via networking (from another system).
In this case, the refuse/routing program must be programmed in the system that has those
trunks. Routing to the other system’s extension is available.

When Program 13-04 is used; it will override the setting in Program 22-02-01: Incoming
Call Trunk Setup.

Program 13-04 will follow Common or Group Speed Dial numbers.

With Version 8000 or higher software, the number of Tone Patterns increased from four to
eight. After setting new system data (Tone Patterns 5 - 8), downgrading to Version 7000 or
lower may cause incoming rings to not function properly.
Caller ID Matching Rule:
The system compares the Caller ID and programmed Speed Dial with these rules below.
Table 2-9 Caller ID Matching Rule
Caller ID
Speed Dial
Result
2142622000
2142622000
Matched
2142622000
21426220009
Matched
2142622000
214
Matched
2622000
2142622000
Unmatched
2142622000
2622000
Unmatched

The Speed Dial table is searched from the starting number and the first match result is used.
Default Setting
None
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
2 - 257
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
SV8100 main software Version 3000 or higher
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UM8000 Mail
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-10-32
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Set Private Call
Refuse
Enable/Disable the Private Call
Refuse (trunks) which are set in
Program 14-01-27.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-10-33
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Entry Caller ID
Refuse
Add/Delete the Caller ID to refuse.
 This operation must be
performed from a Keyset.
MLT
(default not assigned)
2 - 258
2
3


Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-10-34
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Set Caller ID
Refuse
Enable/Disable the Caller ID
number (trunks) which are set in
Program 14-01-27.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)

13-02-01
Group Speed Dialing Bins
Designate the starting bin number
the system uses for Group Speed
Dialing.
01~64
(default not assigned)

13-04-01
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Speed Dialing Data
Enter the System and Group
Speed Dialing numbers and
names.
1~9, 0, , #
Pause (Press line key
1)
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2)
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(maximum 24 digits)
(default not assigned)

13-04-03
13-04-04
13-04-05
Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Transfer Mode
When the incoming caller ID
matches the number programmed
in the speed dial bin, this setting
determines the destination of the
call.
0 = Not Used
1 = Internal Dial
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (IRG)
(default = 0)

Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Transfer Destination Number
When the incoming caller ID
matches the number programmed
in the speed dial bin, this setting
determines the destination of the
call.
If Transfer mode is
(Refer to 13-04-03):
1 = Internal Dial Mode
1~9, 0, , #, P, R, @
(Maximum 24
Characters)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0~100 (IRG Number)
P=Pause R=Recall
@= Additional Digits
when using ISDN
functionality
(default not assigned)

Speed Dialing Number and Name
– Incoming Ring Pattern
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Define the ring tone for the caller
ID routed call.
Incoming Ring Pattern
0 = Normal Pattern
1~4 = Tone Pattern
(1~4)
5~9 = Scale Pattern
(1~5)
10~13 = Tone Patterns
(5~8)
(default = 0)
2
3

2 - 259
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-01-27
15-07-01
20-07-24
20-07-25
40-10-06
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller
ID Refuse Setup
Programmable Function Keys
Define if the trunk will reject the
call by playing the VRS message
based on the Caller ID
information.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Internal Dial
2 = Enable (Yes)
Assign function key 86 (Set
Private Call Refuse) to Enable/
Disable trunks which are set in
Program 14-01-27 to “1”.
Assign function key 87 (Set Caller
ID Refuse) to Enable/Disable the
Caller ID Refusal (trunks) which is
set in Program 14-01-27 to “1”.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
2
3

(default = 0)


00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an
extension user ability to set or
cancel Private Call Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Voice Announcement Service
Option – Set VRS Message for
Private Call Refuse (VRS Msg
Private Call)
Assign the VRS Message number
used as Private Call Refuse.
When Fixed message is set, VRS
message guidance is: Service
finished. Disconnect the line,
please.
0~101
(0 = No message)
(101 = Fixed message)
(default = 0)

The Caller ID – Flexible Ringing Flowchart below helps define programming:
2 - 260
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Incoming Trunk Call
Caller ID Number
exists?
2
No
Yes
Go to Chart 2
Search refusing
Speed Dial area PRG 22-16
data exists?
Yes
No
Off
PRG 14-01-27: 1
And refuse mode is?
On
Play VRS Message
PRG 40-10-07
Search PRG 13-04-01
Data unmatched
Data matched
0
PRG 13-04-03
Disconnect the call
2
1
Follow PRG 22-02-01
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Ring the extension
number
Ring the incoming
ring group
2 - 261
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
2
PRG 14-01-27: 1
And refuse mode is?
Off
On
Reason of No
Caller ID?
Anything Else
Private
1
PRG 22-18-01
2
0
Play VRS Message
PRG 40-10-07
Ring the extension
number
Disconnect the call
Ring the incoming
ring group
Follow PRG 22-02-01
Operation
None
2 - 262
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Central Office Calls, Answering
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page automatically displays
for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and ITL-320C-1 terminals.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the Side Tone Auto Setup feature has been added.
Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements.
This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. A maximum of 200
trunks are available. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to Ring Groups on page
2-1271.
Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its
original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non-DIL
trunks). This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss does not answer the call,
it rings the secretary’s telephone after a programmable interval.
Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any multiline terminal and dialing a
unique Universal Answer code. The employee does not have to know the trunk number or dial any other
codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night
Answer (refer to Night Service on page 2-1133). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External
Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone. You might also want to use
Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing
is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call
from a shop telephone.
The Automatic Off-Hook Answer of Universal Answer Call options (Program 20-10-07) determines
whether or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to
lift the handset to answer a ringing call; dialing the service code is unnecessary.
Additional Trunk Ring Tones
Various ring tone patterns and melodies for incoming calls are available (Program 22-03-11); Ring Tone
Patterns 1~4 and Melodies 1~5.
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 263
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Sidetone Volume Setup
This option allows system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Side Tone Auto Setup
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable Codec Filter setting for Program 81-07 and
Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90-68-01 and 90-68-02.
During the trunk measurement process, the following LCD indications are provided:

During measurement: Measurement (x/4)
x = number of measurements

Measure complete: Complete
Error condition: Error
Trunk busy: Busy
After successful measurement, the option to copy the same settings to all analog trunks is shown.

Side Tone Auto Setup available when the system is in an idle condition.
Conditions
2 - 264

The incoming ring group assignment programmed in Program 41-03-01 overrides the
setting in Program 22-05-01.

Ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming.

An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.

Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing
calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.

Line keys and Call Appearance (CAP) Keys simplify answering outside calls.

If the Absent text message was set by the originating extension, the destination extension
displays the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message.

If an extension is assigned to a Trunk Access Map that has no access for a trunk, the
extension can still retrieve parked calls on that trunk. The extension can also Group Call
Pickup and Direct Call Pickup calls ringing another extension on that trunk.

In Version 3000 or higher software the system can be programmed to blink the page
number of a DT300/DT700 DESI-Less terminal when it receives an incoming call, or switch
to the page the incoming call is on. Furthermore, a default page can be defined for the
DESI-Less terminal to change to when it goes idle or when it has answered a call.
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

DT300/DT700 terminals installed in a SV8100 with the IPK/IPK II Migration system do not
support the DESI-Less page switching and blinking.

DESI-Less screen page switching only applies to idle terminals. If a terminal is not idle, the
screen will not switch if another call comes in until the phone goes idle.

To adjust for proper audio quality, refer to Programs 81-07 and 81-17.

For any incoming call (internal or external), only one MH240 wireless handset can be
assigned to ring for the incoming call.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., CD-4COTB, CD-2BRIA, CD-PRTA, etc.)
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Call Forwarding
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Directed Call Pickup
Do Not Disturb
Group Call Pickup
Central Office Calls, Answering
2 - 265
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
ISDN Compatibility
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Night Service
Programmable Function Keys
Selectable Display Messaging
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-XX
11-11-13
11-12-30
2 - 266
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Use program 10-03-XX to setup
and confirm the basic
configuration data for each blade.
This program represents different
data depending on the blade
installed in the slot. Please refer
the SV8100 Programming Manual
for a more detailed description of
this program.
The assigned data
varies depending on
the blade installed in
the slot. Please refer
to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for a more detailed
description of the
10-03-XX programs.
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
Select the service code which can
be used at an extension to change
the displayed language on a
multiline terminal display.
MLT
(default = 678)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Answer
If required, redefine the service
code used to answer a specific
trunk which is either ringing or on
hold.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
ETU Setup
2
3



Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-01-02
14-01-03
14-02-02
14-05-01
14-06-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

Analog Trunk Data Setup – Ring
Detect Type
Set Extended Ring Detect or
Immediate Ring Detect for the
trunk. For T1 loop/ground start
trunks, this option must be set to 1
for the trunks to ring and light
correctly.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal/delayed
1 = Immediate Ringing
(default = 1)
Assign trunks to trunk groups then
go to Program 14-06-01 below to
set up Trunk Group Routing.
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Groups 1-100
Default = Trunks 1-200
assigned to trunk
group 1 with priorities
equal to the trunk
number.
Trunk 1 = Priority 1
Trunk 200 = Priority
200.

0 = Not Specify
1~100 : (Trunk Group
Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 +
Route Table Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order
Number 1 = 1 (Trunk
Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4
= 0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0
(Not Specified).

Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Central Office Calls, Answering
Set the priority order number 1~4.
3

2 - 267
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-07-01
15-01-05
2 - 268
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Basic Extension Data Setup –
Restriction for Outgoing Disable
on Incoming Line
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks. Ring Group programming
overrides Access Map
programming.
Enable (1)/Disable (0) supervised
dial detection for an extension.
2
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold).

0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 0)

3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-02-01
15-02-02
15-02-22
15-03-03
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Trunk Ring Tone
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Multiple Incoming From
Intercom and Trunk
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Central Office Calls, Answering
Define the display language for
multiline terminals. (To select
options 8~10, press either 8 or
Recall, then press line keys 1~3.
Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 is option
9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
Set the tone (pitch) of the
incoming trunk ring for the
extension port you are
programming.
2
0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)

1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 2)

When this option is disabled,
incoming calls to an extension
indicate on any Hotline key for that
extension as solid (busy). When
this option is enabled, lighting is
determined by the setting of
Program 22-01-01 Incoming Call
Priority. If set to trunk priority (1),
the Hotline key lights solid when a
trunk call rings in. If set to intercom
priority (0), the Hotline key does
not light for incoming trunk calls,
but lights solid for intercom calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF
tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
3


2 - 269
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
15-25-01
15-25-02
15-25-03
15-25-04
2


DESI-less Page Setup –
Incoming Call Notify Event
Enable/Disable the ability of a
DESI-Less terminal to blink the
page number that has an incoming
call on one of the keys.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

DESI-less Page Setup –
Incoming Call Automatic Screen
Switching
Enable/Disable the ability of a
DESI-Less terminal to switch to
the page that has an incoming call
on one of the keys.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

DESI-less Page Setup – Idle
Automatic Screen Switching
Define or Disable the page to be
automatically displayed when a
DESI-Less terminal becomes idle.
0 = Disable
1 = Display page 1
2 = Display page 2
3 = Display page 3
4 = Display page 4
(default = 0)

Define or Disable the page to be
automatically displayed when a
DESI-Less terminal answers a
call.
0 = Disable
1 = Display page 1
2 = Display page 2
3 = Display page 3
4 = Display page 4
(default = 0)

DESI-less Page Setup – Answer
Automatic Screen Switching
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Disconnect
Supervision
Enable/Disable disconnect
supervision for the system trunks.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

20-02-15
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Caller ID Display
Mode
Define the Caller ID display mode
for multiline terminals.
0 = Name and Number
(Both)
1 = Name
2 = Number
(default = 0)

Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-06-01
2 - 270
3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Universal Auto
Answer (no service code
required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable/Disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)

21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone
is not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Incoming Call Priority
Determine if Intercom calls or
trunk calls have answer priority
when both are ringing
simultaneously.
0 = Intercom call
priority
1 = Trunk call priority
(default = 1)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Incoming Call Ring No
Answer Alarm
Enable/Disable the Incoming Call
RNA Alarm. If enabled, the ring
cadence changes for a call that
rings longer than the interval set in
Program 22-01-03.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – Ring No Answer Alarm
Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm
time. If a trunk rings a multiline
terminal longer than this time, the
system changes the ring cadence.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this
interval diverts to the DIL No
Answer Ring Group (set in
Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
20-10-07
20-13-13
20-13-23
21-01-17
22-01-01
22-01-02
22-01-03
22-01-04
Central Office Calls, Answering
3






2 - 271
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-03-01
22-04-01
22-05-01
22-06-01
2 - 272
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Trunk Ring Tone Range – Ring
Tone Pattern
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Incoming Trunk Ring Group
Assignment
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Set the feature type for the trunk
you are programming.
2
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)

Assign Ring Tone Ranges to
trunks. Trunks ring extensions
according to the Ring Tone Range
selected in Program 22-03-0 and
the settings made with either
Service Code 720 or Program
15-02-02.
0~12
(Ring Tone Pattern
1~4)
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
(Ring Tone Pattern
5~8)
(default = 0)

Assign extensions to ring groups.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.

To have the trunks ring
extensions, assign trunks to a
Ring Group. The incoming ring
group assignment programmed in
Program 41-03-01 overrides the
setting in this program.
Incoming Group
Number for Day/Night
Mode (1~8):
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Group)
102 (In-Skin/ External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)

Indicate whether the trunks in the
Ring Group assigned in Program
22-04-01 should ring or not ring.
0 = No Ring
1 = Ring
(default = 1)

3
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
22-07-01
22-08-01
23-03-01
82-08-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DIL Assignment
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Sidetone Volume Setup
Central Office Calls, Answering
Assign the destination extension
for each DIL incoming trunk
(001~200).
 For this selection to work, set
Program 22-02-01 to 4 (DIL).
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
If an incoming trunk call rings
longer than the DIL No Answer
Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes
to the destination you specify in
this option. Determine if the
destination should be a Ring
Group, In-Skin/External Voice
Mail, or Central Voice Mail.
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
Use this program to let an
extension user automatically
answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions. When the user lifts the
handset, they automatically
answer the ringing calls based on
Trunk Group Routing
programming (defined in Program
14-06).
Maximum eight digits
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Route Table Number
0~100
(default = 0)
Adjust of the multiline terminal
side tone volume. There are two
levels, based on whether the
connected trunk is a digital trunk
or analog trunk.
Input (0~9)
Digital Sidetone Level
(second column)
Analog Sidetone Level
(third column)
0 -54 (dB) -54 (dB)
1 -48 (dB) -54 (dB)
2 -42 (dB) -54 (dB)
3 -36 (dB) -48 (dB)
4 -30 (dB) -42 (dB)
5 -24 (dB) -36 (dB)
6 -18 (dB) -30 (dB)
7 -12 (dB) -24 (dB)
8 -12 (dB) -18 (dB)
9 -12 (dB) -12 (dB)
2
3




2 - 273
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
1.
Lift the handset.
To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1.
Go off-hook.

2.
Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.
Dial #0.

If you hear error tone, your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.
To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 711 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8) and tone range (1~4) you want to check.
4.
Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
To change the ringing of your incoming trunk:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 720 + 2.
3.
Select the ringing (1~8).
4.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 274
Central Office Calls, Answering
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Central Office Calls, Placing
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software, the Side Tone Auto Setup feature has been added.
Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets
you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual’s needs. To place
a call the user can:

Press Line Keys

Press a Trunk Group Key

Press a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) Key

Dial a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunk number)

Dial a code for a Trunk Group (704 + group number)

Dial a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)

Dial an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)

Press or Use a Speed Dial bin
There are 200 available trunks.
Trunk Port Disable
The system provides a service code (default: 645) which can be used by an extension user to block a
trunk for outgoing calls. The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are
blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user
programmed with the trunk access.
Sidetone Volume Setup
Allows the system programming for the multiline terminal side tone volume. There are two levels, based
on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Side Tone Auto Setup
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable Codec Filter setting for Program 81-07 and
Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs 90-68-01 and 90-68-02.
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 275
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
During the trunk measurement process, the following LCD indications are provided:

During measurement: Measurement (x/4)
x = number of measurements

Measure complete: Complete
Error condition: Error
Trunk busy: Busy
After successful measurement, the option to copy the same settings to all analog trunks is shown.

Side Tone Auto Setup available when the system is in an idle condition.
Conditions
2 - 276

If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming, the Call Timer starts
automatically after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display also
disables the Call Timer.

The system can automatically select the correct line to use based on the number dialed and
the time.

With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call
without lifting the handset or pressing Speaker. Users without Automatic Handsfree can
preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker.

Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time.
Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to
hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.

An extension Toll Class of Service may prevent dialing certain numbers.

Dialing 9 or any other trunk access code after dialing an extension, terminates the intercom
call and seizes a trunk.

Phones that have an APR/APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk until the interdigit time
expires (Program 21-01-03).

Setting Program 14-02-11 to On may cause a slight delay in dial tone while loop current is
returned.

When Account Codes are enabled, the user must press the  three times before the 
character is passed to the telco. The system recognizes the initial  as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second  as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third  will
be passed to telco.

To adjust for proper audio quality, refer to Programs 81-07 and 81-17.
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
Any Trunk Blade (i.e., CD-4COTB, CD-2BRIA, CD-PRTA, etc.)
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Automatic Route Selection
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Code Restriction
Dial Tone Detection
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Long Conversation Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
Programmable Function Keys
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 277
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-XX
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup
Use program 10-03-XX to setup
and confirm the basic
configuration data for each blade.
This program represents different
data depending on the blade
installed in the slot. Please refer
the SV8100 Programming Manual
for a more detailed description of
this program.
The assigned data
varies depending on
the blade installed in
the slot. Please refer
to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for a more detailed
description of the
10-03-XX programs.


11-01-01
System Numbering
Set system numbering plan.
Refer to UNIVERGE
SV8100 Programming
Manual.
11-09-01
Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit
Trunk Access Code (normally 9). If
you change this code, you must
also review the settings in
Program 11-01-01 for the new
code selected.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default = 9)
Trunk Access Code – 2nd Trunk
Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in
Program 11-01-01 for Alternate
Trunk Route Access.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default not assigned)
11-10-27
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Trunk Port
Disable for Outgoing Calls
Define the service code which
should be used by an extension
user to block a trunk from being
used for outgoing calls.
MLT, SLT
(default = 645)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Display
Language Selection for Multiline
Terminal
Select the service code which can
be used at an extension to change
the displayed language on a
multiline terminal display.
MLT
(default = 678)
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Define the service code for
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is
available only if you disable the
voice mail Single Digit dialing code
in Program 11-16-09.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)
11-12-01
2 - 278
3

11-09-02
11-11-13
2




Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Group Access
Define the service code which
should be used by an extension
user to select outgoing Trunk
Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 704)
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Trunk
Name
Set the names for trunks. The
trunk name displays on a multiline
terminal for incoming and outgoing
calls.
Up to 12 Characters
Line 001
Line 002
Line 003
:
Line 200

Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

14-01-07
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Outgoing Calls
Allow or Deny outgoing calls on
the trunk you are programming.
0 = Deny (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
(default = 1)

14-01-10
Basic Trunk Data Setup – DTMF
Tones for Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, Enable/Disable the
ability to hear the DTMF of the
digits dialed when placing the
outgoing call.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)

Analog Trunk Data Setup – Dial
Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
Enable/Disable dial tone detection
for directly accessed trunks. If
disabled, the system outdials on
the trunks without monitoring for
dial tone.
0 = Dial Tone
Detection Not Used
1 = Dial Tone
Detection Used
(default = 0)

Analog Trunk Data Setup – Next
Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
Enable/Disable the system ability
to skip over a trunk if dial tone is
not detected. This option pertains
to calls placed using Call
Appearance (CAP) Keys, Speed
Dial, Automatic Route Selection
(ARS), Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Select Loop start or Ground start
for the trunk.
0 = Loop Start (Loop)
1 = Ground Start
(Ground)
(default = 0)
11-12-14
14-01-01
14-01-02
14-01-03
14-02-05
14-02-11
14-02-14
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Loop
Start/Ground Start
Central Office Calls, Placing
3



2 - 279
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
14-05-01
14-06-01
2 - 280
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Group – Trunk Group
Number
Trunk Group Routing – Priority
Order Number
Assign trunks to Trunk Groups.
You can also assign the outbound
priority for trunks within the group.
When users dial up the trunk
group, they seize the trunks in the
order you specify in the outbound
priority entry.
 At default, all group are
assigned to Trunk Group 1.
Trunk Group Number:
0~100
Set the priority order number 1~4.
0 = Not Specify
1~100 : (Trunk Group
Number)
1001~1100 : (1000 +
Route Table Number)
Default:
Route 1, Order
Number 1 = 1 (Trunk
Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4
= 0 (Not Specified)
All Other Routes
(2~100) and Order
Numbers (1~4) = 0
(Not Specified)
Priority Number:
1~200
(default = Trunk Group
1, with priority in
ascending order)
2
3


Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-07-01
15-02-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Display Language
Selection
(To select options 8~10, press
either 8 or Recall, then press line
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.)
Central Office Calls, Placing
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks. Ring Group programming
overrides Access Map
programming.
Define the display language for
multiline terminals.
2
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold)

0 = Japanese
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
(default = 1)

3
2 - 281
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-02-08
15-03-03
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Set whether pressing a key
accesses a One-Touch Key or
Preselects the key.
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
(default = 1)
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF
tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
15-06-01
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2




System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Preselection Time
Set the preselection time When a
multiline terminal user preselects a
line key, the system remembers
the preselection for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5 seconds)
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Disconnect
Supervision
Enable/Disable disconnect
supervision for the system trunks.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-02-06
20-07-12
20-08-02
2 - 282
3

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use the Trunk Port Disable
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turns Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Continued Dialing, which
allows DTMF signal sending while
talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

21-01-15
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable/Disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)

21-01-16
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone
is not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
21-02-01
Trunk Group Routing for
Extensions
Assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
21-15-01
Individual Trunk Group Routing
for Extensions
Designate the trunk route
accessed when a user dials the
Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code. Refer to Trunk Group
Routing to set up outbound
routing.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
Timer starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires,
a warning tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800)
System Options for Transfer –
Disconnect Trunk to Trunk Timer
Timer starts after the Warning
Tone is heard (24-02-07). When
time expires, the trunk is
disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
20-13-13
21-01-17
24-02-07
24-02-10
Central Office Calls, Placing
3





2 - 283
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
82-08-01
Sidetone Volume Setup
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Adjust the multiline terminal side
tone volume. There are two levels,
based on whether the connected
trunk is a digital trunk or analog
trunk.
0-9
Digital Sidetone Level
0 = -54 (db)
1 = -48 (db)
2 = -42 (db)
3 = -36 (db)
4 = -30 (db)
5 = -24 (db)
6 = -18 (db)
7 = -12 (db)
8 = -12 (db)
9 = -12 (db)
Analog Sidetone Level
0 = -54 (db)
1 = -54 (db)
2 = -54 (db)
3 = -48 (db)
4 = -42 (db)
5 = -36 (db)
6 = -30 (db)
7 = -24 (db)
8 = -18 (db)
9 = -12 (db)
2
3

Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 704.
3.
Dial trunk group number (001~100).
4.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the trunk group key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751:
2.
Dial the number.
2 - 284
02
+ group).
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial 9.

3.
If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press the Trunk Group Routing key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752: 02
plus trunk group).
2.
Dial the number.
To place a call over a specific trunk:
1.
Dial #9.
2.
Dial the line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3.
Dial the number.
- OR -
1.
At the multiline terminal, press line key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 752:
2.
Dial the number.
01
001 to 200).
To busy out a trunk from outbound usage:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 1.

The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it. All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an
outgoing call. The trunk, however, can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access.
To Remove a Trunk from a Busied Out State:
1.
Press Speaker + 645 + Trunk Number (001~200) + 0.
Central Office Calls, Placing
2 - 285
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 286
Central Office Calls, Placing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Class of Service
Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The
system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a
different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of
dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension
Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 677). There
are 15 available Classes of Service.
Conditions

Before assigning a new COS, make sure the new COS matches the old COS or you may
enable options, which the extension should not have or remove options, which it should
have.

An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Service mode. At default, the
Mode names are assigned as follows:

Mode 1 = No setting

Mode 2 = Night

Mode 3 = Midnight

Mode 4 = Rest

Mode 5 = Day2

Mode 6 = Night2

Mode 7 = Midnight2

Mode 8 = Rest2

If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, Program 26-01-03 determines if the
system should route over the trunk group settings defined in Program 21-02 or play an error
tone.

When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) “Play Warning Tone”,
any trunk (except a CCIS trunk) pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward
Off-Premise will not complete. For a virtual to Call Forward Off-Premise, Program 26-01-03
must be set to “Route to trunk group” and the call will follow the trunk group settings of the
trunk, assigned in Program 21-03.

When using ARS Class of Service, with Program 26-01-03 set to (1) “Play Warning Tone”,
a CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is Call Forward Off-Premise will always
follow ARS Class 1 routing properties.
Class of Service
2 - 287
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting

The attendant (extension 101) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes. All other
extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:

An extension can use Service Code 677 to change another extension Class of Service
(Program 20-13-28 = 1).

An extension can automatically block another extension attempt to change their Class of
Service via Service Code 677 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).

The default Service Code for this option is 677 (Program 11-11-24 = 677).
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Night Service
2 - 288
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-11-24
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Change
Station Class of Service
If required, change the Service
Code a user dials to change an
extension Class of Service.
MLT
(default = 677)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-07-01
20-07-02
20-07-03
20-07-04
2


Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to manually Switch the Night Mode
(Service Code 718). This option
must be enabled for an extension
to be able to display the Night
indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to change the Music on
Hold tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Storing
Speed Dialing Entries
Turn Off or On an extension to
store System or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3
2 - 289
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-07-05
20-07-10
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
2 - 290
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the Appearance
function keys using Service Code
752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port
Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase and listen
to VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
611 to listen to the General
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Determine if the Accumulated
Extension Data is included in the
SMDR printout for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-07-30
20-08-01
20-08-02
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Determine if the Department
Group STG) Data is included in
the SMDR printout for each Class
of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Determine if the Accumulated
Account Code Data is included in
the SMDR printout for each Class
of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable (1)/Disable (0) an
extension ability to receive CO
Message Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable (1) or Disable (0) an
extension user ability to set or
cancel Private Call Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Date
Setting
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set the Date using the
service code defined in 11-10-41.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3
2 - 291
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-05
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
2 - 292
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Dial
Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Turn Off or On extension user
ability to use Dial Number Preview.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turn Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension
allowing it to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice
announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-19
20-08-20
20-08-21
20-08-22
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and
screening indicators are to be
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Enable/ Disable Call Address
Information for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hotline
for SPK
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to activate hotline or
ringdown when pressing the
Speaker key.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Hot
Key Pad
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make a call by just dialing
the number without first going
off-hook.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Automatic Trunk Seizing by
Pressing Speaker Key
Enable/Disable the ability to
access trunks when going off-hook
by pressing the speaker key for
each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Enable/Disable the ability to make
voice over to a busy virtual
extension for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3

2 - 293
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
2 - 294
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turn Off or On the extension
ability to receive a second call
from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a line or Call
Appearance (CAP) Keys
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turn Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether or not an
extension displays the Caller
Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminals LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turn Off or On and extension user
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
3

Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-10-10
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group as well as ring
group calls (Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes 
#).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turn Off or On an extension to use
Meet-Me Conference and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension to
use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call
on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Pickup to Pick
up Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Answer
Preset
Enable/Disable Answer Preset for
each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3

2 - 295
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
2 - 296
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turn Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to pick up a call on Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise at the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turns Off or On the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension in a Department Group
to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0)/Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3


2 - 297
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-11-27
20-12-02
20-12-03
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
2 - 298
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restricted
Unsupervised Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user to
initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Tandem Trunking).
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turn On or Off an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Park
Automatically Search
Turn Off or On using the Call Park
Automatically Search option.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) –
Advice of Charge
ISDN-AOC
Turn Off or On a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or Automatic Route
Selection.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) – Cost
Display (TTU)
ISDN billing information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-04
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn Off or On the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn On or Off the ability of an
extension to receive Off-Hook
Signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In
Mode to be Speech mode or
Monitor mode (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On the extension
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3
2 - 299
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
2 - 300
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turn Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turn Off or On a user ability to
press a line key to barge into an
outside call. The Barge-In feature
must be enabled if this option is
used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, you can call a busy
extension which is talking on a
virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
set to off for this option to work.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension user to
turn Background Music on and off.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through
Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3
2 - 301
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
2 - 302
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
which has this option enabled also
hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station
Relocation feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines
if the monitored parties receives
the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
20-13-52
20-14-01
20-14-02
20-14-03
20-14-04
20-14-05
20-14-06
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – VoIP
All DSP Busy Display
Enable/Disable the All DSP Busy
alarm displayed on the LCD when
the caller makes an IP call and
there is no VoIP DSP resource.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – First Digit
Absorption (Delete First Digit
Dialed)
For Tie Lines, Enable/Disable the
ability to absorb (ignore) the first
incoming digit. Use this to make
the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit Tie Line service.
This option does not apply to
DISA.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or Automatic Route
Selection.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to access trunk
groups for outside calls (Service
Code 704).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Outgoing System
Speed Dial
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller’s ability to use System
Speed Dialing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Operator Calling
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 0 for the
telephone system operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Internal Paging
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller’s ability to use the telephone
system Internal Paging.
0 =Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service
3

2 - 303
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-14-07
20-14-08
20-14-09
20-14-10
20-14-11
20-14-12
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – External Paging
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the telephone
system External Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Direct Trunk Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use Direct Trunk
Access (Service Code 715).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Forced Trunk
Disconnect <Not for ISDN
T-point>
Enable/Disable a tie trunk caller
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect (Service Code 26).
This option is not available to
DISA callers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Call Forward Setting
by Remote via DISA
Enable/Disable a DISA callers
ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Program 11-11-01
through Program 11-11-05).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
user from using the Barge-In
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Retrieve Park Hold
Turn Off or On the ability for a
DISA caller to retrieve parked or
held calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1
for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
To change an extension Class of Service (via Service Code 677):
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 677.
3.
Dial the extension number you want to change.

4.
You see: MODE1:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

2 - 304
You see: MODE2:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
5.
Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

6.
You see: MODE8:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

12.
You see: MODE7:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.

11.
You see: MODE6:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

10.
You see: MODE5:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

9.
You see: MODE4:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold.

8.
You see: MODE3:nn
Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged.
Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
Hold.

7.
Issue 12.0
You see: ICM Dial
Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.
- OR -
Press Speaker to hang up.
Class of Service
2 - 305
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 306
Class of Service
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Clock/Calendar Display
Description
The system uses Clock/Calendar Display for:

Central Office Calls (Access Maps)

Station Message Detail Recording

Class of Service (Class)

System Reports

Direct Inward Lines

Toll Restriction (Class)

Display Telephones

Trunk Group Routing

Night Service (Automatic)

Voice Mail

Programmable Trunk Parameters

Voice Response System

Ring Groups
Using the Daylight Savings Setup program, you can determine whether the system should automatically
adjust the system time for daylight savings time/standard time changes.
Clock Adjustment
The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock on a nightly basis. This feature
allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose or gain time.
Conditions

The system retains the Clock/Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset.

Changing the time may change the current Class of Service (COS) service depending on
the COS mode setup.

You can program the system to automatically switch modes.

Single line telephones cannot set the time and date.

Changing the system time automatically changes the VM8000 InMail time.
Default Setting
Enabled
Clock/Calendar Display
2 - 307
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Class of Service
Night Service
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
VM8000 InMail
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-01-01
2 - 308
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Time and Date – Year
Enter two digits (00~99) for the
year.
00~99
(default not assigned)
2
3

Clock/Calendar Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
10-01-02
Time and Date – Month
Enter two digits (01~12) for the
month.
01~12
(default not assigned)

10-01-03
Time and Date – Day
Enter two digits (01~31) for the
day.
01~31
(default not assigned)

10-01-04
Time and Date – Week
Enter the digit (1 = Sunday, 7 =
Saturday) to indicate the day of
the week.
1 = Sunday, 7 =
Saturday
(default not assigned)

10-01-05
Time and Date – Hour
Enter two digits (00~23) for the
hour.
00~23
(default not assigned)

10-01-06
Time and Date – Minute
Enter two digits (00~59) for the
minutes.
00~59
(default not assigned)

10-01-07
Time and Date – Second
Enter two digits (00~59) for the
seconds.
00~59
(default not assigned)

10-24-01
Daylight Savings Setup –
Daylight Savings Mode
Enable/Disable the system ability
to adjust the time for daylight
savings/standard time.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)

10-24-02
Daylight Savings Setup – Time
for Daylight Savings
Enter the time of day the system
should adjust for daylight savings
time (0000~2359).
00:00~23:59
(default = 02:00)

10-24-03
Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Month (Summer Time)
Enter the month of system should
adjust the time for daylight savings
time (01~12).
01~12
1 = Jan
2 = Feb, etc.
(default = 3)

Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Week
Enter the week of the month the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
0~5
0 = Last Week of
Month
(default = 2)

10-24-05
Daylight Savings Setup – Start of
Week Day
Enter the day of the week the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
1~7
(1 = Sun, 2 =Mon, etc.)
(default = 1)

10-24-06
Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Month
Enter the month of system should
adjust the time for standard time.
01~12
(default = 11)

10-24-07
Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Week
Enter the week of the month the
system should adjust the time for
standard time.
0~5
0 = Last Week of the
Month
(default = 1)

Daylight Savings Setup – End of
Week Day
Enter the day of the week the
system should adjust the time for
daylight savings time.
1~7
(1 = Sun, 2 =Mon, etc.)
(default = 1)

10-24-04
10-24-08
Clock/Calendar Display
3
2 - 309
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-02-07
20-06-01
20-07-03
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Time and Date
Display Mode
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Select the display mode (type 1~8)
for Time and Date (i.e., time and
date format).
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
2
1~8
Type 1 = (12 hour) 10
MAR TUE 3:15PM
Type 2 = (12 hour)
3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour)
3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour)
3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10
MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour)
15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour)
3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour)
15:15 TUE 10 MAR
(default = 3)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
The date must be set in system programming (10-01).
To set the system Time:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 728.
3.
Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
4.
Dial two digits for the minutes (00~59).
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 310
Clock/Calendar Display
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
CO Message Waiting Indication
Description
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central Office is used. The
CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication (VMWI) standards. Visual Message
Waiting Indication alerts a user that a message is present in their voice mail box. When VMWI is
provided, the UNIVERGE SV8100 provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk
appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the UNIVERGE SV8100 includes:

Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol

Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
Conditions

When a new message is stored in the CO Voice Mail system, the LED flashes green (0.5
sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) on the Direct Trunk Appearance line key at stations assigned for this
feature.

When the Direct Trunk Appearance line key is used by other ports during green blink
(flutter), the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red.

When the station is using a DTL-8LD telephone, <> flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk
appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail system.

A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system.

When power outage or some other reason causes the Central Office – Message Waiting
Indication (CO-MWI) to be out of synchronization with the system, an Attendant Position
can clear the CO-MWI per CO line.

The CO-MWI Callback Speed Dial number uses System Speed Dial Area.

This feature is supported at multiline terminals and DSS Consoles assigned with a direct
line key appearance of the CO/PBX line key supporting this feature and with proper Class
of Service assignment.

When additional digits (e.g., for password) are included in the CO Message Waiting
Indication System Speed Dial buffer, they must be separated by pauses to allow connection
to the CO Voice Mail system.

A Single Line Telephone or Wireless DECT (SIP) Handset cannot indicate the CO-MWI.

The Message Display Board does not support the CO-MWI.
CO Message Waiting Indication
2 - 311
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
CD-4COTB Blade with PZ-4COTF Daughter Board
Related Features
Battery Backup – System Power
Message Waiting
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
VM8000 InMail
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2 - 312
CO Message Waiting Indication
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
15-17-01
CO Message Waiting Indication –
LED Flash Assignment
Set the message waiting LED
Flash assignment on each CO
line.
0 = LED Off
1 = LED On
(default = 0)
20-02-08
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – LCD Display
Holding Time
This time determines how long a
user's display shows Caller ID for
a second incoming call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

20-07-23
21-22-01
21-22-02

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

CO Message Waiting Indication –
Call Back Settings – CO MWI Call
Back Enabling
Enable/Disable CO MWI Call
Back.
0 = Disable VMWI
Service
1 = Enable VMWI
Service
(default = 0)

CO Message Waiting Indication –
Call Back Settings – CO-MWI
Call Back Number Area Setting
Define the Speed Dial Bin number
for MWI Call Back.
0000~1999
1999

CO Message Waiting Indication
2 - 313
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To program the CO Message Waiting Callback Speed Dial Bin from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 28.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial Speed Dial bin (default = 1999).

5.
The valid range is 0000~1999 and depends on system programming.
Press Feature.
To program the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication callback number from an Attendant
Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 29.
3.
Press the CO line.
4.
Dial the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication callback number.

5.
The Exit key is used to clear all digits.
Press Feature.

This operation updates data in Program 13-04-01, a user can also edit the dial digits in Program 13-04-01 from
handset-programming or PCPro/WebPro.
To retrieve a Central Office – Message Waiting Indication:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 27.
3.
Press the CO line key.

4.
Listen to the message.

5.
The LCD indicates ‘ERROR’ if the CO Line is not flashing for a CO Message Waiting.
The operation for deletion is based on the remote voice mail system.
Hang up.
2 - 314
CO Message Waiting Indication
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To clear the Central Office – Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Dial 20.
3.
Press the CO line key.
CO Message Waiting Indication
2 - 315
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 316
CO Message Waiting Indication
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Code Restriction
Description
Code Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only
certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Code Restriction
according to the Code Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Code Restriction Classes and
416 extensions.
Conditions

If a Code Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the
system does not restrict the call.

Code Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance
automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service.

Code Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.

If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call cannot have a talk
path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing
an out going call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem
when dialing 911. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at
its default setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 911.

Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code
Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common
Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and
Common Restrict Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each
table. Each code is four digits maximum, using 0~9, #,  and Recall (as a wild card).

Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Code
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for
example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you do not allow the codes
you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The
system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is four digits maximum,
using 0~9, #,  and Recall (as a wild card).
Code Restriction
2 - 317
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Restrict Code Table
When you want Code Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the
Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict
Code Table. (If the same Code Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code
Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls
entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system provides four tables, with 60 entries
(restricted codes) in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #,  and
Recall (as a wild card).

Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Code Restriction so that users can dial only selected
(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To
allow all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code
Table. 1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Code
Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that
you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.)
The system provides four tables, with 200 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A
permitted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0~9, #,  and Recall (as a wild card).

International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.
You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to
allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict
Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The
system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to four digits in each table
entry and 20 International Call Allow tables, with up to six digits in each table entry. Valid
entries are 0~9, #,  and Recall (as a wild card).

Code Restriction for Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing can bypass or follow Code Restriction. If you allow many users to program
Speed Dialing, consider code restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can
program Speed Dialing, Code Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately
restrict Group and Common Speed Dialing.

Toll Digit Counting
Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this
option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the
Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to seven to limit local callers to dialing the
exchange code (NNX) and local address (nnnn) only. The system provides four tables in
which you can make entries for this option. The range is 4~30 digits.
2 - 318
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 12.0
Code Call Digit Counting
With Code Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can
dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up
services. You can make four entries (4~30 digits).

Toll Free Trunks
Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president’s Private
Line. Users can place calls on Code Free Trunks anytime – to anywhere, without
inadvertently being Code restricted.

PBX Call Restriction
Code Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX
access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have
trunks programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility on page 2-1197
feature for the specifics.

Additional Default Entries For Common Permit Code Table
Additional entries have been added to the default Common Permit Code Table. The default
setting is as follows:


Table 1: 911

Table 4: 1822

Table 7: 1855

Table 2: 1800

Table 5: 1833

Table 8: 1866

Table 3: 1888

Table 6: 1844

Table 9: 1877
Tie Line Code Restriction Enhanced
In Program 34-01-05: E&M Tie Line Basic Setup – System Code Restriction, if this option is
set to 0, the system follows the setting in Program 21-05-13: Code Restriction Class –
Restriction of Tie Line Calls to determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in
Program 34-08 is to be followed. If this option is set to 1, the system follows the system
Code restriction settings defined in Program 21-05-01 through Program 21-05-13.

A user can temporarily override extension Code Restrictions.

The system allows or denies outgoing access to trunks depending on Code Restriction.

If the system detects the call is answered by detecting reversal in an analog trunk this
restores both – way voice paths immediately.

When using DISA or Tie Lines, additional programming is required for Code Restriction
(DISA, refer to Program 25-10; Tie Lines, refer to Program 34-04).

A user can temporarily block their extension Code Restriction access, preventing unwanted
calls from being placed on their telephone while they are away from their desk.
Code Restriction
2 - 319
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Each phone and trunk have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.
For example:

When trunk class is 01 and station class 02, Toll Restriction Class 02 is applied.

When trunk class is 15 and station class 03, Toll Restriction Class 15 is applied.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
PBX Compatibility
Multiple Trunk Types
2 - 320
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
14-01-08
15-02-30
20-06-01
20-08-02
20-13-20
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Toll
Restriction
For each trunk, enter 1 to Enable
Toll Restriction; enter 0 to Disable
Code Restriction.
0 = Restriction
Disabled (No)
1 = Restriction Enabled
(Yes)
(default = 1)

Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Toll Restriction Class
Select the Toll Restriction Class to
be used when placing a call from a
virtual extension.
0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual
Extension Class)
1 = Real Ext. (Real
Extension Class)
(default = 1)

Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1


Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Code Restriction
2
3

2 - 321
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
21-01-10
21-01-15
21-01-16
21-01-17
21-04-01
21-05-01
2 - 322
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
If this option is programmed with
an entry other than 0, a call does
not have a talk path unless the
user dials at least the number of
digits entered in this option when
placing an outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911. Since it
is only a 3-digit number, the call
does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency
dispatcher from hearing the caller.
This option should be kept at its
default setting of 0 to prevent any
problem with dialing 911. If the
system detects the call is
answered, by detecting Reversal
in analog trunks, this restores both
– way voice paths immediately.
0~24
(default = 0)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line (Toll Restriction)
Enable or Disable the Incoming
Line feature system wide. When
enabled applies code restriction
when hook flash is sent on
inbound trunk followed by dialed
digits.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Supervise Dial Detection
Timer
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone
is not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Restriction Digit in
Outgoing Disable on Incoming
Line
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits (0~9) to be
dialed before the call should be
disconnected.
Digits 0~9
(default = 4)
Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Assign a Toll Restriction class to
an extension for modes 1-8.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)

0 = Unassign (No)
1 = Assign (Yes)
default:
1, 6~15 = 0
2~5 = 1

System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Digits for Toll
Restriction Path
Toll Restriction Class –
International Call Restriction
Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Assign or Unassign the
International Call Restrict Table
(Program 21-06-01).
2
3




Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
21-05-02
21-05-04
21-05-05
21-05-06
21-05-07
21-05-08
21-05-09
21-05-10
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Toll Restriction Class –
International Call Permit Code
Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Assign or Unassign the
International Call Permit Table
(Program 21-06-02).
0 = Unassign
1 = Assign
default:
1, 3~15 = 0
2=1

Toll Restriction Class –
Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
Select the table (defined in
Program 21-06-03) to be used to
determine the maximum number
of digits allowed for outgoing calls.
1~4 =Table
0 =Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3

Choose whether the table set up
by Program 21-06-04 is referred
to, or not referred to.
0 = Unassigned
1 = Assigned
Default:
1, 8~15 = 0
2~7 = 1

Choose whether the table set up
by Program 21-06-05 is referred
to, or not referred to.
0 = Unassigned
1 = Assigned
Default:
1, 6~15 = 0
2~5 = 1

Set the tables 1~4 when referring
to the table set up by Program
21-06-06.
1~4 = Table
0 = Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3

1~4 = Table
0 = Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3

Toll Restriction Class – Common
Permit Code Table
Toll Restriction Class – Common
Restriction Table
Toll Restriction Class – Permit
Code Table
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction Table
Set the tables 1~4 when referring
to the table set up by Program
21-06-07.
2
Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction for Common Speed
Dials
For the Code Restriction Class
you select, Enable (1) or Disable
(0) Code Restriction for Common
Speed Dialing numbers.
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
(default =0)

Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction for Group Speed
Dials
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable (1) or Disable (0)
Code Restriction for Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
(default =0)

Code Restriction
3
2 - 323
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
21-05-11
21-05-12
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Toll Restriction Class – Intercom
Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable or Disable Intercom
Call Restriction. If enabled,
extensions cannot place or receive
Intercom calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Toll Restriction Class – PBX Call
Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you
select, Enable or Disable PBX Call
Restriction.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Default:
1~6, 8~15 = 0
7=1


Toll Restriction Class –
Restriction of Tie Line Calls
Select whether the Toll Restriction
set up in Program 34-08-01 is
Enabled or Disabled.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
21-06-01
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– International Call Restriction
Table
Enter the international dialing
codes you want to restrict.
Dial (Up to four digits)
default:
Tables 1~10 = No
Setting

Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– International Call Permit Code
Table
Enter the international dialing
codes you want to permit.
Dial (Up to six digits)
Default:
Tables 1~20 = No
Setting

21-06-03
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
Select the maximum number of
digits allowed in outgoing calls for
each table (4~30).
4-30
default:
Tables 1~4 = 30

21-06-04
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Common Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Common
Permit Code Table.
Dial (Up to four digits)
default:
Table 1 = 911
Table 2 = 1800
Table 3 = 1888
Table 4 = 1822
Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 = 1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting

Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
Table 1 = 900
Table 2 = 1900
Table 3 = 976
Tables 4~10 = No
Setting

21-06-05
2 - 324
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Common Restriction Table
Program codes into the Common
Restrict Code Table.
3

21-05-13
21-06-02
2
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
21-06-06
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Permit
Code Tables.
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting

21-06-07
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Deny Restriction Table
Program codes into the Restrict
Code Tables (200 codes per table
maximum).
Dial (Up to 12 digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting

21-06-08
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– PBX Access Code
The system allows up to four
tables for PBX access codes.
PBX Access Codes can have up
to two digits, using 0~9, #,  and
LINE KEY 1 (don’t care). Refer to
the PBX Compatibility feature for
the specifics.
Dial (Up to two digits)
default:
Table 1~4 = No Setting
2

21-21-01
Toll Restriction for Trunks
(Seized Trunk Basis Setting) –
Restriction Class
Enter the Toll Restriction Class for
the selected trunk.
1~15
(default = 1)

34-01-05
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup –
System Toll Restriction
Determine if an incoming Tie Line
call should be subject to Toll
Restriction.
0 = No (Off)
1 = Yes (On)
(default = 0)

34-08-01
Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie
Lines
Define the Toll Restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should
be defined if Tie Line Code
Restriction is enabled in Program
21-05-13.
Up to 10 digits
(0~9, , #)
(default not assigned)
SMDR Output Options – Toll
Restricted Call
SMDR can include or exclude calls
blocked by Toll Restriction.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)
35-02-01
3


Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Code Restricted:
1.
Place call normally.

If your Code Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call is cut off.
Code Restriction
2 - 325
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 326
Code Restriction
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Code Restriction Override
Description
Code Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass the Code Restriction for an extension. This
helps a user that must place an important call that Code Restriction normally prevents. For example, you
could set up Code Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Code Restriction Override code to
your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:

Press Speaker, dial a service code, and enter their override code.

Press Speaker and dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002).

Place the 900 call without restriction.
You can assign a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share
the same override code.
Code Restriction Override bypasses all Code Restriction programming. Walking Code Restriction allows
you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user. When a call is placed using Walking Code
Restriction, the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs
21-05-xx and Programs 21-06-xx.
Conditions

Off-Premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines.

In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using
Temporary Code Restriction Override.

Code Restriction Override and Walking Code Restriction temporarily overrides an
extension Code Restriction.

If the system has VRS, users hear, “Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator”
when they dial a number that Code Restriction prevents.
Default Setting
Disabled
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Code Restriction Override
2 - 327
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Code Restriction
Station Message Detail Recording
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-34
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Temporary
Toll Restriction Override
If required, change the service
code (775) for Temporary Toll
Restriction Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 775)

11-11-36
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Toll
Restriction Override
If required, change the service
code (663) for Toll Restriction
Override.
MLT, SLT
(default = 663)

20-08-06
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Toll Restriction Override
Time
Set the Toll Restriction Override
Time. After dialing the Toll
Restriction Override codes, the
system removes Toll Restriction
for this Time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
Toll Restriction Override
Password Setup
Assign Toll Restriction Override
codes to extensions. Each code
must have four digits, using any
combination of 0~9, # and . Each
extension can have a separate
code, or many extensions can
share the same override code.
Maximum four digits
(0~9, #, )
(default not assigned)
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction
Override User ID codes (six digits)
into tables. Up to 500 different
override codes can be entered.
Dial (Six digits)
(default not assigned)
21-01-07
21-07-01
21-14-01
2 - 328
Walking Toll Restriction
Password Setup – User ID
3




Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Walking Toll Restriction
Password Setup – Walking Toll
Restriction Class Number
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction
Class of Service (1~15) to be used
for each table number assigned in
Program 21-14-01.
1~15
(default = 1)
35-02-01
SMDR Output Options – Toll
Restricted Call
SMDR can include or exclude calls
blocked by Toll Restriction.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

35-02-02
SMDR Output Options – PBX
Calls
When the system is behind a PBX,
SMDR can include all calls or just
calls dialed using the PBX trunk
access code.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

SMDR Output Options – Trunk
Number or Name
Select whether the system should
display the trunk Name (0) or the
Number (1) on SMDR reports.
 If this option is set to 0,
Program 35-02-14 must be
set to 0.
0 = Name
1 = Number
(default = 1)
21-14-02
35-02-03


35-02-04
SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Daily)
Set this option to (1) to have the
SMDR report provide a daily
summary (at midnight every night).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

35-02-05
SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Weekly)
Set this option to (1) to have the
SMDR report provide a weekly
summary (every Saturday at
midnight).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

SMDR Output Options –
Summary (Monthly)
Set this option to (1) to have the
SMDR report provide a monthly
summary (at midnight on the last
day of the month).
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

35-02-07
SMDR Output Options – Toll
Charge Cost
Set this option to (1) have the
SMDR report include toll charges.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

35-02-08
SMDR Output Options –
Incoming Call
Enable this option (1) to have the
SMDR report include incoming
calls. If you disable this option (0),
incoming calls do not print.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 1)

SMDR Output Options –
Extension Number or Name
Set this option (1) to have the
SMDR report include extension
numbers. Set this option (0) to
have the SMDR report include
extension names.
0 = Name
1 = Number
(default = 1)
SMDR Output Options – All
Lines Busy (ALB) Output
Determine if the All Lines Busy
(ALB) indication should be
displayed.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
35-02-06
35-02-09
35-02-10
Code Restriction Override
3


2 - 329
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
35-02-12
SMDR Output Options – DID
Table Name Output
Determine if the DID table name
should be displayed.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)

35-02-13
SMDR Output Options – CLI
Output When DID to Trunk
Determine if the CLI output should
be displayed for DID.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)

35-02-14
SMDR Output Options – Date
Determine whether the date
should be displayed on SMDR
reports.
 This option must be set to 0 if
the trunk name is set to be
displayed in Program
35-02-03.
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
(default = 0)
Determine whether or not the CLI/
DID Number Switching should be
displayed.
0 = CLI (CLIP)
1 = DID Calling
Number
2 = Caller ID Name
(default = 0)

SMDR Output Options – Trunk
Name or Received Dialed
Number
Determine how the SMDR should
print incoming calls on ANI/DNIS
or DID trunks. If set to (1), ANI/
DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits.
If set to (0) trunk names are
printed instead.
0 = Trunk Port Name
1 = Received Dialed
Number
2 = Both
(default = 0)

35-02-17
SMDR Output Options – Print
Account Code or Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Determine if SMDR should print
Account Code or Caller Name of
Incoming Call.
0 = ACC
1 = CNAME
(default = 0)

35-02-18
SMDR Output Options – Print
Mode for Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Determine how SMDR should print
Caller Name of Incoming Call.
0 = Normal
1 = Line Feed
(default = 0)

35-02-15
35-02-16
2 - 330
SMDR Output Options – CLI/DID
Number Switching
3

Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Walking Code Restriction
663?
Code Restriction Override
2 - 331
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Temporary Code Restriction Override
service code 663 be changed
775?
2 - 332
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension Code Restriction:

You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 775.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Code Restriction Override code.

If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. After dialing the service
code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is entered, the display is
cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.

You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5.
Dial the number without any restriction.
To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension:

You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 663 and dial the 6-digit Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service code.

After dialing the service code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit
is entered, the display is cleared and ICM dial tone is heard.

You hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
3.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
4.
Dial the number.

The call is allowed or denied based on the user’s Toll Restriction Class of Service level.
Code Restriction Override
2 - 333
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 334
Code Restriction Override
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Description
Code Restriction, Dial Block lets a user temporarily block dialing on an extension. This helps a user
block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their desk. A user
must enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.
Dial Block can also be set by the supervisor’s access code. If Dial Block is set by an extension user, the
supervisor cannot release it. If Dial Block is set by the supervisor’s code, the extension user cannot
release it.
Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an
assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Conditions

If the system is reset by a first initialize, the Dial Block feature is cleared.

This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.

Both Program 21-09-01 (Code Restrict Class) and Program 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction
Class per Extension) can be set at the same time. However the system gives priority to the
setting in Program 21-10.

Dial Block can temporarily block an extension Code Restriction setting by changing to a
predefined table that has more restrictions.
Default Settings
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)
None
Code Restriction, Dial Block
2 - 335
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-10-17
Service Code Setup (for System
Administration) – Dial Block by
Supervisor
Assign a service code used by the
supervisor to set Dial Block for
another extension.
MLT
(default = 601)

11-11-33
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Dial Block
Assign a service code to use for
Dial Block.
MLT, SLT
(default = 600)

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

21-09-01
Dial Block Setup – Toll
Restriction Class with Dial Block
Assign a Code Restriction COS
(1~15) when the Dial Block feature
is used.
1~15
(default = 15)

21-09-02
Dial Block Setup – Supervisor
Password
Assign a 4-digit password used by
the supervisor to enable or disable
Dial Block for other extensions.
0~9, , #
(4-digit fixed)
(default not assigned)

20-08-08
2 - 336
3
Code Restriction, Dial Block
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
21-10-01
90-19-01
Dial Block restriction Class per
Extension
Assign the Code Restriction COS
(1~15) used by an extension when
the Dial Block feature is enabled. If
this data is 0, Code Restriction
COS follows Program 21-09-01.
0, 1~15
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Dial Block Release
Enter the extension number to
release from the Dial Block
Restriction. This program can be
used when a password is
forgotten by the user.
[Release?]: Dial 1+
press Transfer
(Press Transfer to
cancel.)
2
3


Operation
To set Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block Code (as set in programming).
4.
Dial 1.

5.
Confirmation tone is heard.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 600.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial 0.

5.
Confirmation tone is heard.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
Code Restriction, Dial Block
2 - 337
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To set Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601 (default).
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code (as set in programming).
4.
Dial the extension number to blocked.
5.
Dial 1.

6.
Confirmation tone is heard.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
To release Dial Block from another extension:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker.
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset.
2.
Dial 601.
3.
Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4.
Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.
5.
Dial 0.

6.
Confirmation tone is heard.
Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up.
2 - 338
Code Restriction, Dial Block
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Conference
Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With
Conference, a user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The
CD-CP00-US provides 64 conference ports, to allow any number of internal or external parties to be
conferenced together for a limit of 32 parties. This means that one extension can conference up to 31
internal and/or external parties together (the originator would be the 32nd party reaching the maximum
of 32). While this Conference call is active, another user can initiate a separate Conference also for a
limit of 32 parties, or any number of conferences can be initiated with any number of parties (up to 32)
until all 64 Conference ports are busy.

64 conference ports are available with a PZ-ME50-US mounted on the CD-CP00-US and a second cabinet installed.
Without the second cabinet and PZ-ME50-US installed, the CD-CP00-US provides a maximum of 32 conference ports.
Conditions

An ADA module is required for speech recording.

Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This allows
a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer
and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up
a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule.

Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially
set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 101 followed by extension
102, Split cycles from the trunk, to 101 and finally to 102. The Split cycle then repeats.

If a user’s extension has Barge-In enabled, they can also Barge-In on an established
Conference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in
an emergency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference – and then rejoin the
telephone meeting when it is convenient to do so.

If a user’s extension has Barge-In monitor enabled (Program 20-13-10), they can Silent Monitor a
conference already in progress (Program 99-01-49 option 49 must be set to 1).

A Class of Service option is available which allows or denies an extension user from
automatically setting up a Conference/Tandem Trunking call upon hanging up the
telephone.

An extension with Barge-In enabled can Transfer a call to an existing Conference. This
allows, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them to an
existing telephone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the
same time and sequentially add them into the Conference. Transfer Call Into Conference
Code (624).
Conference
2 - 339
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

An option is available which allows an extension Conf key (SC 751: 07) to be programmed
for Conference or for Transfer. When set for Transfer, the user places a call on hold, dials
the extension to which it should be transferred, and presses Conf. The call is then
transferred. When set for Conference, with an active call, the user presses Conf, places a
second call, then presses Conf twice. All the calls are then connected.

Users can Barge-In on a Conference call if allowed in programming.

Define the outgoing call options for each trunk and user.

Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.

DISA and Tie Line users may use the Barge-In feature on a Conference call if they know
the service code and are permitted in their DISA/Tie Line Class of Service.

Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.

Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.

A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conference and then drop out of the
call, allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation. Establish two trunk calls,
press Hold and dial #8.

You can optionally program Conf (Transfer) for Transfer. In this case, the multiline terminal
must have a Conference function key. The system also allows a call to be transferred into a
Conference call.

When the Conference Originator hangs up with a conference on Hold, or when trying to add
another caller, all internal calls are dropped.

Conferencing when talking on a Virtual Extension:

While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has an internal call on Hold, a conference
call cannot be established.

While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station receives an intercom call (call to its actual
station number), a conference call cannot be established.

While talking on a Virtual Extension, if the station has a call on Hold, a conference call cannot
be established.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
2 - 340
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-08
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Barge-In
Determine what the service code
should be for an internal party to
use the Barge-In feature.
MLT, SLT
(default = 710)

11-12-47
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Waiting Answer/
Split Answer
If required, change the code users
dial to Split while on a call.
SLT
(default = 794)

11-12-57
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Tandem Trunking
With two trunks in Conference
press Hold and dial #8 and the
Conference/Tandem happens.
MLT, SLT
(default = #8)

11-12-58
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Transfer Into
Conference
If required, change the service
code used to transfer a call into a
Conference call.
MLT, SLT
(default = 624)

11-16-02
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Customize the one-digit Service
Codes used for Barge-In.
(default not assigned)
14-01-04
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Gain Level for
Conference and Transfer Calls
Select the CODEC gain type used
by the trunk when it is part of an
unsupervised conference.
1~63(-15.5dB~
+15.5dB in 0.5dB
intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]
Conference
3


2 - 341
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-02-24
15-07-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Conference Key Mode
Programmable Function Keys
Allow an extension Conf key to be
programmed for Conference or for
Transfer. When set for Transfer,
the user places a call on hold,
dials the extension to which it
should be transferred, then
presses the Conf key. The call is
then transferred. When set for
Conference, with an active call,
the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses
the Conf key twice. All the calls
are then connected.
0 = Conference
1 = Transfer
(default = 0)
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
2
3

00 ~ 99

(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-11-21
20-13-08
20-13-10
20-13-15
2 - 342
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow/Deny an extension users’s
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
or Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
20-13-16
20-14-11
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Enable (1)/Disable (0) a DISA or
tie trunk user from using the
Barge-In feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
To establish a Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Establish intercom or trunk call.
2.
Press Conf or Conf softkey (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
3.
Dial the extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access outside call.
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.

4.
5.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or press the Speaker key and dial 9, the Trunk Access Code
+ the trunk number (default #9). You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.
When called party answers, press the Add softkey or Conf twice.

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system Conference limit.

If the call being added is busy/unanswered:
With an outside call, press the line or Call Appearance (CAP) key for a call previously added to the Conference.
The unanswered call drops and the initiator is back into the Conference call.

Adding an Intercom call to an outside Conference call: Press the Conf softkey on the multiline terminal display
or Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If using a non-display telephone, press Conf twice.

With only Intercom calls in the Conference: Press Conf twice to re-establish the Conference. If the voice mail
answers, there is no way to drop that extension out. You must drop the Conference call.
Repeat steps 2~4 to add more parties.
Conference
2 - 343
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Single Line Telephone
1.
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Hookflash and dial #1.
3.
Dial extension you want to add.
- OR -
Access trunk call.
- OR -
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
4.
Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
- OR -
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Conf (Transfer) or Conference key (Program 15-07 or SC 751: 07).
2.
Dial Split service code (794).

Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press the Conf softkey or
press Conf twice to set up the Conference again.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hookflash and dial 794.

Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash twice to set up the
Conference again.
To drop an outside call from the Conference:
1.
Press Hold to place the conference call on hold.
2.
Hang up.

The lines involved in the Conference ring back separately to the telephone.
3.
Answer and disconnect the unwanted outside call.
4.
To re-establish the Conference, answer the remaining call by pressing Conf after each call is
answered. Press Conf twice when all calls have been answered.
2 - 344
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To exit a Conference with internal and outside conference members without affecting the other
parties:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Hang up.

If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear what is programmed in
Program 10-04-01.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hang up.

If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
To exit a Conference when all conference members are outside parties without affecting the
other parties:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Hold key.
2.
Dial # 8.
3.
Hang up.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Hookflash and dial # 8.
2.
Hang up.
To Barge-In to Conference Call:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code (default = 710).

2.
If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a Callback to the extension.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.

When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference,
depending on system programming, and all display multiline terminals show the joined party. If a Conference is
not possible:

the extension user hears a warning tone

the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group
- OR 
Conference
the Tie Line user hears a busy tone.
2 - 345
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The following steps are not available for DISA or Tie Line trunks:
1.
Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2.
Dial the single digit service code, if programmed.

Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 710 can also be dialed at this point.
To Transfer a Call into a Conference:
1.
While on a call, press Hold.
2.
Dial the Transfer to Conference service code (default = 624).
3.
4.

If the telephone does not have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user hangs up, the system
automatically places a Callback to the extension.

The display shows the line Number, Number/Name and Extension Name/Number.
Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a Conference call.

If an error tone is heard, Barge-In is not enabled for the extension and the call cannot go through. Retrieve the
call by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key or hang up and the call recalls the extension.

When the call is transferred into the Conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference,
depending on the entries in Program 20-13-17 and Program 80-01, and all display multiline terminals show the
joined party.

To cancel the transfer, press the flashing line or Call Appearance (CAP) Key to retrieve the call.
Hang up.
2 - 346
Conference
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Description
Voice Call Conference lets extension users in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate
a Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Meet-Me Conference key and tells their
co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press
the trunk line key to join the call. Line keys assigned for the trunk blink indicating that privacy has been
released, and others can join the current call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person
initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it verbally. A tone, indicating others have joined the
conference, can be provided.
The CD-CP00-US provides 64 Conference circuits, to allow two groups of internal or external parties to
be conferenced together up to a limit of 32.
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the
non-private mode to the private mode. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line
key to switch from non-private mode to private mode. For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle
option, trunks initially have the privacy released. The remainder of the call is private. If the call is on a
Call Appearance (CAP) Key, the user presses their Meet-Me Conference function key instead. Unlike
pressing the line key, pressing the Meet-Me Conference key toggles back and forth between private and
non-private mode for the call.
Conditions

Call Arrival (CAR) Keys and Virtual Extensions do not support Voice Call Conference
Programmable Function keys.

Voice Call Conference requires a Meet-Me Conference function key and trunk line keys.

This feature is not available on single line telephones.

With Caller ID enabled, a call with Privacy Release shows the Caller ID until the call is
answered. It can be viewed again by pressing the line key, though this sets the call to
Private mode. To keep the call on Privacy Release, press the Help + Exit keys.
Default Setting
Disabled
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
2 - 347
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Caller ID
Conference
Programmable Function Keys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-01-19
2 - 348
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
Determine if a trunk should be
able to be toggled to a private/
non-private line (0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled). This option is not
required for Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)
2
3

Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-13-09
20-13-17
31-01-04
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1


Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Internal/
External Paging – Privacy
Release Time
Set the interval users have to join
a Voice Call Conference after it is
announced. (Note that this interval
is also used for Meet Me
Conference.)
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 90)
2
3


Operation
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):
1.
After Conference request, press indicated line key.

A Conf indication is displayed on both telephones.

A trunk with privacy release or Voice Call Conference blinks.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:
1.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
2 - 349
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To toggle between Private and Non-Private mode:
1.
Press the Meet-Me Conference key (Program 15-07-01, SC 751: 32).
- OR -
Press the Trunk Line Key. (This toggles from Non-Private to Private. To go back to
Non-Private, the Meet-Me Conference Key above must be pressed.)
2 - 350
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Continued Dialing
Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer, and then dial
additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other
Common Carriers (OCCs).
Two types of Continued Dialing are available:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension Class of Service, a multiline terminal user may dial additional digits after
their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension
users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users
cannot access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated
Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the
user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system Toll
Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Guide to Feature Programming
on page 2-352 for additional information.
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.
Conditions

The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.

Continued Dialing for intercom calls only applies to calls made to analog devices.

With Pulse to Tone Conversion, users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks –
then dial DTMF digits after the service answers.

When Account Codes are enabled, the user must press the  three times before the 
character is passed to the telco. The system recognizes the initial  as the beginning of an
Account Code entry, the second  as the end of an Account Code entry, and the third  will
be passed to telco.
Continued Dialing
2 - 351
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-03-03
2 - 352
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Terminal Type
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail, always
enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF
tones).
0 = Normal
1 = Special
(default = 0)
2
3

Continued Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-06-01
20-13-13
21-04-01
21-05-04
21-06-03
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Toll Restriction Class for
Extensions
Assign a Toll Restriction Class
(1~15) to an extension.
Day/Night Mode
1~9 (9 = Power Failure
Mode)
1~15
(default = 2)

Select the table (defined in
Program 21-06-03) to be used to
determine the maximum number
of digits allowed for outgoing calls.
1~4 = Table
0 =Disable (None)
Default:
1, 2, 6~15 = 0
3=1
4=2
5=3

Set the Maximum Number of digits
dialed for each table.
4-30
default:
Tables 1~4 = 30

Toll Restriction Class –
Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
– Maximum Number of Digits
Table Assignment
2
3
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
1.
Place an intercom or trunk call.
2.
Continue dialing after the call connects.

Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
Continued Dialing
2 - 353
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 354
Continued Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Cordless DECT Terminals
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher software, a Flash (Recall) key can be placed on a line key.
With Version 4000 or higher software, the door strike relay can be activated from the MH240 or
Cordless DECT terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in Program 15-07 (751: 62).
Description
The Cordless DECT Terminals may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 KTS. The DTL-8R-1 TEL
uses 1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM Technology and is connected in tandem to a multiline terminal. The
ITL-8R-1 TEL uses 1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM Technology and is connected using the local network to the
SV8100 as a stand alone terminal. Refer to the ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Manual for more
information.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Feature
Digital Technology
LCD
Silent Alarm
Dedicated Keys
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range 
Message Waiting Indication
Headset Connection
Channels
Cordless DECT Terminals
(DTL-8R-1 and ITL-8R-1)
1.9 GHz 6.0
2-line, 24-digit LCD Display
Yes
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, SPEAKER, REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
8
50~150 feet (expandable with repeaters)
Yes (Icon)
Yes
5 channels by 12 time slots
 Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore, some interference may take place
when operating in the same environment as other wireless devices which operate within the same frequency spectrum.
Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 355
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
2 - 356

The ITL-8R-1 does not support the Manual or Automatic registration modes to the SV8100.

The ITL-8R-1 does support the Plug and Play registration mode to the SV8100.

If using the Base Switching option, Cordless DECT Terminal programmable keys:

1~4 can be set as a Programmable Function key such as Trunk Line Keys

5 and 6 can be set as One-Touch keys

7 and 8 are reserved for Base Switching and cannot be programmed

If the Base Switching option is not used, programmable keys 1~8 can be programmed as
Programmable Function Keys such as Trunk Line Keys.

The DTL-8R-1 Cordless DECT Terminals can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE
SV8100, and DTL Digital Multiline Telephones.

The ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal can only connect directly to the SV8100 and be
used as a stand alone terminal.

The ITL-8R-1 DECT IP Cordless – cannot be connected with DT300 or DT700 terminals.

Battery Capacity is 910 mAh, 2.4V with a Talk Mode of 16 hours (typical) and a Standby
Mode of seven days (typical).

The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.

The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.

When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.

Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.

A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.

A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped
with the product.

The battery can be charged when it is installed in the handset or in the base charging unit
and the handset is in the charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.

Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings are known to reduce
telephone performance.

When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different
channels and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).

Dterm cordless and DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification
is shown in the display.

Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a
Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the
line keys in Program 15-07 (751: 62) (Version 4000 or higher software is required).
Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is placed in idle.

Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.

The DTL-8R-1 DECT Cordless – only supports connection with DT300 terminals.

DTH-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).

DTR-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).

NEC recommends ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminals be assigned to their own VLAN.
Restrictions

Manual registration mode is not supported for ITL-8R- DECT IP Cordless phones.

Authentication Password is not supported for ITL-8R- DECT IP Cordless phones.

Multiple SIP server registration is not supported for ITL-8R- DECT IP Cordless phones.

Network Address Translation (NAT) transversal mode is not supported for ITL-8R- DECT IP
Cordless phones.

Back Ground Music (BGM) is not supported for ITL-8R- DECT IP Cordless phones.

Cordless terminals cannot receive voice announcements when idle.

The ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal can only be powered using a POE hub/switch or
POE injector.

The ITL-8R-1 DECT IP Cordless – cannot be connected with DT300 or DT700 terminals.

Voice announce is not supported for ITL-8R-1 terminals. If the SV8100 is set to 0 (Voice) in
Program 20-02-12 each ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal must be set to signal only
using the dial access code 723. Failure to set the ITL-8R-1 terminal ring either with
Program 20-02-12 or dial access code allows users who call that phone to hear
conversations without the called party's knowledge.

The ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal only supports port side VLANs.

The ITL-8R-1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal only supports G.711.
Default Setting
None
Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 357
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
DTL-8R-1 TEL
ITL-8R-1 TEL
Required Component(s)

CD-8DLCA Blade with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board

CD-CP00-US with PZ-32/64/128IPLA or PZ-32/64/128IPLB Daughter board

SIP telephone licenses
-ORCD-16DLCA
Related Features
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 358
Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Cordless DECT Terminals
Setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type (B1).
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
logical port number (B1).
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

3
2 - 359
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
10-03-04
10-03-05
10-03-06
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
2 - 360
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
optional installed Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
optional installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

Setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)

0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
logical port number (B2).
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Multiline Telephone Type
Read only program that shows the
type of multiline terminal
connected to the port.
0 = DT3
1 = Dterm8
2 = Dterm7
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Side Option Information
Read only command that shows
the type of side module connected
to the terminal.
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
(default = 0)

3
Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-10
10-03-11
11-11-16
20-07-01
20-07-03
20-07-05
20-07-11
20-07-12
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Bottom Option Information (Only
applies to DTL style telephones)
Shows optional adapter
information.
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Handset Option Information
Shows optional adapter
information.
2
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)

0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
(default = 0)

3
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Enable Force
Ringing of Incoming Intercom
Calls
Allows a telephone to be manually
set to ring when called if the
system is set to voice announce in
Program 20-02-12
MLT, SLT
(default = 775)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turn Off or On an extension for
manually Switching the Night
Mode (Service Code 718). This
option must be enabled for an
extension to be able to display the
Night indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension to use the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turn Off or On an extension to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect. This
allows the extension to disconnect
an Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On the extension
ability to use the Trunk Port
Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Cordless DECT Terminals

2 - 361
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
2 - 362
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase and listen
to VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
611 to listen to the General
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Define if Accumulated Extension
Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Define if Department Group (STG)
Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Define if Accumulated Account
Code Data is included in the
SMDR Printout for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turn Off (0) or On (1) an extension
to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turn Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 363
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
2 - 364
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension
allowing it to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice
announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and
screening indicators are to be
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Enable/Disable Call Address
Information for each Class Of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to voice over to a busy
virtual extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3

Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turns Off or On the extension
ability to receive a second call
from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turn Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether an extension
displays the Caller Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turn Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Cordless DECT Terminals
3

2 - 365
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
2 - 366
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group as well as ring
group calls (Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to pick up a call ringing into a
Pickup Group (Service Codes 
#).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turns Off or On an extension to
use Meet-Me Conference and
Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension to
use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns Off or On an extension
ability to answer an incoming call
on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turn off or on an extension ability
to use Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)



Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use Transfer Without Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turn Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 367
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
2 - 368
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turn Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
in a Department Group ability to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0)/Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal (0) or extended Park (1).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restricted
Unsupervised Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer (Tandem Trunking).
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)


Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn On or Off the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 369
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
2 - 370
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the Barge-In Speech
Mode) or Monitor Mode at the
initiating extension (i.e., Barge-In
initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turn Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
user should display the reason a
call is being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. The Barge-In
feature must be enabled if this
option is to be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
set to off for this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension user
from turning Background Music on
and off.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 371
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
2 - 372
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Allow (1)/Deny (0) the extension
user ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be On for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through
Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
with this option enabled also hears
the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station
Relocation feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines
if the monitored parties receives
the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Name is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent Display which Call is From
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Operation
To set up and program the Cordless DECT Terminals (DTL-8R-1):
1.
Press and hold down  and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is
displayed on the LCD.
2.
Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key
F1.
Cordless DECT Terminals
2 - 373
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.

TALK is selected when the F1~F8 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO TALK is
selected when F1~F8 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook state (e.g., Log On/
Off or DND.)
5.
Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2 ~ F8).
6.
After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8.
Press TALK to exit.

Function keys F1 ~ F8 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature
(FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal.

When initially installed, function keys F1~F8 default to Line keys 1~8 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing
defaults to ON.

Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Cordless DECT Terminals Using the
Base Unit:
When the Cordless DECT Terminals is associated with a multiline telephone the following is applicable:

Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are
idle.

A call in progress cannot be switched between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated
multiline telephone.

Switching held calls between the Cordless DECT Terminals and the associated multiline telephone
is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.
Switching from multiline telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone:
1.
Press the Cordless button on the base unit.
To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to multiline telephone:
1.
Press the DESK button on the base unit.
For additional Operating Procedures, refer to the Cordless DECT Terminals (DTL-8R-1) Owner’s Guide.
2 - 374
Cordless DECT Terminals
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Cordless Telephone Connection
Description
Using an AP(R)-R/AP(A)-R Unit for DTH/DTR telephones or an APR-L for DTL telephones a cordless
telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a multiline terminal.
The CD-4LCA with PZ-4LCA Daughter Board, CD-8LCA with PZ-8LCE Daughter Board and the
SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP also support cordless telephones, but this feature refers to multiline terminal cordless
connection.
Conditions

A voice announced internal call to the multiline terminal does not ring the cordless
telephone.

Only one cordless single line telephone can be connected to an APR-L, AP(R)-R, or
AP(A)-R Unit.

When CO Prime Line is assigned to the associated multiline terminal, internal dial tone
cannot be transferred to the cordless telephone.

The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing. When all PBR circuits are
busy, a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off-hook.

Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.

This feature works with 2500-type cordless single line telephones.

The multiline terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each
other.

An APR-L, AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit with hookflash enabled follows the same operating
procedures as a single line terminal connected to a CD-4LCA with PZ-4LCA Daughter Board
or CD-8LCA with PZ-8LCE Daughter Board.

The multiline terminal LCD displays normal information for multiline terminal when a
cordless terminal is used.

When the multiline terminal user goes off-hook before the cordless single line telephone
user, a PBR circuit is not connected for the cordless single line telephone.

The cordless telephone must be installed within 10 feet of the AP(R)-R, AP(A)-R Unit or
APR-L Unit.
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 375
Issue 12.0


UNIVERGE SV8100
The following features are supported by an APR-L AP(R)-R or AP(A)-R:

Initiate conference

Change station name

Privacy release by pressing line key

Group Listen

DSS/BLF indication

Headset Ringing
The APR-L AP(R)-R and AP(A)-R only support DTMF signaling, DP (Dial Pulse) is not supported.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals

Any DTH/DTR terminal with an AP(A)-R or AP(R)-R Unit except the DTR-2DT-1 TEL

Any DTL terminal with an APR-L Unit except the DTL-2DT-1 TEL
Required Component(s)
2500-type cordless Single Line Telephone
Related Features
Ancillary Device Connection
Class of Service
2 - 376
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-03-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Cordless Telephone Connection
Setup and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type (B1).
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
logical port number (B1).
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

3
2 - 377
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
10-03-04
10-03-05
10-03-06
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
2 - 378
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
optional installed Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
optional installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
terminal type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)

0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Use to setup and confirm the
Basic Configuration data for
logical port number (B2).
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Multiline Telephone Type
Read only program that shows the
type of multiline terminal
connected to the port.
0 = DT3
1 = Dterm8
2 = Dterm7
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Side Option Information
Read only command that shows
the type of side module connected
to the terminal.
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
(default = 0)

3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-10
10-03-11
15-07-01
20-07-02
20-07-03
20-07-04
20-07-05
20-07-10
20-07-11
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Bottom Option Information (Only
applies to DTL style telephones)
Shows optional adapter
information.
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Handset Option Information
Shows optional adapter
information.
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys.
2
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)

0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
(default = 0)

Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to change the Music on
Hold tone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Storing
Speed Dialing Entries
Turn Off or On an extension to
store System or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance
Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the Appearance
function keys using Service Code
752.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Cordless Telephone Connection
3
2 - 379
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
20-07-20
20-07-24
2 - 380
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port
Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase and listen
to VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
611 to listen to the General
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Define the Class of Service (COS)
for the SMDR printout of
accumulated extension data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Define the Class of Service (COS)
for the SMDR printout of
department group (STG) data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Define the Class of Service (COS)
for the SMDR printout of
accumulated account code data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
20-08-06
20-08-08
20-08-10
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Do-NotCall Administrator
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On allowing an
extension to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless Telephone Connection
3
2 - 381
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
2 - 382
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enabling this
option prevents callers from
changing the call to voice
announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and
screening indicators are to be
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Define the Class of Service (COS)
for call address information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Define the Class of Service (COS)
for voice over to busy virtual
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3

Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-09-05
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turn Off or On the extension
ability to receive a second call
from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turn Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group as well as ring
group calls (Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into
a Pickup Group (Service Codes 
#).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Cordless Telephone Connection
3

2 - 383
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
2 - 384
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension to
use Universal Auto Answer (no
service code required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call
on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Pickup to pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3

Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On user setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have a call which recalls from
hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turn Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
in a Department Group ability to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0)/Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal or extended Park
(0 = Normal for Program 24-01-06,
1 = Extended for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Cordless Telephone Connection
3


2 - 385
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-12-03
20-13-01
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
2 - 386
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow/Deny an extension users
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension
user.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Charging Cost Service) – Cost
Display (TTU)
ISDN billing information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn Off or On the ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-07
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension to receive off-hook
signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension ability to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
or Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless Telephone Connection
3
2 - 387
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
2 - 388
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turn Off or On the ability to display
the detail state of called party.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
 This only applies to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. The Barge-In
feature must be enabled if this
option is to be used.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
set to off for this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turn Off or On the ability of an
extension COS to be changed via
Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging
information.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-42
20-13-44
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension user to
turn Background Music on and off.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
This option must be on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through
Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
which has this option enabled also
hears the queue alarm.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to use the Station Relocation
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Cordless Telephone Connection
3

2 - 389
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
20-13-51
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
 This applies only to the
multiline terminal.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent Display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are listed (On) or
unlisted (Off) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
To make a call using a cordless single line telephone:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access Code and telephone number.
To answer a call using a cordless single line telephone:
When the multiline terminal is ringing, the incoming call can be answered by the cordless single line
telephone user by going off-hook, when ringing line preference is assigned for the multiline terminal.
To transfer a call from a cordless single line telephone to its associated multiline terminal:
1.
The multiline terminal user goes off-hook.
2.
The single line telephone user goes on-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
multiline terminal).
2 - 390
Cordless Telephone Connection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone:
1.
The single line telephone user goes off-hook (at this time, the call is automatically connected to the
single line telephone).
2.
The multiline terminal user goes on-hook.
To use Hookflash:
Refer to the operation for Single Line Telephone Access.
Cordless Telephone Connection
2 - 391
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 392
Cordless Telephone Connection
Data Line Security
Description
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as Camp-On
or Override) and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent disruption of data
transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine.
Conditions

When a multiline terminal and a single line telephone are assigned for Data Line
Security, Tone Override/Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not
heard over the handset speaker.

Data Line Security protects a station from Barge-In, even when Barge-In is
allowed in Class of Service.

When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data
Line Security, a constant busy tone is heard.
D
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Data Line Security
2 - 393
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-35
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive off-hook signals.
 20-09-07 must be set to 0
also for this to be effective.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension user to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
2
3




Operation
None
2 - 394
Data Line Security
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Delayed Ringing
Description
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a
programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines, Secondary Incoming Extensions, Virtual
Extensions, and Call Arrival Keys.
Conditions

An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset (depending on
programming).

Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the
telephone.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Central Office Calls, Answering
Secondary Incoming Extension
Delayed Ringing
2 - 395
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Virtual Extensions
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
14-07-01
15-06-01
2 - 396
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Trunk Access Map Setup
Trunk Access Map for
Extensions
Set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets the access options for
trunks. Ring Group programming
overrides Access Map
programming.
Assign Trunk Access Maps to
extensions.
2
3
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access
only
2 = Incoming access
only
3 = Access only when
trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access
and access when trunk
on Hold
5 = Incoming access
and access when trunk
on Hold
6 = Incoming and
Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access,
outgoing access and
access when trunk
on Hold
Trunk Access Maps:
1~200
Default:
Access Maps 1~200 =
Trunk Ports 1~200
assigned with option 7
access (incoming and
outgoing access and
access when trunk is
on Hold).

Trunks 1~200
(default = 1)

Delayed Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
15-07-01
15-09-01
15-11-01
20-04-03
22-01-04
22-02-01
22-08-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Assign CAR/SIE/VE function keys
(code 03 + extension number) or
CO function keys (Code 01 +
trunk port) on multiline terminals.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)

Virtual Extension Ring
Assignment
Individually program an extension
Virtual Extension key(s) to either
Ring or Not Ring.
Mode 1:
0 = Not Ring
1 = Ring
(default = 0)

Virtual Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment
Assign the delayed ringing options
for an extension Virtual Extension
or Virtual Extension Group Answer
keys (defined in Program 15-09).
KY01 Mode 1:
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
(default = 0)

System Options for Virtual
Extensions – CAR/SIE/Virtual
Extension Delay Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual
Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring
the extension after this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this time
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Set the feature type for the trunk
you are programming.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Programmable Function Keys
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Delayed Ringing
If an incoming trunk call rings
longer than the DIL No Answer
Time (Program 22-01-04), it routes
to the destination you specify in
this option. Determine if the
destination should be a Ring
Group, In-Skin/External Voice
Mail, or Central Voice Mail.
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
2
3




2 - 397
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To answer Delay Ringing calls:
1.
Go off-hook.
- OR -
Press Answer.
- OR -
Press the flashing key.

Either Trunk key or CAR/SIE/VE key.
To program a CAR/SIE/VE key on a phone:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 752.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Dial 03.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key.
6.
Press Hold once for Immediate Ring (skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring).
7.
Dial the mode number in which the key rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
8.
Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring, or Skip to step 10.
2 - 398
Delayed Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.
Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings.
1 = Day 1
2 = Night 1
3 = Midnight 1
4 = Rest 1
5 = Day 2
6 = Night 2
7 = Midnight 2
8 = Rest 2
10.
Press Speaker.
Delayed Ringing
Issue 12.0
2 - 399
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 400
Delayed Ringing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Department Calling
Description
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension in a programmed Department
Group (64 Department Groups available) by dialing the group pilot number. For example, this would let a
caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department pilot number. The caller does not
have to know any Sales department extension number.
Two types of routing are available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With
Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions
ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension.
Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions in the group. If a user directly dials a
busy extension in a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available
group member. The system follows Program 22-15-01~22-15-07 for playing the periodic VRS message.
Department Calling also allows each Department group to transfer calls to a predefined Speed dial bin
(Program 24-05-01) immediately or after a Delayed time (Program 24-02-08). Internal and transferred
calls are not supported for Delayed transfer.
DID and Overflow Routing
Three types of Overflow are supported for DID calls:

Immediate Transfer:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (58) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using the service codes in Program 11-11-25 (set) and Program 11-11-26 (cancel).
When this feature is activated, any DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number go immediately to
the transfer destination and do not ring anyone in the group. To set up the destination you use
Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. Once these programs are set, the access code assigned in
Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination as needed.
Department Calling
2 - 401
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Delay:
This feature can be enabled or disabled by using a (59) key programmed in Program 15-07. It can
also be done by using service codes assigned in Program 11-11-28 (set) and Program 11-11-29
(cancel). When this feature is activated, any DID call pointed directly to the Pilot follows one of the
two patterns:


If all available members are busy or logged out, the call goes immediately to the transfer destination.

If agents are logged in and not busy, the call comes in and hunts through the idle members until the time
in Program 24-02-08 expires. Once this time expires, the call is routed to the transfer destination
assigned in Program 24-05 and Program 13-04. After these programs are assigned, the access code
assigned in Program 11-11-27 can be used to change the destination as needed.
DND:
This feature can be enabled by using a (60) key programmed in Program 15-07 or by using service
codes assigned in Program 11-11-30 (set) and Program 11-11-31 (cancel). When this feature is
activated any DID pointed directly to the Pilot gets a busy tone and the call does not route.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user
removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension.
When they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code
to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group. A multiline terminal can optionally have a function
key programmed to login/logout.
Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting abilities. Hunting sets the conditions under
which calls to a Department Group pilot number cycle through the members of the group. The hunting
choices are:

Busy
A call to the pilot number hunts past only a busy group member to the first available extension.

Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group has
Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call does not hunt to the next
available extension.

Busy or Not Answered
A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
continues to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up.
2 - 402
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot
number queues for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting
calls. If a display telephone is waiting in queue, the user sees: WAITING (group name). If a transferred
call in queue is an outside call, and the system has a DSP daughter board installed with the VRS, the
queued caller hears, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes
free.”
The VRS also can transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to Voice Response System (VRS) on
page 2-1973 for information on setting up the VRS.
The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:

Busy on a call

In Do Not Disturb

Call Forwarded

Logged Out
Conditions

When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL may follow overflow programming
(Program 22-01-04 and Program 22-08-01).

If all agents are logged out and an intercom call is made to the Department Group, the
caller hears a busy signal.

Extensions in a Department Group which have Call Forwarding enabled are not included in
the call hunt. The extension to which the user is forwarded does not receive the hunted
calls. When you use the automatic Department Step calling (Program 16-01-03) it hunts
only to members with the same or lower priority.

Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.

A virtual extension can be programmed to receive multiple calls which can camp-on to the
extension – no analog port is required.

An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group Pilot number. If unanswered,
the call recalls (depending on programming) the transferring extension after the Transfer
Recall Time (Program 24-02-04).

Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail.

When Program 16-01-05 is set to (1) Automatic, all telephones in the Department group
Ring for ICM calls & DID calls Directed to the Department Group Pilot Number only.

The Overflow feature is supported only for DID calls pointed directly to the Pilot Number.
POTS lines and transferred DIDs ignore the Overflow settings.
Department Calling
2 - 403
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45-01-01
it only works as priority mode no matter what Program 16-01-02 is set to for that
Department Group.

Program 16-01-05 (Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation) does not work to a
Secondary Department Group.

Department Queuing will not work to Secondary Group Extensions.
Default Setting
Disabled
Priority Routing
IF
CALL
IF
Telephone on a call
Telephone on a call
Priority 1
Priority 1
CALL
Priority 2
IF
Priority 1
Telephone on a call
Priority 2
Priority 2
CALL
Priority 3
Priority 3
Priority 3
Figure 2-2 Department Calling Priority Call Routing
2 - 404
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Circular Routing
CALL 1
CALL 2
CALL 3
CALL 4
Figure 2-3 Department Calling Circular Routing
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Department Calling
2 - 405
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Required Component(s)
VRS for Messaging
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Forwarding
Department Step Calling
Transfer
VM8000 InMail
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
– Dial
Assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
11-11-25
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Setup for Each
Extension Group
Set the service code to activate
immediate automatic transfer for
ICM and transferred calls to
Department Groups.
MLT, SLT
(default = 602)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Automatic
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Set the service code to deactivate
immediate automatic transfer for
ICM and transferred calls to
Department Groups.
MLT, SLT
(default = 603)
11-11-26
2 - 406
2
3



Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Destination of
Automatic Transfer Each
Extension Group
Set the service code for setting the
destination for immediate
automatic transfer for ICM and
transferred calls to Department
Groups.
MLT
(default = 604)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer for Every Extension
Group
Set the delayed transfer
destination Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 605)
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Delayed
Transfer Cancellation for Each
Extension Group
Cancel the delayed transfer
destination Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 606)
11-12-09
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Change to STG
(Department Group) All Ring
Set the service code for ringing all
members of a Department Group.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
11-16-10
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– (Department) STG All Ring
Mode
Assign the Single Digit
(post-dialing) Service Code for All
Member Ring.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a Department Calling key
(46) so extension users can install
or remove themselves from the
Department Calling Group.
Additional keys can also be
assigned for Department Group
features immediate calling
destination (58), delayed calling
destination (59) and DND
destination (60).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
11-11-27
11-11-28
11-11-29
16-01-01
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Name
Assign a name to the Extension
(Department) Groups.
Maximum 12
characters
(default not assigned)
16-01-02
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Calling
Cycle
Set the routing cycle for calls into
a department (i.e., when a user
dials the department pilot
number). The system can ring the
highest priority extension available
(Priority Routing, 0) or cycle in
circular order to a new idle
extension for each new call
(Circular Routing, 1).
0 = Normal Routing
(Priority)
1 = Easy – UCD
Routing (Circular)
(default = 0)
Department Calling
2
3








2 - 407
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Set how the system routes an
Intercom call to a busy
Department Group member. The
caller can hear busy tone (0) or
overflow to the first available
Department Group member (1).
This option is for Intercom calls to
an extension, not a pilot number.
0 = Normal (Intercom
caller to busy
department member
hears busy)
1 = Circular (Intercom
callers to busy
department member
routes to idle member)
(default = 0)

Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Hunting Mode
Set if an unanswered call should
hunt once stopping at the last
member tried (0) or continually
hunt through the idle members (1).
0 = Last extension is
called and hunting is
stopped
1 = Circular
(default = 0)

Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Extension Group All
Ring Mode Operation
Set if all members of the group
should ring Automatically or use
the service code defined in
Program 11-12-09. Selecting
automatic overrides the settings of
Programs 16-01-03 and 16-01-04.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
(default = 0)
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – STG Withdraw Mode
Set the STG withdraw mode for
each department group.
0 = Disable (Camp On)
1 = Enable (Overflow
Mode)
(default = 0)
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Call Recall Restriction
for STG
Determine whether or not an
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall
the extension from which it was
transferred.
0 = Disable (Recall)
1 = Enable (No Recall)
(default = 0)

16-01-09
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Hunting No
Answer Time
Set the time a call rings a
Department Group extension
before hunting occurs.
64800 (seconds)
(default = 15)

16-01-10
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Enhanced Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each
Extension (Department) Group.
0 = No queuing
1 = Hunting When
Busy
2 = Hunting When Not
Answered
3 = Hunting When
Busy or No Answer
(default = 0)
16-01-03
16-01-04
16-01-05
16-01-06
16-01-07
2 - 408
Department Group Basic Data
Setup – Department Routing
When Busy (Auto Step Call)
3



Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
16-02-01
16-03-01
20-06-01
20-09-07
20-11-17
20-13-06
20-13-14
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Department Group Assignment
for Extensions
Secondary Department Group
Class of Service for Extensions
2
Set up the Department Group
called by the pilot number and the
extension priority when a group is
called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.
Department Groups
1~64
Priority 1~999
Default = 1
extensions in
Department Group 1
with priority in port
order:
Port 1 priority = 1
Port 256 priority = 256
Assign extensions to multiple
Department Groups and set the
priority assignment. Each
Secondary Department Group can
have up to 16 extensions
assigned.
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Priority Order
0~999
(default not assigned)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1



Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
in a Department Group ability to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allow a busy extension to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Department Calling
3
2 - 409
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-02-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup –
Incoming Type
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a
Department Group, assign Service
Type 4 for each Night Service
Mode. Refer to Program 22-07-01.
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial
tone if no VRS
installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
For each trunk assigned Service
Type 4 in Program 22-02-01
above, assign the DIL destination
as the Department Group pilot
number (as assigned in Program
11-07-01).
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
System Options for Transfer –
Message Wait Ring Interval Time
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
without message waiting lamps,
this is the time between
intermittent ringing. If this value is
set to 0, the system rings once.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
24-02-08
System Options for Transfer –
Delayed Transfer Timer for All
Department Groups
Determine the time a call should
ring a Department Group before
transferring the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
24-05-01
Department Group Transfer
Target Setup
Assign the Speed Dial bin to each
Department Group to hold the
destination for the immediate
automatic transfer of ICM and
transferred calls to the Department
Group feature.
0~1999
(default = 1999)
22-07-01
24-02-05
DIL Assignment
2
3





Operation
To call a department group:
1.
Go off-hook.
2.
Dial department extension number.

3.
The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the department group.
Optional: To manually ring all members of the group, dial the single digit service code assigned for
All Member Ring (Program 11-16-10).
2 - 410
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To log out of your Department Calling Group:

While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
1.
Press Speaker
2.
Dial 650 + 1.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your Department Calling Group:

When you log back in, Department Calling routes calls to your extension.
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 650 + 0.
- OR -
Press Department Calling Log In key (Program 15-07-01 or SC 751: 46).

The key goes out when you log back in.
To change the Department Group Overflow Destination:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 604 + Department Group (01 ~ 64).
3.
Dial 01 ~ 08 (Refer to Program 24-05).
4.
Dial the destination the calls route to.
5.
Press Hold.
Department Calling
2 - 411
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 412
Department Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Department Step Calling
Description
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step
Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another
Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an
extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.
Conditions

If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service
Code (default code = 2).

A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned (code 36).

In Program 20-08-12, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension user ability to use Department
Step Calling.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Department Calling
Programmable Function Keys
Department Step Calling
2 - 413
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-07
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Step Call
If required, customize the Step
Call service code used by an
extension user.
MLT, SLT
(default = 708)
11-16-01
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Step Call
If required, change the
Department Step Calling Single
Digit Service Code.
(default = 2)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key Department
Step Calling (code 36).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-08-12
2 - 414
Class of Service for Extensions
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
2
3



Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Department Step Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Operation
To make a Step Call:
1.
Place a call to a busy Department Group member.
- OR -
Place a call to a Department Group pilot number.
2.
Dial Department Step Code (2) to call the next available Department Group member.
3.
Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.

You step through Department Groups set in Program 16-02-01.
Department Step Calling
2 - 415
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 416
Department Step Calling
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Description
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press
a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call
Progress tones.
Conditions

Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or Wireless DECT
(SIP) Terminals.

Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode.

Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode, but only for
internal calls. The tone is still heard for external dialing.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
2 - 417
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
11-11-19
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Key Touch
Tone On/Off
If required, change the service
code to enable or disable the Key
Touch Tone.
MLT
(default = 724)
2
3

Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial 724.
2 - 418
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Dial Tone Detection
Description
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the Telco or PBX
when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or
dialing # 9 and the trunk number), the system drops the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user
accesses the trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically using a feature like
Last Number Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group.
Refer to the chart under Programming for more information.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Central Office Calls, Placing
Dial Tone Detection
2 - 419
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Last Number Redial
Save Number Dialed
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
10-09-01
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
14-02-05
2 - 420
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Dial
Tone Detection for Manually
Accessed Trunks
If dial tone detection is enabled, be
sure to allocate at least one circuit
for dial tone detection [ICM/Trunk
(0) or Trunk (2)].
Enable/Disable dial tone detection
for directly accessed trunks. If
disabled, the system outdials on
the trunks without monitoring for
dial tone.
2
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available

0 = Dial Tone Detection
Not Used
1 = Dial Tone Detection
Used
(default = 0)

3
Dial Tone Detection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
14-02-11
21-01-04
21-01-05
21-01-06
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Next
Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Tone Detection Time
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Disconnect Time When
Dial Tone Not Detected
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Dial Pause at First Digit
Dial Tone Detection
If Enabled, the system skips over
a trunk if dial tone is not detected.
This option pertains to calls placed
using Call Appearance (CAP)
Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
Dialed. It does not pertain to line
key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
If dial tone detection is Enabled,
the system waits this time for the
Telco to return dial tone. When the
time expires, the system assumes
dial tone is not present. To disable
this time (and have the system
wait continuously), enter 0.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
If 14-02-11 is Enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Speed Dial,
ARS, Last Number Redial or Save
Number dialed. It does not pertain
to line key or Direct Trunk Access
calls.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3)
If Dial Tone Detection is Disabled,
the system waits this time before
sending dialed digits. If using Dial
Tone Detection, this time should
be set longer than the time set in
Program 21-01-05, otherwise, if
this time is set shorter than
Program 21-01-05, Dial Tone
Detection is satisfied and Program
21-01-05 is disregarded (not
used).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1)
2
3




2 - 421
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-10 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction
Method
14-02-05
14-02-11
Result if dial tone
not present . . .
Press a line key
- or Dial #9+ Trunk
number
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk drops
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk reroutes after time-out
Dial a Trunk
Group code
- or Automatically
through a feature
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
2 - 422
Dial Tone Detection
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Dialing Number Preview
Description
Dialing Number Preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a number before the
system dials it. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions

An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.

To place an outgoing call, an extension user must have outgoing access to a line, CAP or
trunk group key.

If the system has VRS or VM8000 InMail installed, you must press  to preview a number
(Version 3000 or lower software).

With Version 4000 ~ Version 6000 software, you must press  to preview a number.

With Version 7000 or higher software, pressing  to preview a number is not required.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display
Required Component(s)
None
Dialing Number Preview
2 - 423
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Voice Response System (VRS)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
20-06-01
20-08-05
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Dial
Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to extensions.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Number Preview.
2
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (multiline terminal only):
1.
Do not lift the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial .

2 - 424
Skip to step 3 if at Version 3000 and lower and a VRS or VM8000 InMail is not installed or, Version
7000 or higher.
Dialing Number Preview
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
To preview any number, dial the number you want to call.
To preview a Speed Dial – System/Group number, press Redial and dial the
Speed Dial – System/Group bin number you want to call.

4.
Issue 12.0
The number is displayed.
To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a Line/Trunk Group key.

If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press Speaker instead.
- OR -
To dial an Intercom number, press Speaker.
- OR -
To cancel the number without dialing it out, press Hold.
Dialing Number Preview
2 - 425
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 426
Dialing Number Preview
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Digital Trunk Clocking
Description
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CD-CP00-US has a built-in clock source for all digital trunk blades. Digital
trunk blades are connected via an internal PLO (Phase Locked Oscillator) to derive Primary Clock from
the network in priority order. If priority is set up incorrectly, or if two primary clocks are coming in, slips
may occur causing improper data synchronization. The PLO, equipped with the UNIVERGE SV8100
CD-CP00-US is the timing source for all digital trunk blades in the system. The PLO synchronizes the
system and clocks signals from another office. When the UNIVERGE SV8100 is a clock receiver office,
the PLO generates the clock signal according to the source clock signals received from the source office
in the network. The source clock signals are extracted from digital trunk blades and are supplied to the
PLO.
The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows:
1.
CD-PRTA
2.
CD-CCTA (External)
3.
CD-2BRIA
4.
CD-CP00-US
Conditions

If multiple PRIs exist, the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier.

If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system
begins to count forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI.

If multiple BRIs exist and no CD-PRTA or CD-CCTA (External) exists, the SV8100
CD-CP00-US chooses the first BRI that synchronized with the carrier.

If there is one CD-PRTA and the one being used for the source goes down, the SV8100
CD-CP00-US looks to see if there are any BRIs installed in the system. If there are no
BRIs, the SV8100 CD-CP00-US becomes the new synchronization source. The reason for
this is when a CD-PRTA is installed in the system, all T1s must be assigned as
(INTERNAL). T1 (INTERNAL) is not a clocking priority.
Default Setting
None
Digital Trunk Clocking
2 - 427
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
None
Required Component(s)

CD-CP00-US

CD-2BRIA
-ORCD-PRTA, CD-CCTA
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
K-CCIS – T1
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Feature Examples
Digital Trunk Clocking Examples:
If multiple PRIs exist, the first one that synchronized with the carrier is chosen. In this example, the PRI
in 02 was the first to synchronize with the carrier; therefore, it is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1
2 - 428
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down, the system begins to count
forward in slot numbers looking for the next available PRI. In this example, the PRI in 02 went down, so
the system now begins looking forward in slot numbers for the next PRI to use as the clock source.
Figure 2-5 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 2
In this example, the PRI in 05 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the PLO
synchronization source. The PRI in 05 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot
numbers to find the next PLO source. In this case, the PRI in 02 was the next source because after it
looks through the rest of the slots in the system, it starts over with 01.
Figure 2-6 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits in the system. There can only be one T1 circuit assigned
as EXTERNAL in the system, so the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-7 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4
Digital Trunk Clocking
2 - 429
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
In this example, there are multiple T1 circuits and a BRI circuit. Since the T1 assigned as EXTERNAL
has higher priority than a BRI, the T1 EXTERNAL is the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-8 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5
In this example, there is a PRI, multiple T1s, and a BRI. The PRI was the PLO synchronization source
until it went down. The BRI then becomes the PLO synchronization source because when a PRI is in the
system, T1s cannot be assigned as EXTERNAL, which are not in the PLO synchronization source
priority list.
Figure 2-9 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6
If multiple BRIs exist but no PRI or T-1 EXTERNAL exists, the system chooses the first BRI that
synchronized with the carrier. In this example, the BRI in 04 synchronized with the carrier first and
became the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-10 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7
2 - 430
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
In this scenario, the PRI was the clocking source until it went down. There are no other PRIs, T1
(Externals), or BRIs in the system. The CD-CP00-US now becomes the PLO synchronization source.
Figure 2-11 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8
Guide to Feature Programming
Refer to the related features for programming.
Operation
Refer to the related features for details.
Digital Trunk Clocking
2 - 431
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 432
Digital Trunk Clocking
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher system software, more flexible schedule settings in the DID Conversion
table are provided

Direct Inward Dialing supports day of week and time of day scheduling.

The Dial-In Conversion table can support a maximum of 500 tables.

V7000 Enhancement License (0036) required.
Description
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers
who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local
exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number
926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call
screening to complete the call.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) requires DID service from Telco.
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:

DID Dialed Number Translation

Flexible DID Service Compatibility

DID Intercept

DID Camp-On
There are 20 DID Translation tables that can be divided between 2000 entries.
DID Dialed Number Translation
DID allows different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID
service from Telco. If you cannot buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301~556), use the
translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits
501~756 to extension numbers 301~556.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has 2000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among
the 20 DID Translation Tables. One translation is made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can
put all 2000 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 2000 entries
among the 20 tables.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 433
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it.
When the DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name is displayed.
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
With three-digit service, the Telco sends three digits to the system for translation. Be sure to program
your system for compatibility with the provided Telco service. For example, if the Telco sends four digits,
make sure you set up the translation tables to accept four digits.
The system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID trunks can be either wink
start, immediate start, 2nd Dial or Delay.
DID Camp-On
DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept
disabled. With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No Answer
Time. It then diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without DID
Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension hears only busy tone.
DID Routing Through the VRS
DID calls can optionally route through the VRS. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant
Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they hear a second greeting with
additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, “Thank you for
calling. Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator.” If the caller
inadvertently dials an extension that does not exist, they could hear, “The extension you dialed is
unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or dial # to leave a message so we can call you back.”
You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VRS Messages) to the numbers in each Translation
Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should
play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to
extensions 401~449, and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant.

If you translate a DID so that it hits a specific VRS message, you must disable Program 25-01-02. Otherwise, the
outside caller waits while hearing the DISA dial tone.
The system allows an extension to be defined as a 1-digit number that can be dialed by the outside
caller on a DID/DISA trunk using the VRS. The outside caller can access the desired extension/
department group by dialing only one digit after the system answers the call. If the same number is used
as the first digit of an extension number and the 1-digit access code for DID/DISA, the outside caller
cannot access the extension.
Example:
If 2 is defined as a 1-digit access code to department group 300, outside callers cannot access
extensions 200~299 directly.
2 - 434
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
SMDR Includes Dialed Number
The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name (entered in system programming) or the number
the incoming caller dialed (i.e., the dialed DID digits). This allows you to analyze the SMDR report based
on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to an ISDN trunk.)
DID Intercept
DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three DID Intercepts:

Vacant Number Intercept
If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can reroute
the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without Vacant
Number Intercept, the caller hears error tone after misdialing.

Busy Intercept
Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy Intercept
is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or
Voice Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming.

Ring-No-Answer Intercept
Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the
destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to
the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time. If
Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside
caller hangs up.
Delayed DID
Delayed DID allows a user a programmed time to answer a call. If the call is not answered in this time,
the system automatically answers the call. An outside party hears a voice message, music, or dial tone
according to the following conditions:

If VRS is installed, the system sends a recorded message from the VRS.

If a customer-provided audio system (example: tape recorder) is connected, an error message or
music can be played for the caller.

If equipment is not connected for an announcement, the system sends a unique dial tone to the
outside caller.
This feature is not available for the normal incoming call on ISDN trunks.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 435
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
DID Intercept Destination for Each DID Number
With this feature the system allows you to program a DID Intercept destination for a DID number which
receives no answer or busy call. The system can be programmed to use a trunk ring group, the VRS or
the voice mail as the programmed destination. Each vacant number intercept for a DID number can have
two destinations. The first destination is for an invalid DID number, busy or no answer extension. The
second destination is for a no answer trunk ring group.

If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call does not forward
to VoiceMail.
For busy or no answer intercept calls, a third destination can be defined in Program 22-12. If the first and
third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third
destination after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not programmed, but the
third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.
This feature works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in Program 22-02. Other types of trunks
may use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature is not yet supported.
With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature, when the primary destination (Program 22-11-05) is
set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is:
1. Busy Intercept = Forward Busy
2. Ring-No-Answer Intercept = Forward RNA
When the secondary destination (Program 22-11-06) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is
based on the first destination routing. When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a
busy intercept, the Voice Mail protocol forwards busy calls. When the incoming call is routed to the first
destination by a ring-no-answer intercept, the protocol forwards ring-no-answer. The Voice Mail transfers
the calls to the mailbox number defined in Program 22-11-02.

Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table (Program 22-11 or Program 22-17-01). If a valid DID number
is not entered, there is no ring destination for any incoming call to that number (the calls do not ring any extension in
the system).

If the first programmed destination is a Ring Group and the second Destination is Voice Mail, the call does not forward
to VoiceMail.
Calls Can Follow Ring Group Programming for Transferring Calls
An option was added to Program 22-11 which allows you to determine if the DID routing should use the
programmed ring group entry in Program 22-12-01 when transferring calls from a busy or no answer
number.
If DID digits match the conversion table but there is no extension, no Voice Mail, or Voice Mail did not
boot up, use Program 22-11-11 to decide what to do with the incoming call. Go to (1) normal ring
(default) or (0) caller hears a Busy Tone.
2 - 436
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
DID Call by Time Schedule
DID Call by Time Schedule allows for 100 (Version 6000 or lower) or 500 (Version 7000 or higher)
programmed DID Conversion table entries (Program 22-17-01) that can be routed based on Time
Patterns. Each DID Conversion table has a maximum of eight programmable Time Patterns and each
Time Pattern can reference one of the 2000 different Dial-In Conversion table entries in Program
22-11-01.
Example 1 (Automatic Change)
00:00
09:00
12:00
13:00
00:00
18:00
Time Pattern
PRG 22-17
1
2
3
4
5
PRG 22-11-01
1
2
3
2
1
102 incoming
101 incoming
100 incoming
PRG 22-11-02
100 incoming 101 incoming
Program 22-11-01 and Program 22-11-02
Table No.
Receive Dial
Transfer Dial
1
No setting
100
2
No setting
101
3
No setting
102
Program 22-17
Table No.
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
Start Time
End Time
PRG 22-11
1~100
1111
1
00:00
09:00
1
2
09:00
12:00
2
3
12:00
13:00
3
4
13:00
18:00
2
5
18:00
00:00
1
6
00:00
00:00
0
7
00:00
00:00
0
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 437
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program 22-17 (Continued)
8
00:00
00:00
0
Table 2-11 Example 2 (Manual Change)
Program 22-17
Table No.
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
Start Time
End Time
PRG 22-11
1~100
1111
1
00:00
00:00
1
2
00:00
00:00
2
3
00:00
00:00
3
4
00:00
00:00
0
5
00:00
00:00
0
6
00:00
00:00
0
7
00:00
00:00
0
8
00:00
00:00
0
DID Call by Day of Week Schedule (Version 7000 or higher)
DID Call by weekly schedule allows for 500 programmed DID Conversion table entries (Program
22-17-01 and Program 22-17-05) that can be routed based on Day of Week Patterns. Each DID
Conversion table has a maximum of eight programmable Time Patterns and Day of Week Pattern can
reference one of the 2000 different Dial-In Conversion table entries in Program 22-11-01.
Example 1 (Monday - Friday)
2 - 438
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Example 2 (Saturday)
Example 3 (Sunday)
Program 22-11-01 and Program 22-11-02
Table No.
Receive Dial
Transfer Dial
1
None
101
2
None
102
3
None
103
4
None
300
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 439
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-12 Example 1 – Monday ~ Friday
Program 22-17
Table No.
1
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
02: Start Time
03: End Time
04: PRG 22-11
734
1
00:00
08:00
4 (Ext. 300)
734
2
08:00
17:00
1 (Ext. 101)
734
3
17:00
00:00
4 (Ext. 300)
05: Day
Mon-Fri: 1 (On)
Table 2-13 Example 2 – Saturday
Program 22-17
Table No.
2
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
02: Start Time
03: End Time
04: PRG 22-11
734
1
00:00
09:00
4 (Ext. 300)
734
2
09:00
13:00
2 (Ext. 102)
734
3
13:00
15:00
3 (Ext. 103)
734
4
15:00
00:00
4 (Ext. 300)
05: Day
Sat: 1 (On)
Table 2-14 Example 3 – Sunday
Program 22-17
Table No.
Receive Dial
Time Pattern
02: Start Time
03: End Time
04: PRG 22-11
05: Day
3
734
1
00:00
00:00
4 (Ext. 300)
Sun: 1 (On)
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements
Allowing this equipment to operate without providing proper answer supervision signaling violates Part
68 rules.
This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network when the DID
trunk is:

Answered by the called station.

Answered by the attendant.

Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user.

Routed to a dial prompt.
2 - 440
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched
Telephone Network. Permissible exceptions are when:

A call is unanswered.

A busy tone is received.

A reorder tone is received.
When ordering DID service, provide the Telco with the following information:
UNIVERGE SV8100
KF = US:NIFKF07B
MF = US:NIFMF07B
PF = US:NIFPF07B
DID Facility Interface Code
02RV2-T
DID Service Order Code
9.0F
DID Answer Supervision Code
A S.2
DID USOC Jack Type
RJ21X
Conditions

Analog DID requires the installation of a CD-4DIOPA Blade (provides four DID ports).
Depending on programming, the system may assign both trunk and extension ports (if OPX
is selected in Program 10-03-01) when this blade is installed.

DID service must be purchased from your local telephone company.

DID Intercept for each DID number works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 3 in
Program 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, but the DID intercept feature
for each DID number is not yet supported.

When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call
is ringing to their telephone.

Direct Inward Lines (DILs) also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension,
virtual extension, or Department Group directly.

DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.

The Off-Hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options. Refer to Off-Hook
Signaling for specific details.

DID trunks do not ring external page speakers. Only trunks defined as normal in Program
22-02-01 ring external page speakers.

To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.

SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
enabled, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 441
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).

When defining trunks as DID or DID Mode in Program 22-02-01, DID translation (Program
22-11 or Program 22-17) must be used, even if the incoming digits match the extension
number.

When using DID Call by Time Schedule and breaking out the Time Patterns, set the start
time to 00:00 and end time to 00:00 for this feature to operate correctly. Refer to DID Call
by Time Schedule on page 2-437 for more details.

DID Call by Time Schedule Priority is given to the pattern that is set manually. However,
when a time pattern changes with the time schedules set in Program 22-17, the pattern
applied by the Manual change is canceled and the Time Pattern is given priority.

When Transfer Operation Mode is set to busy, call queuing must be turned off for it to work.

Incoming calls on T1/ANI trunks can only follow Program 22-11-01. They do not follow
Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.

When a name is assigned to a DID in Program 22-11-03, the name is displayed during a
ringing DID call. When the call is transferred or forwarded, the name is not displayed until
the call is answered.
Default Setting
Disabled
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External
Programmable Function Keys
Station Message Detail Recording
Transfer
2 - 442
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-03-01
10-09-01
14-05-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
Trunk Group – Trunk group
Number
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Set up and confirm the basic
configuration data for each blade.
This program represents different
data depending on the blade
installed in the slot. Please refer
the SV8100 Programming Manual
for a more detailed description of
this program.
The assigned data
varies depending on
the blade installed in
the slot. Please refer
to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for a more detailed
description of the
10-03-XX programs.
If the system has DTMF DID
trunks, be sure to reserve at least
one circuit for analog trunk DTMF
reception (type 0 or 2). There
must be an available receiver for
each DTMF DID trunk.
Use the following as a guide when
allocating DTMF receivers:
In light traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every 10
devices that use them.
In heavy traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every five
devices that use them.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available.
Put DID trunks in the same trunk
group (other than group 1). If you
have different types of DID trunks,
put each type in a separate trunk
group.
Trunks 1-200
Trunk Group 1-100
Priority 1-200
Default = All trunks in
Trunk Group 1 with
priority in trunk order.
Trunk 1 priority = 1
Trunk 200 priority =
200.
2
3



2 - 443
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
20-09-01
20-13-23
21-01-02
22-01-06
2 - 444
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign line or Call Appearance
(CAP) Keys for DID trunks
(Trunks: 1~200).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Turn Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the time-out time for DID
callers that do not dial. After this
time, the DID call routes according
to Vacant Number Intercept
programming.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DID Ring-No-Answer
Time
Set the DID Ring No Answer
(RNA) Intercept time. In systems
with RNA Intercept, the DID call
rings the destination extension for
this time, and then rings Intercept
Ring Group.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
2
3






Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
22-02-01
22-04-01
22-09-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
DID Basic Data Setup – Expected
Number of Digits
For each Night Service Mode,
enter service type 3 when the
trunk should be a DID trunk.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Assign extensions to Ring Groups.
Calls ring the extensions
according to programming in
Program 22-06.
Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.
For each DID Translation Table
(1~20), enter the number of digits
the table expects to receive from
the CO (eight maximum). For
example, for a table used with
3-digit DID service, enter 3.
1~8
(default = 4)
2



22-09-02
DID Basic Data Setup – Received
Vacant Number Operation
Enable/Disable Vacant Number
Intercept.
0 = Disconnect
1 = Transfer
(default = 0)

22-10-01
DID Translation Table Setup
Assign the start and end range of
DID Translation Table entries
(1~2000) to each DID Translation
Table (1~20).
0~2000
(0 = No Setting)
default:
1st:
1 Start – 1, End – 100
2 Start – 101, End –
200
3 Start – 201, End –
300
4 Start – 301, End –
400
5~20 Start – 0, End – 0
2nd:
1~20 Start – 0, End – 0

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
3
2 - 445
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
22-11-01
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Received Number
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the digits
received by the system.
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
22-11-02
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Target Number
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
extension the system dials after
translation.
Maximum 24 digits
(default not assigned)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – DID Name
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the name
that should show on the dialed
extension display when it rings.
Maximum 12 digits
(default not assigned)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Transfer Operation
Mode
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
condition required to transfer the
call to the destination defined in
Program 22-11-05 and Program
22-11-06.
0 = No Transfer
1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Both
(default = 0)
22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 1
Define the 1st transfer destination
for each tables received number.
22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number
Conversion – Transfer
Destination Number 2
400 = Allows the outside party to
dial a different extension number
in the translation table (for
example, ring no answer to a
dialed number, the caller then
hears a dial tone, allowing them to
enter another Valid Extension
Number).
401 = Provides the caller with
DISA dialing options (requires
using the DISA password).
Note: This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.
 If the Transfer Destinations
are busy or receive no
answer, those calls are
transferred to the final
transfer destination (Program
22-10).
0 = No Setting
1~100 = Incoming
Group
101 = (Not Used)
102 = In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or InMail
201~264 = Extension
Group
400 = Valid Extension
Number
401 = DISA
501~548 = DISA/VRS
Message
1000~999 = Speed
Number
(000~999)
(default = 0)
22-11-03
22-11-04
22-11-07
22-11-08
2 - 446
2
3






DID Translation Number
Conversion – Call Waiting
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify whether or
not Call Waiting should be
allowed.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)

DID Translation Number
Conversion – Maximum Number
of DID Calls
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
maximum number of DID calls.
0~200 (0 = No Limit)
(default = 0)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
22-11-09
22-11-10
22-11-11
22-12-01
22-13-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Music On Hold
Source
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the source
of music to be used for DID trunks.
0 = IC/MOH Port
1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port
(default = 0)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – ACI Music Source
Port
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), if item 2 is
selected in Program 22-11-09,
specify the port to be used for the
source of music heard on DID
trunks.
When a sound source
type is 2 in above :
(0~96)
(default = 0)
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Ring Group
Transfer
Enable/Disable each conversion
table to follow the Ring Group
programming defined in Program
22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring
Group. If Program 22-11-05 : DID
Translation Number Conversion,
Transfer Destination Number 1
and Program 22-11-06 : DID
Translation Number Conversion,
Transfer Destination Number 2 are
set, the priority of transferring is in
this order: Program 22-11-05 then
Program 22-11-06 then if Program
22-11-11 is enabled, Program
22-12-01.
0 = Disable (Caller
hears Ringback)
1 = Enable (Go to
normal ring)
(default = 1)
For each DID Translation Table,
program the DID Intercept
destination. The destination can
be a Ring Group, In-Skin/External
Voice Mail, or Centralized Voice
Mail. This program is used when
there is no destination
programmed in Program 22-11-05.
It is unrelated to Program 22-11-06
and Program 22-11-07.
0 (No Setting)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
(default = 1)
Assign the DID trunk groups to
translation tables. If all the DID
trunks use the same type of DID
service, you may have only one
DID trunk group and one DID
Translation Table (with many
entries).
0~20
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
DID Intercept Ring Group
DID Trunk Group to Translation
Table Assignment
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2
3





2 - 447
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
25-01-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode
Determine whether the system
should use option 0 or option 1
(Use dial conversion table) for
calls.
0 = Extension Number
Service Code Specify
(Intercom)
1 = Use Dial
Conversion Table
(default = 0)


25-01-03
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
Determine whether the system
should use option 0 or option 1 for
calls.
0 = Normal
1 = Alarm
(default = 0)
25-02-01
DID/DISA VRS Message
For each trunk port and each night
mode, select the message source
(0 = No Message, 1 = VRS, 2 =
ACI, 3 =S LT), assign the VRS
message number to be used as
the Automated Attendant
Message for each trunk, which is
assigned as VRS/DISA [with VRS
= 01~48 (VRS message number),
with ACI = 1~4 or 01~16 (ACI
group number), with SLT = 1~8 or
01~64 (Department Group
number)].
0 = No Message
1 = VRS (01~100 VRS
Message Number)
2 = ACI (01~04 ACI
Group Number)
3 = Department
Groups (01~64
Extension Group
Number)
(default = 0)
For each trunk port, set what
happens to a call when the DISA
or Automated Attendant caller
dials incorrectly or waits too long
to dial. The call can either
disconnect (0) or Transfer to an
alternate destination (a ring group,
In-Skin/External, Centralized).
When setting the DISA and DID
Operating Mode, you make an
entry for each Night Service mode.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
104 (Speed Dial table
Program 25-15-01)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required.
(default = 0)
25-03-01
2 - 448
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With Incorrect Dialing
2
3


Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-04-01
25-05-01
25-06-02
25-07-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With No Answer/Busy
VRS/DISA Error Message
Assignment
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Destination
Number
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
For each trunk port (001~200), set
the operating mode of each DISA
trunk. This sets what happens to
the call when the DISA or
Automated Attendant caller calls a
busy or unanswered extension.
The call can either disconnect (0)
or Transfer to an alternate
destination (a ring group, In-Skin/
External, Centralized). When
setting the DISA and DID
Operating Mode, you make an
entry for each Night Service mode.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
104 (Speed Dial table
Program 25-15-01)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required.
(default = 0)
For each trunk that is answered by
the VRS, enter the VRS message
(1~48) the outside caller hears if
they dial incorrectly after answer. If
you enter 0, the call reroutes
according to Program 25-03 and
Program 25-04. Make one entry
for each Night Service mode.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Set up single digit dialing for
Automated Attendant callers. For
each VRS Message programmed
to answer outside calls, specify:
 The digit the Automated
Attendant caller dials (1~12,
where 10 = 0, 11 = and 12 =
#). (Keep in mind that if you
assign destinations to digits
three and four, outside callers
cannot dial system extensions
that begin with that digit.)
 The destination reached (four
digits maximum) when the
caller dials the single digit
code.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
After answering a VRS/DISA
trunk, the system waits this time
for the caller to dial the first digit of
the DISA password. If the caller
fails to dial in this time, the system
drops the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
2
3




2 - 449
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring
No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and Program 25-04).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Calling Time to Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of
the automatic answering
extension when an incoming DID
trunk call is received.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the
automatic answering extension
before an incoming DID trunk
caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
25-07-06
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the
ACI before an incoming DID trunk
caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
25-07-11
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after
receiving an incoming VRS/DISA
call before the system
automatically answers the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy
extension (and Program 25-04-01
is set to 0), the system plays busy
tone for this time before
disconnecting.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Delayed VRS Answer Time
Assign the delay time from
switching from a normal incoming
status to DID mode. If this time is
set to 0, the call switches to DID
mode immediately.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
E&M Tie Line Basic Setup – DID/
E&M Start Signaling
Set the start signaling mode for
DID and tie trunks. DID and tie
trunks can use either immediate
start or wink start signaling.
0 = 2nd Dial Tone
1 = Wink (default)
2 = Immediate
3 = Delay
(default = 1)

E&M Tie Line Basic Setup –
Receive Dial Type for E&M Tie
Line
For DID and tie trunks, set the
trunks signaling
type.
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
2 = MF
(default = 1)

25-07-02
25-07-04
25-07-05
25-07-13
25-07-14
34-01-01
34-01-02
2 - 450
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
2
3







Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Direct Call by Time Schedule:
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-10-35
Service Code Setup (for
Administrator) – Dial-In Mode
Switching
Assign the service code Dial-In
Mode Switching.
MLT, SLT
(default not assigned)
12-04-01
Holiday Night Service Switching
Define a yearly schedule of
holiday night-switch settings. This
schedule is used for the setting of
special days when the company is
expected to be closed, such as a
national holiday.
Night Mode Service
Group No.
01-32
Days and Months
0101~1231
Time Pattern No.
0~10
0 = No Setting
(default not assigned)
Assign a function key for
one-touch access to the Dial-In
Mode Switching setup code (Code
88).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance
Function Code)
(Service Code 752 by
default)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/ Disable an extension user
ability to manually change Dial-In
Modes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For each Night Service Mode,
enter service type 8 when the
trunk should be a DID (DDI) Mode
Switching trunk.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)

15-07-01
20-07-26
22-02-01
22-11-02
Programmable Function Keys
DID Translation Number
Conversion – Target Number
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
For each DID Translation Table
entry (1~2000), specify the
extension the system dials after
translation.
 Do not assign Received
Digits in Program 22-11-01
when using DID Call by Time
Schedule.
2
3


Maximum 24 digits
(default not assigned)

2 - 451
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern –
Received Dial
Define the received numbers for
each Dial-In Conversion Table
(Program 22-17-02, 22-17-03 and
22-17-04).
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
22-17-02
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Start of
Time
Define the Starting Time for each
DID Translation table in Program
22-17-01.
0000~2359
(Time)
(default = 0000)

22-17-03
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – End of
Time
Define the Ending Time for each
DID Translation table in Program
22-17-01.
0000~2359
(Time)
(default = 0000)

22-17-04
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Dial-In
Conversion Table
Number
Assign each time pattern to a DID
Translation Table Entry in Program
22-11.
0~2000
(default = 0)
Dial-In Conversion Table Area
Setup for Time Pattern – Day of
Week
Assign day of week for each DID
conversion table.
1-8
1: Sunday
2: Monday
3: Tuesday
4: Wednesday
5: Thursday
6: Friday
7: Saturday
8: Holiday
(default = 1: On (1-8))
22-17-01
22-17-05
2
3



Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.
To Activate DID Call by Time Schedule:
1.
At any display multiline terminal, press Speaker.
2.
Dial the Dial-In Mode Switching Service Code (Default = Not assigned).
- OR -
Press the Dial-In Mode Switching Programmable Function key (Program 15-07-01, 88, or SC 751
Key Code 88).
3.
Dial 1~100 (Version 6000 or lower)/ 500 (Version 7000 or higher) (table number).
2 - 452
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Issue 12.0
Dial the Time Pattern 1~8.
Table 2-15 LED Flash Patterns
Time Pattern
LED Appearance
Pattern 1
Off
Pattern 2
On
Pattern 3
Slow Flash
Pattern 4
Fast Flash
Patterns 5~8
Off
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2 - 453
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 454
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Description
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group
directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know
which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for
International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL telephone number, the call rings the
operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.
There are 200 available trunks, 64 Department Groups, 512 extensions and 256 virtual extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension DIL. If the DIL is not
answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a Technical
Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales
calls are not answered, they ring to the Technical Service department.
Conditions

If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party
hangs up.

If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as
follows:
1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in Program 22-08.
2. If there is no 22-08 assignment, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments in
Program 22-04 and Program 22-05.
3.
If none of the destinations in steps 1~2 above are available, the call continues to ring until a
destination becomes free.

The DIL follows call forwarding programming, even to voice mail.

When a call is transferred by Call Forwarding – No Answer, Call Forwarding – Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer can display at the transferred extension.

You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier.

If a DIL destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group
programming (Program 22-08 then Program 22-05).


If a user puts the telephone in Do Not Disturb, calls routed to the telephone in DND do not
follow call forwarding.
A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
2 - 455
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Program a name for a DIL in Program 14-01-01. This makes it easier to identify the
incoming call.

If a multiline terminal is busy, a second incoming DIL call provides Call Alert Notification,
depending on chassis programming. The second DIL call waits in line for the user to
answer the call. The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs.

If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call rings the key. If not, the call rings an
available line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates busy.

A DIL rings its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings its
assigned extension. It does not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.

Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer, or DND).
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Department Calling
Do Not Disturb
2 - 456
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Group Call Pickup
Name Storing
Off-Hook Signaling
Paging, External
Programmable Function Keys
Ring Groups
Transfer
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-07-01
20-06-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Class of Service for Extensions
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
To have the DIL ring a key,
program a line key for the DIL
trunk.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3


2 - 457
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-09-01
20-13-23
22-01-04
22-02-01
22-04-01
2 - 458
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – DIL No Answer Recall
Time
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this time
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign each DIL Service Type 4.
Make an entry for each Night
Service mode.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
Assign the extensions that should
receive the overflow to the ring
group programmed in Program
22-08. Set the ringing in Program
22-06.
2
3

Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.




Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
22-07-01
22-08-01
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DIL Assignment
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Set the destination extension
number for each DIL – for each
Night Service mode. The
destination can be an extension
port, virtual extension number, or
Department Group pilot number
(as assigned in Program
11-07-01).
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
For each DIL with delayed ringing,
enter the DIL No Answer Ring
Group. An unanswered DIL rings
this group after the DIL No Answer
Time. Make an entry for each
Night Service mode.
0 (No Setting)
001~100
(Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or VM8000 InMail)
(default = 1)
2
3


Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Press the flashing line key for DIL on the multiline terminal.

Press the flashing Answer Key to put the first call on hold and answer the second incoming call. This
can be repeated until all incoming calls are answered.

If you have Ringing Line Preference, lift the handset to answer the call.

If you do not answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring Group).
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
At the multiline terminal, press the line key for DIL.
- OR -
Dial # 9 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 005).
- OR -
Dial 704 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).
- OR -
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access.
3.
Dial the number.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
2 - 459
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 460
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, if an outside caller dials an invalid extension number
when connected to the VRS Automated Attendant or calling in on a DISA trunk, the following new
options are available to route these calls:

Extension Number (e.g., operator)

F-Route Dial (e.g., outside phone number)
Description
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could
help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the company trunks
for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:

Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk

Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone

Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)

Waits for a second unique dial tone

Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA
trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the extension must have a Call
Appearance (CAP) key to answer the call.
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a
normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when
the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
DISA allows 15 users, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 200 trunks.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 461
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
DISA Class of Service
DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to
control the ability of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the
system, they can be prompted to enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the
password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of
Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class
of Service does not allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options
are:

Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls. Any
toll charge is incurred by the system. The call follows the system Trunk Group Access or Automatic
Route Selection – whichever is enabled.

Trunk Group Access
DISA callers may access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To access a
Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 704 followed by the Trunk Group number (Trunk Groups
1~100). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk Group
Access bypasses the system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 9
access, toll charges are incurred by the system.

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
The System Speed Dial dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the DISA
caller time when dialing. To access the System Speed Dialing bins, the caller dials Service Code
#2 and the System Speed Dial Bin number.

Operator Calling
A DISA caller may dial 0 for the system operator.

Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent
facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.

Direct Trunk Access
DISA callers may select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly access a
trunk, the user dials Service Code #9 followed by the trunk number (e.g., 001). This allows the
DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk Access bypasses the
system Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are
incurred by the system.

Call Forward
DISA callers can set Call Forwarding to redirect extension calls to another extension. Call
Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area.
2 - 462
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 12.0
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
The DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In option allows a DISA/Tie Line caller to break into another extension
user’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the
two parties on the initial call.
DISA Toll Restriction
The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system Toll Restriction. For
example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1-900 service. When an incoming DISA caller
tries to use system trunks to dial 1-900, Toll Restriction denies the call.
DISA Operating Modes
The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or
unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring
Group (called the DISA Transfer Destination).
Department Calling with Overflow Message
If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice
prompt, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free.” while
the caller waits. The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time.
When an extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If
the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time, the DISA call routes to the
overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating
Mode). The Overflow Message requires a VRS.
Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls
You can set up the system to provide a warning tone to DISA callers that have been on a call too long.
The warning tone can be just a reminder (which the caller can ignore) or can be followed by a forced
disconnect of the call. When the DISA caller hears the warning tone, they have the option of dialing a
code to continue the conversation or disconnect.
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes
Users can use a Continue or Disconnect service code. The Continue service code extends the
conversation for a programmed time. If the user enters the Disconnect service code, the call is
immediately disconnected.
Example:
The following example indicates how a call will be handled with the system programmed as follows:

Program 14-01-25: 1

Program 20-28-01: #
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 463
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20-28-02: No Setting

Program 20-28-03: 180

Program 24-02-07: 600 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)

Program 24-02-10: 30 (Used only with manually transferred Tandem Trunk calls)

Program 25-07-07: 600 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA
calls)

Program 25-07-08: 30 (Used only with automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls or DISA calls)
1. An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA
caller).
2. After 10 minutes (Tandem Trunking = Program 24-02-07 or DISA = Program 25-07-07), a warning tone
is heard and the user dials # (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3. After three minutes (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After 30 seconds (Tandem
Trunking = Program 24-02-10 or DISA = Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected.
Conditions
2 - 464

The DISA caller must use an analog (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling
devices that meet the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA
trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start.

The Continue/Disconnect code must be DTMF.

With an analog trunk, the Continue/Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from
the opposite side trunk. With an ISDN trunk, Program 14-01-25 must be enabled to detect
the Continue/Disconnect code.

The Continue/Disconnect code is not accepted while dialing a trunk.

Continue/Disconnect codes do not work if all DTMF receivers are busy.

When used with the Networking feature, both systems must be programmed the same.

In a system with ARS enabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via
ARS.

In a system with ARS disabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes
programmed for Trunk Group Routing.

Transferred calls on DISA, DID, DIL, ISDN trunks, or from the VRS can display the reason
a call is being transferred (Call Forward, Busy, No Answer or DND).

Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for manually transferred Tandem Trunk
calls, automatically transferred Tandem Trunk calls, and DISA calls.

Tandem Trunking also uses the Continue/Disconnect codes DISA uses.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a DSP daughter board for VRS.

DISA can only be set to call forward to another extension. Call Forward Off-Premise is not
supported.

When the DISA/VRS Ring Group Transfer (Programs 25-03 and 25-04) are set to 104
(Speed Dial Bin), the Speed dial is treated as an internal call no matter what Program
13-01-01 is set to. If an outside number is required, the trunk access code must be put into
the speed dial bin.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
Remote Analog DTMF (2500 type) telephones
Required Component(s)
CPU Daughter Board PZ-VM21 and VM8000 InMail (for Announcements)
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Long Conversation Cutoff
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Transfer
Voice Response System (VRS)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 465
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
10-09-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit
Setup
2
Reserve at least one circuit for
DTMF reception (entry 0 or 2).
Use the following as a guide when
allocating DTMF receivers:
 In light traffic sites, allocate one
DTMF receiver for every 10
devices that use them.
 In heavy traffic sites, allocate
one DTMF receiver for every
five devices that use them.
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default:
Circuit/Resource
01~08 = 1 (Extensions)
Circuit/Resource
09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
Circuit/Resource
33~96 = 0 (Not Used)
Circuit/Resource
97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is
installed, 97~160 are
available


11-01-01
System Numbering
Define the system numbering
plan.
Refer to UNIVERGE
SV8100 System
Programming Manual
11-09-02
Trunk Access Code – 2nd Trunk
Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in
Program 11-01 for 2nd (Alternate)
Trunk Route Access.
Dial (up to four digits)
(default not assigned)
14-01-02
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Transmit Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Receive Level
Customize the transmit and
receive levels of the CODEC Gain
Types for each trunk.
Trunks 1~200
1~63
(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in
0.5dB intervals)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

14-01-03
2 - 466
3

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
14-01-13
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
If DISA caller can place outgoing
calls through the system (refer to
Program 20-14 in the Electra Elite
IPK II Programming Manual),
Enable loop supervision for the
DISA trunk. If DISA caller cannot
use the system trunks for outgoing
calls, enter Disable.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
System Options – DTMF Receive
Active Time
After answering the call, the
system attaches a DTMF receiver
to the DISA trunk for this time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-13-23
20-14-01
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
should display the reason a call is
being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – First Digit
Absorption (Delete First Digit
Dialed)
For tie lines, enable/disable the
ability to ignore the first incoming
digit. Use this to make the tie trunk
compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie
line service. This option does not
apply to DISA.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
3

20-01-05
20-09-01
2





2 - 467
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-14-02
20-14-03
20-14-04
20-14-05
20-14-06
20-14-07
20-14-08
20-14-09
20-14-10
20-14-11
2 - 468
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Routing/ARS Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or Automatic Route
Selection (ARS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Trunk Group
Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to access trunk
groups for outside calls (Service
Code 704).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Outgoing System
Speed Dial
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use System Speed
Dialing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Operator Calling
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 0 for the
telephone system operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Internal Paging
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the telephone
system Internal Paging.
0 =Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – External Paging
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the telephone
system External Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Direct Trunk Access
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use Direct Trunk
Access (Service Code #9).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Forced Trunk
Disconnect <Not for ISDN
T-point>
Enable/Disable a tie trunk caller
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect (Service Code 3). This
option is not available to DISA
callers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – Call Forward Setting
by Remote via DISA
Enable/Disable a DISA caller
ability to use the Call Forward
service codes (Programs 11-11-01
~11-11-05).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options for
DISA/E&M – DISA/Tie Trunk
Barge-In
Enable/Disable a DISA or tie trunk
user ability to use the Barge-In
feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

2
3

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
21-15-01
22-01-11
22-02-01
22-04-01
25-01-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Designate the trunk route
accessed when a user dials the
Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code. Refer to Trunk Group
Routing to set up outbound
routing.
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
System Options for Incoming
Calls – VRS Waiting Message
Interval Time
Set up the duration time between
announcing the VRS Waiting
Message for Auto – Attendant &
Queuing. The message is
repeatedly sent out in the
specified time.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 20)
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For DISA operation, set the trunk
service type to 2. You can have a
different service type for each
Night Service mode.
Trunks 1~200
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second
dial tone if no
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching
(default = 0)
Individual Trunk Group Routing
for Extensions
Incoming Extension Ring Group
Assignment
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode
Assign the extensions that should
receive the overflow. Set the
ringing in Program 22-06.
3



Maximum eight digits
Default:
Extensions 101~108
(first eight ports) ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls. No
other extensions ring
for incoming Ring
Group 1 calls.

Select whether the DISA trunk
uses Extension number/Service
code specify or Dial Conversion
Table.
0 = Extension Number
Service Code Specify
(Intercom)
1 = Use Dial
Conversion Table
(default = 0)

25-01-02
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– DISA User ID
Select whether or not the DISA
User ID should be used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1)

25-01-03
VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
– VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
Select whether or not the DISA
transfer alarm should be used.
0 = Normal
1 = Alarm
(default = 0)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2
2 - 469
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
25-02-01
DID/DISA VRS Message
25-03-01
25-04-01
2 - 470
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With Incorrect Dialing
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group
With No Answer/Busy
Assign the source and VRS
message number to be used as
the Automated Attendant
Message for each trunk (001~200)
which is assigned as a VRS/DISA.
0 = No Message
1 = VRS (01~100 VRS
Message Number)
2 = ACI (01~04 ACI
Group Number)
3 = Department
Groups (01~64
Extension Group
Number)
(default = 0)

Set the operating mode of each
DISA trunk. This sets what
happens to the call when the DISA
caller dials incorrectly. The call can
either Disconnect (0), transfer to
an alternate ring group
destination, or transfer to In-Skin/
External Voice Mail, or Centralized
Voice Mail.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
104 (Speed Dial table
Program 25-15-01)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required.
(default = 0)

Set the operating mode of each
DISA trunk. This sets what
happens to the call when the DISA
caller calls a busy or unanswered
extension. The call can either
Disconnect (0), or transfer to an
alternate ring group destination,
In-Skin/External Voice Mail, or
Centralized Voice Mail.
Ring Groups:
1~100
Trunk Ports:
001~200
Day/Night Mode:
1~8
0 (Disconnect)
1~100 (Incoming Ring
Group)
102 (In-Skin/External
Voice Mail or VM8000
InMail)
104 (Speed Dial table
Program 25-15-01)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required.
(default = 0)

2
3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
25-05-01
25-06-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
VRS/DISA Error Message
Assignment
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Next
Attendant Message Number
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Assign the VRS message number
to be used as the Automated
Attendant error message. For
each VRS/DISA trunk that the
VRS answers, enter the VRS
message (1~100) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly.
If you enter 0 (i.e., no error
message), the call reroutes
according to Program 25-03 and
Program 25-04. For each trunk,
you make a separate entry for
each Night Service mode.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
(default = 0)
Set up single digit dialing through
the VRS. This gives VRS callers
single-key access to extensions,
the company operator,
Department Calling Groups and
Voice Mail. For each VRS
message set to answer outside
calls (see Program 25-02 and
Program 25-05), you specify:
 The digit the VRS caller dials
(0~9, , #). (Keep in mind that
if you assign destinations to
digits, outside callers cannot
dial system extensions, starting
with that digit.
 The destination reached (eight
digits maximum) when the
caller dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an
extension, a Department Calling
pilot number or the Voice Mail
master number. A one-digit code
can be assigned for each
Automated Attendant message.
0~100 (0 = No Setting)
101 = Voice MAil
Answers
104 = Refer to 25-04:
VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group with No
Answer/ Busy
105 = Dial the other
extension
(default = 0)
2
3


2 - 471
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
25-06-02
25-07-01
25-07-02
25-07-03
25-07-04
25-07-05
25-07-06
2 - 472
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Set up single digit dialing for
Automated Attendant callers. For
each VRS Message programmed
to answer outside calls, specify:
 The digit the Automated
Attendant caller dials (1~12,
where 10 = 0, 11 = and 12 =
#). (Keep in mind that if you
assign destinations to digits
three and four, outside callers
cannot dial system extensions
that begin with that digit.)
 The destination reached (four
digits maximum) when the
caller dials the single digit
code.
Up to eight digits
(default not assigned)
After answering the DISA trunk,
the system waits this time for the
caller to dial the first digit of the
DISA password. If the caller fails
to dial during this time, the system
drops the call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
A DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring
No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Disconnect after VRS/DISA
retransfer to IRG
From DISA trunk, when the call
may go to Incoming Ring Group
(IRG) of Program 25-03/25-04.
This setting determines the time
the call is ringing in the IRG.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Calling Time to Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the answering waiting time of
the automatic answering
extension when an incoming DID
trunk call is received.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by Automatic
Answering Telephone Set
Set the announcement time of the
automatic answering extension
before an incoming DID trunk
caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Duration Time for Guidance
Message by ACI
Set the announcement time by the
ACI after which an incoming DID
trunk caller is disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
VRS/DISA One-Digit Code
Attendant Setup – Destination
Number
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA No Answer Time
2
3







Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
Determine the time a DISA caller
or any automatically transferred
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can talk
before the Long Conversation tone
is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3600)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
Determine the time the system
waits before disconnecting a DISA
or any automatically transferred
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA Internal Paging Time
Set the maximum time of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
DISA External Paging Time
Set the maximum time an External
Page is placed by a DISA caller. If
the Page continues longer than
this time, the system terminates
the DISA call.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time
Set the time the system waits after
receiving an incoming VRS/DISA
call before the system
automatically answers the call
(0~64800 seconds).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy
extension (and Program 25-04 =
0), the system plays busy tone for
this time before disconnecting.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
25-07-14
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Delayed VRS Answer Time
Assign the delay time from
switching from a normal incoming
status to DID Mode. If this time is
set to 0, the call switches to DID
immediately.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
25-08-01
DISA User ID Setup – Password
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit
password.
Dial (Six digits fixed)
(0~9, , #)
(default not assigned)
25-09-01
Class of Service for DISA Users
Assign a DISA Class of Service for
each user. Assign the DISA Class
of Service options in Program
20-14. The DISA Class of Service
cannot be 0. Program 20-06
cannot be used to assign Class of
Service to DISA trunks.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Function Class = 1~15
(default = 1)
25-07-07
25-07-08
25-07-09
25-07-10
25-07-11
25-07-13
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2
3








2 - 473
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
25-10-01
25-11-01
25-12-01
25-15-01
25-15-02
2 - 474
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Assign the Trunk Group Route
chosen when a user places a
DISA call to the system and dials
9. Set Trunk Group Routing in
Program 14-06. Enable or disable
DISA caller ability to dial 9 in
Program 20-14-02. Assign a route
to each DISA Class of Service
(1~15). The system assigns a
DISA Class of Service to a call
based on the password the DISA
caller dials.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Route Table Number =
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
If the system uses Toll Restriction,
enter a Toll Restriction Class
(1~15) for each DISA user (1~15).
The system uses the Toll
Restriction Class you enter in
Program 21-05 and 21-06. The
Toll Restriction Class assigned to
a DISA call is based on the DISA
Class of Service and user, which is
determined by the password the
caller dials. Program 21-04 cannot
be used to assign Toll Restriction
to DISA trunks.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Toll Restriction Class =
1~15
(default = 2)
Assign the trunk route that DISA
Callers access if they dial the
Alternate Trunk Route Access
Code. Refer to Central Office
Calls, Placing on page 2-275 for
more information on setting up
Alternate Trunk Route Access.
Day/Night Mode = 1~8
Route Table Number =
0~100
(0 = No Setting)
(default = 1)
DISA Transfer Target Setup –
DISA Transfer Target Area at
Wrong Dial
Used to assign a speed dial
number when the wrong number is
received.
Speed Dial bin number
0~1999
(default = 1999)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required

DISA Transfer Target Setup –
DISA Transfer Target Area at No
Answer or Busy
Used to assign a speed dial
number when a dial tone times out
and the target extension does not
answer or is busy.
Speed Dial bin number
0~1999.
(default = 1999)
Version 3000 software
or higher is required.

Trunk Group Routing for DISA
DISA Toll Restriction Class
Alternate Trunk Group Routing
for DISA
2
3



Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes:
Program
Number
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
22-07-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup –
Continued/Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk Conversation
When Program 24-02-10 is set to
disconnect a trunk after the
defined time, determine whether
or not a user should be able to use
the continue/disconnect code.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Continue Code
When Program 14-01-25 is
enabled, determine the 1-digit
code the user should dial (0~9, ,
#) to extend the conversation for
the time defined in Program
20-28-03. If the Continue and
Disconnect codes are
programmed the same (e.g., #),
the system follows the Continue
operation. Using the Continue
code before the warning tone is
heard has no action.
0~9, #, 
(default not assigned)
When Program 14-01-25 is
enabled, determine the 1-digit
code the user should dial (0~9, ,
#) to immediately disconnect their
call. Using the Disconnect code
before the warning tone is heard
disconnects the call.
0~9, #, 
(default not assigned)
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Continue Time
When Program 14-01-25 is
enabled, determine the time a call
is extended when the user dials
the Continue code (defined in
Program 20-28-01).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
DIL Assignment
Assign the master/pilot number of
the voice mail group from Program
11-07-01 as the DIL destination. If
all Voice Mail ports are in the same
unique Extension (Department)
Group (see Program 16-02
above), the DIL rings another
Voice Mail port if its assigned port
is busy.
Extension Number
(maximum eight digits)
(default not assigned)
Trunk to Trunk Conversation –
Conversation Disconnect Code
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2
3





2 - 475
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
2 - 476
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Transfer –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release
Warning Tone
System Options for Transfer –
Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Warning
Tone Time
This timer starts when a trunk
begins talking with another trunk
(for example: Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer/Tandem Trunking). When
this time expires, a warning tone is
heard. If Program 24-02-10 is set,
the conversation disconnects after
that time expires. This timer is set
again when the external digit time
expires. One of the trunks used
must be an analog trunk (or leased
line).
 This applies to manually
transferred Tandem Trunk
and DISA calls.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 1800)
Determine the time a conversation
continues after the time in
Program 24-02-07 expires. If this
option is set to 0, the conversation
is disconnected immediately. This
program has no affect if Program
24-02-07 is set to 0. One of the
trunks used must be an analog
trunk (or leased line).
 This applies to manually
transferred Tandem Trunk
and DISA calls.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 0)
Determine the time the system
waits before disconnecting a DISA
or any automatically transferred
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
If Program 25-07-08 is set to 0, the
call is disconnected after the time
expires. This timer is set again
when the external digit time
expires.
 This applies to automatically
transferred Tandem Trunk
and DISA calls.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 3600)
2
3



Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
25-07-08
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Timers for VRS/DISA –
Long Conversation Disconnect
Time
Determine the time the system
waits before disconnecting a DISA
or any automatically transferred
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
This program has no affect if
Program 25-07-07 is set to 0.
 This applies to automatically
transferred Tandem Trunk
and DISA calls.
2
3
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)

Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2.
Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4.
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5.
Dial an extension.
- OR -
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.
- OR -
Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).
- OR -
Dial 704 + a trunk group number (1~100) for an outside call.
- OR -
Dial #9 + a trunk number (1~200) for an outside call.
- OR -
Dial #2 + System Speed Dialing bin number.
- OR -
Dial 0 for the operator.
- OR -
Dial 701 + an Internal Paging Zone number (0, 1~9, 00, 01~64).
- OR -
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2 - 477
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dial 703 + an External Paging Zone number (1~8 or 0 for All Call).
- OR -
Dial 710 + a busy extension number to barge in to a call.
To forward extension calls using a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2.
Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4.
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5.
Dial the Call Forward service code (as defined in Program 11-11-01 through Program 11-11-05).
6.
Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded.
7.
Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
8.
Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded.
To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call:
1.
An external call connects to an external number (either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by
DISA caller).
2.
After the programmed time (Program 25-07-07), a warning tone is heard and the user dials the
Continue code (Program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation.
3.
After the programmed time (Program 20-28-03), the warning tone is heard again. After the
programmed time (Program 25-07-08), the call is disconnected if the Continue code is not dialed
again.
2 - 478
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Description
The DSS Console gives a multiline terminal user a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks, and
system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call
processing (e.g., attendants, operators, or dispatchers). The
DSS Console simplifies:

Calling extensions and door boxes

Placing, answering and transferring outside calls

Making an External or Internal Page

Switching the Night Service mode

Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer
The DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a multiline terminal user with
a DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker. Transferred and dial 0 calls ring both DSS
Consoles and, if the VRS is installed, the main operator hears the message, “Your calls have been
forwarded”. Central office calls ring both consoles and no message is heard by the operator.
You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes (up to 29 digits long). This provides
the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One-Touch and Programmable Feature
Keys. The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code.
For example, storing 70401 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user
presses the key.
The maximum number of consoles allowed per system is 32. If a Digital Port Connection is used, one
telephone can support a maximum of 32 DSS Consoles. If connected to an IP phone as a side option, a
maximum of one DSS Console is supported per telephone.
DSS Lamp Table Changed to Apply to DSS/Hotline Keys for Multiline Terminals
Using Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 DSS Console Lamp Table, you can assign LED flash patterns for
DSS and Hotline keys on multiline terminals and DSS Consoles.
ACD/Non-ACD Agent DSS Lamping Available
With the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, Programs 30-05-02~30-05-21 allow a non-ACD DSS console to
light indicating the status of both non-ACD agents and ACD agents, but ACD agents do not show ACD
status (Logged In/Out, etc.), only idle, busy, etc.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 479
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
2 - 480

Changing flash patterns for DSS Consoles also changes them for Hotline keys.

When installing a DSS, the system must auto-detect the console for the LEDs to function
correctly. When connecting the DSS to an extension previously defined with another circuit
type, undefine the circuit type (enter 00 in Program 10-03-01 for the extension number),
then connect the DSS Console.

Programmable Function Keys for ACD codes (10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19)
cannot be programmed on a DSS Console.

Programmable Function keys for Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03), and Call
Appearance (CAP) Key (08) cannot be programmed on a DSS Console as the system
does not allow entry of the additional data required for these keys.

A user can use the One-Touch Programmable Function Key (code 01) to have DSS
Console keys for Personal Speed Dial and common and group Speed Dial.

Lighting status for ACD agents and non-ACD agents does not appear on the same console
type. For ACD agent’s lighting status, a DSS Console must be programmed as an ACD
console in Program 30-01-01. For non-ACD agents, the console must be programmed as a
business console.

A DSS key indicates only a Call Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with
Immediate Call Forwarding.

A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.

The DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes. Refer
to Door Box on page 2-515 when programming Door Boxes.

The DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to Night Service on
page 2-1133 when programming Night Service options.

Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection,
Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access.

The DSS Console provides one-touch External and Internal Page zone access. Refer to
Paging, External on page 2-1169 and Paging, Internal on page 2-1181.

You can program the DSS Console keys with service codes to provide the functions of
many of the Programmable Function keys. The stored service code can have up to three
digits, but it can have additional option codes added (e.g. to set Immediate Call Forward for
all calls. Trunk Group (02), Virtual Extension (03), and Call Appearance (CAP) Key (08)
codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the
additional data required.

The capacity of a console can be expanded by assigning a Page key (shift key). The Page
key (shift key) must be assigned on keys 55~60.

The expanded capacity for DSS Consoles (two pages), is not supported for DSS Consoles
in the ACD Monitor Mode.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 12.0
When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they can transfer to another station by pressing
a DSS key for that station. It is not necessary to press Transfer to transfer to another
station using a DSS key.

When a multiline terminal user is on a call, they must press Transfer to transfer a call off site with a DSS
key.

Pauses can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The pause is entered
as P in the dial string and causes the system to wait three seconds before sending the rest
of the digits that follow the P (pause). Multiple pauses can be entered.

The @ can be entered in the dial string of a DSS/One Touch button. The @ only applies to
ISDN and Intercom calls. When using the @, the system waits for the destination to answer
(answer supervision), and then sends the rest of the digits.

Entering a P (pause) in a DSS/One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls, Intercom
calls, or after the @ for ISDN calls.

When the system has the Hotel Motel license (0007), the Message Waiting Indication
(MWI) on a DSS Console for an extension is a Green LED. Without the Hotel Motel license
the MWI on a DSS Console for an extension is a Red LED.
Default Setting

No DSS Consoles assigned (in Program 30-02-01).

All DSS Console key ranges are ports 1~200.

Once a DSS Console is enabled, the console keys are DSS keys (Program 30-03-01).
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 481
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Call Forwarding
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Door Box
Night Service
One-Touch Calling
Paging, External
Paging, Internal
Programmable Function Keys
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
2 - 482
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
15-02-08
20-06-01
20-13-06
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type (B1).
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Automatic Handsfree
Set to 1 for a DSS Console to
have one-touch operation. If set to
0, the user must lift the handset
before pressing a DSS key for the
call to complete.
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic
Handsfree)
(default = 1)
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1~15) to
extensions.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Allow a busy extension user to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3




2 - 483
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

20-17-01
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
Define the extension numbers
which are to be used by operators.
Up to eight digits
(default = 101)

30-01-01
DSS Console Operating Mode
Set the mode of the system DSS
Consoles. The available options
are Regular (Business) Mode (0),
Hotel Mode (1), ACD Monitor
Mode (2) or Business/ACD Mode
(3).
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = ACD Monitor Mode
3 = Business/ACD
Mode
(default = 0)

DSS Console Extension
Assignment – Extension Number
Enter the extension number for the
multiline terminal connected with
the DSS console (up to eight
digits).
Up to eight digits.
(default not assigned)
DSS Console Key Assignment
Customize DSS Console keys to
function as DSS keys, Service
Code keys, Programmable
Function Keys, and One-Touch
Calling keys. The key [when
defined as a DSS/One-Touch key
(code 01)] can have any function
up to four digits (e.g., extension
number or Service Code). The
function information (such as
extension number or Service
Code) would then be entered as
the additional data.
Key Number
001~500
0~99 (General
Functional Level)
97 = Door Box Access
key (additional data:
1~8 Door Box No.)
 00 ~  99
(Appearance
Functional Level)
Define the DSS Console Alternate
answer number.
Alternate DSS No.
01~32
Default:
0 = No Setting

20-13-49
30-02-01
30-03-01
30-04-01
DSS Console Alternate Answer


30-05-02
DSS Console Lamp Table – Busy
Extension
Define the LED patterns for busy
extensions on the DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]

30-05-03
DSS Console Lamp Table – DND
Extension
Define the LED patterns for busy
DND extensions on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]

30-05-04
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Busy
Define the LED patterns for busy
ACD agents on the DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]

30-05-05
DSS Console Lamp Table – Out
of Schedule (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for out of
schedule (ACD/DSS) on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]

2 - 484
3
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
30-05-06
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log Out (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for ACD
agents that are logged out on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]

30-05-07
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Log In (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for ACD
agents that are logged in on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]

30-05-08
DSS Console Lamp Table – ACD
Agent Emergency (ACD DSS)
Define the LED patterns for ACD
agent using emergency on the
DSS consoles.
0~7
[default = 6 (IW)]

30-05-09
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 1 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 7 (On)]

30-05-10
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 2 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 1 (FL)]

30-05-11
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 3 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 2 (WK)]

30-05-12
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 4 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]

30-05-13
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 5 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7[(default = 5 (IL)]
30-05-14
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 6 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]
30-05-15
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 7 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7[(default = 6 (IW)]
30-05-16
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 8 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]

30-05-17
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 9 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]

30-05-18
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code 0 on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 0 (Off)]

30-05-19
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code  (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code  on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 4 (IR)]

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
3



2 - 485
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
30-05-20
DSS Console Lamp Table – Hotel
Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
Define the LED patterns for hotel
status code # on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 5 (IL)]

30-05-21
DSS Console Lamp Table – VM
Message Indication
Define the LED patterns for VM
message indications on the DSS
consoles.
0~7
[default = 3 (RW)]

30-10-01
DSS Console IP Terminal Setup –
MAC Address
Read Only program that displays
the MAC address of the IP
terminal associated with a DSS
console.
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
(Default =
00-00-00-00-00-00)
3

Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console key.

If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1.

If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The assigned extension is...
On
Busy on a call
Off
Idle
Flashing Fast
In Do Not Disturb
Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the flashing DSS Console key assigned to the trunk.

If you do not have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Transferring a call using your DSS Console:
1.
Place or answer the call.
2.
Press Transfer to transfer the call.
3.
Press the DSS key for the extension to receive the transfer.
2 - 486
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
4.
Issue 12.0
(Optional) Announce the call.

If called party does not want the call, press the flashing line key to retrieve it.
Making an External Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console External Page zone key (1~8).

If the zone you want is busy, try again later.

If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The External Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press the DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1~64).

If the zone you want is busy, try again later.

If you do not have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The Internal Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console:
1.
Press the Night Service key.
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
When this key is ON...
The system is in the...
DAY
Day 1 Mode
NIGHT
Night 1 Mode
BREAK
Break 1 Mode
NIGHT 2
Night 2 Mode
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2 - 487
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Using a DSS Console key as a One-Touch or Programmable Function Key:

A user can have DSS Console keys programmed as One-Touch Keys. These keys can be used for Direct Station
Selection, Trunk Calling, Personal Speed Dial, Speed Dialing, and Service Code access. The stored service code cannot
be longer than three digits.
1.
Press the DSS Console key for function.

2 - 488
For example, you can forward your calls by pressing DSS key + 1 + destination. Your DSS key must have been
previously programmed for Call Forward.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Directed Call Pickup
Description
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows
a user to conveniently answer a call for a co-worker from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup,
an extension user can pick up:

Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)

Direct Inward Lines

Transferred trunk calls

Transferred Intercom calls

Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls
Conditions

Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using
Directed Call Pickup.

Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.

Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.

Directed Call Pickup cannot be used to pick up a call ringing at an ACD agent.
Default Setting
Enabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Directed Call Pickup
2 - 489
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Department Calling
Group Call Pickup
Hold
Hotline
Park
Secretary Call Pickup
Secondary Incoming Extension
Transfer
Virtual Extensions
VM8000 InMail
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-12-25
2 - 490
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Call Pickup Own Group
Customize the Service Codes for
direct call pickup – own group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 756)
2
3

Directed Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-12-26
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Customize the Service Codes for
call pickup for specified group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 768)

11-12-27
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup
Customize the Service Codes for
call pickup.
MLT, SLT
(default = #)

11-12-28
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Call Pickup for
Another Group
Customize the Service Codes for
call pickup for another group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 769)

11-12-29
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Direct Extension Call
Pickup
Customize the Service Codes for
direct extension call pickup.
MLT, SLT
(default =  )
11-12-30
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Specified Trunk
Answer
Customize the Service Codes for
specified trunk answer.
MLT, SLT
(default = 672)
20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service to
extensions (1~15).
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
20-10-05
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3




Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:
1.
Pick up the handset or press Speaker.
2.
Dial  .
3.
Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.

If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it answers first.
Directed Call Pickup
2 - 491
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 492
Directed Call Pickup
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Directory Dialing
Enhancements
Directory Dialing with main CPU software Version 3000 or higher provides the following
enhancements:

Pressing the Right Cursor Key twice (on equipped terminals) displays the Common/Group Speed Dial
directory.

Pressing the Right Cursor Key three times (on equipped terminals) displays the Extension Name
directory.
Description
Directory Dialing allows a multiline terminal user to select a co-worker or outside caller from a list of
names, rather than dialing the telephone number. Four types of Directory Dialing are available:

SPD – Speed Dials

EXT – co-worker’s Extensions

STA – Personal Speed Dials

TELBK – Telephone Book
Conditions

Directory Dialing sorts and searches directory names in alphabetical order (based on all
characters entered of the name) when the system starts up or reboots. The system resorts
extension names when:

You change Program 15-01-01 (Extension Numbers and Names).

Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name.

Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed
Dial - System/Group/Station, Intercom Calling and One-Touch Calling.

Extension Directory only shows a telephones/VEs that are connected and have a name
assigned in Program 15-01-01.
Default Setting
Enabled
Directory Dialing
2 - 493
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals with Display and Softkeys
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Name Storing
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Softkeys
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
20-13-51
2 - 494
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name
and number should be listed (1) or
unlisted (0) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3

Directory Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
21-01-02
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Intercom Interdigit Time
If a user waits longer than this time
between Directory Dialing steps,
Directory Dialing automatically
cancels.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
2
3

Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a multiline terminal with an LCD:
1.
Press the Dir softkey.
-ORPress the Right Cursor key.
2.
Press the softkey for the Directory Dialing type:

SPD–Speed Dials

EXT–co-worker’s Extensions

STA–Personal Speed Dials

TELBK–Telephone Book
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled. For example, if your
extension cannot normally use Speed Dial – System/Group/Station, Directory Dialing can not access it either.

3.
Dial letter/number range for the party you want to call (e.g., dial 2 for A, B, C or 2).

You can enter several letters to help narrow the search.

Press # to enter additional letters on the same key (ex: TOM = 8666#6).
4.
Press the Down Arrow softkey to jump to that section.
5.
Press the Volume  or  key to scroll through the list.

6.
If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
Lift the handset or press the DIAL softkey, or press Speaker to place the selected call.

If you selected an outside call, it routes according to your system Trunk Group Routing/ARS setup.
To cancel Directory Dialing:
Press the Exit key.
Directory Dialing
2 - 495
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 496
Directory Dialing
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Enhancements
With Version 8000 or higher software, the number of Tone Patterns has increased from four to
eight.
Description
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status
signals. This lets users tell the type of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching the keys. It
also helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets multiline terminal
users customize their Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely.
For example, if several co-workers set their multiline terminals to ring at different pitches, each co-worker
can always tell which calls are for them. You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash
tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the UNIVERGE
SV8100 Programming Manual for more details.
Table 2-16 Distinctive Ringing: Tones and Flash Patterns
Program
Description
80-01-01~04 Service Tone Setup
Set the frequency of the system splash tone. This is the tone the
system uses, for example, to alert the user of an incoming
voice-announced Intercom call.
30-05-02~21 DSS Console Lamp Table
Set the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy, idle, DND, ACD
Agent status, and hotel options.
Conditions

Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring.

If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~3 or 9~12 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls
follow the ring pattern in Program 22-03-01 and the pitch in Program 15-02-02.

If Program 22-03-01 is set to 4~8 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls follow the
ring pattern in Program 22-03-01.

If Program 22-03-01 is set to 0~12 and Program 15-02-02 is set to 4~8, trunk calls follow
the ring pattern in Program 15-02-02.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
2 - 497
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

If Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup is set to Incoming Ring
Tone Extension, then Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
must have one of the priorities set to Incoming Ring Tone Extension.

The following voice mail features require system tones be changed in Program 80-01-02 to
work. Refer to the Programming section of the VM8000 InMail feature for details.

Call Holding

Busy Greeting

Call Screening

Await Answer Transfer

When a ring group call rings a Single Line Station, the BLF indication shows busy.

The priority of the Large LED is as follows:
1. CO Call Ringing
2. Message Waiting Received
3. VM Message Waiting
4. Message Waiting Set

2 - 498
Program 15-08 is only effective for Virtual Extensions appearing on a station when the
station is set for patterns 1~3 in Program 15-02-02. When Program 15-02-02 for the station
is set to patterns 4~8, Program 15-08 for Virtual Extensions is not used.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Figure 2-12 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
2 - 499
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 2-13 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart
Default Setting
Enabled
2 - 500
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
15-02-02
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Trunk Ring Tone
From the range specified in
Program 22-03-01, select the
multiline terminal extension trunk
ring tone.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 2)
2
3

2 - 501
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-02-03
15-02-35
15-02-36
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Extension Ring Tone
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Message Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Calling Extension
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Message Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Called Extension
Select the extension intercom ring
tone.
2
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
(default = 8)

Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has set Message
Waiting.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 7)

Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has Message Waiting
set to the extension.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 3)

15-02-37
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Voice Mail Message Wait
Lamp Color
Set up various message wait lamp
cycle options for lamp color.
0 = Green
1 = Red
(default = 1)

15-02-38
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Voice Mail Message Wait
Lamp Cycle
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has a VM Message
Waiting set to the extension.
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
(default = 3)

2 - 502
3
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
15-08-01
15-10-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Setup
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring
Tone Order Setup
Assign a ring tone range (0~8) to
incoming virtual extensions
assigned to a Virtual Extension
key (Program 15-07).
When two or more virtual
extensions are set on a function
key on the telephone, and the tone
pattern by which the sound of
each extension differs, the priority
of ring sound is set up.
2
ICM Tone Pattern,
0 = Pattern 1
1 = Pattern 2
2 = Pattern 3
3 = Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
(default = 0)

0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension
Ring Tone
5 = Tone Pattern 5
6 = Tone Pattern 6
7 = Tone Pattern 7
8 = Tone Pattern 8
Order 1 Pattern 0 =
Pattern 1 (default)
Order 2 Pattern 1 =
Pattern 2 (default)
Order 3 Pattern 2 =
Pattern 3 (default)
Order 4 Pattern 3 =
Pattern 4 (default)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

20-15-01
Ring Cycle Setup – Normal
Incoming Call on Trunk
Define the ringing cycle for Normal
Incoming Trunk calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 2)

20-15-02
Ring Cycle Setup – PBX, CES
Incoming Call
Define the ringing cycle for PBX,
CES incoming calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)

20-15-03
Ring Cycle Setup – Incoming
Internal Call
Define the ringing cycle for
incoming Internal Calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 12)

20-15-04
Ring Cycle Setup – DID/DISA/
VRS
Define the ringing cycle for DID/
DISA/VRS Calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)

20-15-05
Ring Cycle Setup – DID/DDI
Define the ringing cycle for DID/
DDI calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)

20-15-06
Ring Cycle Setup – Dial-In in the
E&M Tie Line
Define the ringing cycle for Dial-In
and E&M Tie Line calls.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 12)

20-13-49
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
3
2 - 503
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
20-15-07
Ring Cycle Setup – Door Box
Ringing for SLT
Define the ringing cycle for Door
Box ringing for single line
telephone.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)

20-15-08
Ring Cycle Setup – Virtual
Extension Ring
Define the ringing cycle for Virtual
Extension Ringing.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 8)

20-15-09
Ring Cycle Setup – Callback
Define the ringing cycle for
Callback.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 11)

20-15-10
Ring Cycle Setup – Alarm for
SLT
Define the ringing cycle for Alarm
for single line telephone.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 5)

20-15-11
Ring Cycle Setup – VRS Waiting
Message Incoming Call
Define the ringing cycle for
Incoming VRS Waiting Message.
Ringing Cycle = 1~13
(default = 6)

22-03-01
Trunk Ring Tone Range
Set the ring tone range (1~9) for
each trunk.
0~12
(Ring Tone Pattern
1~4)
(Melody 1~ Melody 5)
(Ring Tone Pattern
5~8)
(default = 0)

80-01-01
80-01-02
80-01-02
(14)
2 - 504
Service Tone Setup – Repeat
Count
Customize the system basic tones
and system service tones. You
need to reset for the changes to
take effect.
0~255 (0 = until
On-Hook)
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the
chassis must be reset for the
changes to take effect.
 Call Screening
 Call Holding
 Busy Greeting
 Await Answer Transfer
1~33
(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time
Slot)
Refer to Table 2-17
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 06 on page 2-505
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the
chassis must be reset for the
changes to take effect.
 Call Screening
 Call Holding
 Busy Greeting
 Await Answer Transfer
Refer to Table 2-18
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 14 on page 2-505
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
3



Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
80-01-02
(39)
Service Tone Setup – Basic Tone
Number
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
The following features require that
the system tones listed below be
changed to match the table. After
changing these settings the
chassis must be reset for the
changes to take effect.
 Call Screening
 Call Holding
 Busy Greeting
 Await Answer Transfer
2
3
Refer to Table 2-19
Basic Tone Table –
Tone 39 on page 2-506

Table 2-17 Basic Tone Table – Tone 06
Tone 06
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
11~480/620Hz -13/-13dB
300ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
300ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Table 2-18 Basic Tone Table – Tone 14
Tone 14
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
10~440/480Hz -13/-13dB
1000ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
2100ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
2 - 505
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-18 Basic Tone Table – Tone 14 (Continued)
Tone 14
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Table 2-19 Basic Tone Table – Tone 39
Tone 39
Unit
Basic Tone
Duration
Gain Level
1
12~440/620Hz -16dB
500ms
32
2
0 - No Tone
500ms
32
3
0 - No Tone
0ms
4
0 - No Tone
0ms
5
0 - No Tone
0ms
6
0 - No Tone
0ms
7
0 - No Tone
0ms
8
0 - No Tone
0ms
Operation
To listen to the incoming ring choices:
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 711.
3.
Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls.
4.
For Intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1~8).
- OR -
For trunk calls, select the pitch (1~8) and the tone (1~4) you want to check.
5.
Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 506
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To change the pitch of your incoming ring (multiline terminal only):
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 720.
3.
Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
- OR -
Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls.
4.
Select the pitch (1~8).
5.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
2 - 507
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 508
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Do Not Disturb
Enhancements
With Version 8000 or higher software, when a call is ringing on an extension and Do Not Disturb
(DND) is set, the DND can be enforced immediately or on the next call.
Description
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to
work by the telephone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND
while their telephone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line
keys. The user may use the telephone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
Five Do Not Disturb options are available at each extension. These options can be accessed via
multiline terminal Softkeys, DND feature key or DND system access code.

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked.

2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked.

3 = All calls blocked.

4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked.

0 = Do Not Disturb canceled.
Multiline Line Terminals display the following to indicate the type of DND that is set.

1 = DND EXTERNAL

2 = DND INTERCOM

3 = DND ALL

4 = DND TRANSFER
Conditions

Do Not Disturb access code is programmable via Program 11-11-08.

If there is no Call Forwarding key (Program 15-07: 10~17), the DND key blinks when the
extension is forwarded.
Do Not Disturb
2 - 509
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Call Arrival (CAR) Key/ Virtual Extension (VE) do not support DND Programmable Function
keys.

Multiline terminal users can activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call. This
option is not available for single line telephones.

When DND and Call Forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If Busy
and No Answer Forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the Busy forwarding.

If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the
forwarded extension hear DND tone.

If an extension activates DND option 4, other extensions can still forward calls to it, but the
callers hear DND tone.

An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension
using any of the following methods:
1. Program 11-12-01 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) – Bypass Call
(default: 707)
2. Program 11-16-06 Single Digit Service Code Setup – DND/Call Forward Override Bypass
(default: No Setting)
3. OVRD Softkey

When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension while the call
is ringing to the user telephone.

DND modes 1~3 causes calls to follow Program 22-08 programming, then Program 22-05
programming even if the extension is forwarded.

When Selectable Display Messaging is set as DND All, all other DND modes are canceled
when Selectable Display Messaging is canceled.

When DND and any Call Forwarding is set, the call forwards immediately.

DND settings are not saved in a PC Pro database.

If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated, the calling
station will receive a busy tone. Call Forward Both Ring is not followed.

With Version 7000 or lower software, when a call is ringing on an extension and DND is
set, the DND is not enforced until the next call.

With Version 8000 or higher software, when a call is ringing on an extension and Do Not
Disturb (DND) is set, the DND can be enforced immediately or on the next call based on
Program 20-09-13.
Default Settings
Enabled
2 - 510
Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Central Office Calls, Answering
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Selectable Display Messaging
Do Not Disturb
2 - 511
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
11-11-08
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) – Do Not
Disturb
Assign Service Code for DND.
MLT, SLT
(default = 747)

11-12-01
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Bypass Call
Assign Service Code for DND.
MLT, SLT
(default = 707)

11-16-06
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– DND/Call Forward Override
Bypass
If a single digit service code is to
be used, assign an available code
number.
(default not assigned)
15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign functions to multiline
terminal line keys (DND = 3).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
20-06-01
20-09-13
20-13-04
2 - 512
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
3


Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – DND
Active While Ringing
Assign when the DND will be
enforced (set at same time a call is
ringing or for next call).
0 = Immediate
1 = Next
(default = 0 for all
COS)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-40
Issue 12.0
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
2
3

Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:
Multiline Terminal Using Softkeys
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press Program softkey.
3.
Press DND softkey.
4.
Press Set softkey.
5.
Choose from the following softkeys:
Ext ICM ALL Cfwto
Ext=Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
ICM=Incoming Intercom, Paging, call forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked.
ALL=All Calls Blocked
Cftwto=Call Forwards Blocked
To Cancel DND – Heading
6.
Do not lift handset.
7.
Press Program softkey.
8.
Press DND softkey.
9.
Press Cncl softkey.
Multiline Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code
1.
Do not lift the handset.
2.
Press the DND feature key programmed in (Program15-07-01 or SC:751:03).
- OR -
Press Speaker and dial 747.
Do Not Disturb
2 - 513
Issue 12.0
3.
UNIVERGE SV8100
Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 747.
3.
Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked
2 = Paging, Incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked
3 = All Calls Blocked
4 = Call Forwards Blocked
2 - 514
Do Not Disturb
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Door Box
Description
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the
door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all
extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the
handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to
have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the
delivery entrance; they answer the Door Box chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can
receive Door Box chime tones.
Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use
these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box chimes, a multiline
terminal user can press the Recall key to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the
electric strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the
contact ratings shown in the following table:
Door Box Specifications
Contact Configuration
Normally Open
Maximum Load
60mA @30 VDC
10mA @90 VDC
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance
50m Ohms
The system can have up to eight Door Boxes. Six chime tones are available.
Conditions

The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD(2)-U10 ADP. A maximum of 56 PGD(2)-U10 ADP
units can be installed in an UNIVERGE SV8100 system. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100
System Hardware Manual for more information.

If a PGD(2)-U10 ADP circuit has a Door Box (doorphone) connected, you cannot use that
circuit for External Paging.

Door Boxes can ring multiline, single line, and wireless telephones. Refer to specific device
features for wireless telephone support of Door Box calls.

A Door Box cannot ring a virtual extension.

External Call forward by Doorphone can forward Doorphone calls Off-Premise while a user
is away. This feature only works for ISDN lines.
Door Box
2 - 515
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Off-hook signaling is available for Door Boxes. If an extension user is on the telephone, the
Large LED flashes indicating the Door Box ringing, and the display shows a call from the
door box.

Each channel in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has a jumper which must be set for Door Box
operation. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for additional
details.

A Single Line Telephone (SLT), connected to an APR does not ring when the Door Phone
rings the multiline telephone.

Dterm cordless and DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification
is shown in the display.

Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a
Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the
line keys in Program 15-07 (751: 62) (Version 4000 or higher software is required).

The door strike relay can be activated from a MH240 terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a
line key in Program 15-07 (751: 62).

The door strike relay can be activated from the recall key on a multiline phone.

The door strike cannot be activated when a door box is forwarded off-premise.

Internal calls to or from a door phone are not included in the SMDR output.
Default Setting
Disabled
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
Related Features
ISDN Compatibility
2 - 516
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Paging, External
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Wireless DECT (SIP)
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
10-03-01
(1)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
10-03-06
11-12-36
Door Box
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
Service Code Access (for
Service Access) – Door Box
Access
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type (B1).
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type.
For DLC package support, set the
terminal type to 8 [PGD (for Door
Box)]. First set 10-03-01 to 0 with
no device plugged into that port,
then plug the device in and the
system should recognize it as a
door box and then set Program
10-03-06.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)
If the service code for Doorphone
Access is not acceptable, change
it here.
MLT, SLT
(default = 702)
2
3



2 - 517
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
15-07-01
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for External
Call Forward by Doorphone (Code
54).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)

00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)


32-01-01
Door Box Timers – Door Box
Answer Time
Set the time a user has to answer
the Door Box chimes.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 30)
32-01-02
Door Box Timers – Door Lock
Cancel Time
Set the time the Door Box strike
stays open when the single line
telephone user hookflashes or a
multiline terminal user presses
Recall.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 10)
Door Box Timers – Off-Premise
Call Forward by Door Box
Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation time for
an Off-Premise Call Forward by
Door Box call. When this timer
expires, the caller hears busy tone
for 3 seconds (fixed time), and the
call is then disconnected.
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 60)
Door Box Ring Assignments
Determine which Door Box should
ring which extension by entering
the extension number. Each Door
Box can be programmed to ring up
to 32 extensions and an extension
can be programmed to ring for
multiple Door Boxes.
Maximum eight digits
(default not assigned)
Set the chime pattern (0~6) for
each Door Box.
0 = None
1 = Door Box Ring 1
2 = Door Box Ring 2
3 = Door Box Ring 3
4 = Door Box Ring 4
5 = Door Box Ring 5
6 = Door Box Ring 6
default:
Door Box 1 = 1
Door Box 2 = 2
Door Box 3 = 3
Door Box 4 = 4
Door Box 5 = 5
Door Box 6 = 6
Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1
32-01-03
32-02-01
32-03-01
32-03-02
2 - 518
Door Box Basic Setup – Chime
Pattern
Door Box Basic Setup – CODEC
Transmit Gain Setup
2
Set the Transmit Gain for each
Door Box.
3



1~63 (-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB)
(default = 32)


Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
32-03-03
Door Box Basic Setup – CODEC
Receive Gain Setup
Set the Receive Gain for each
Door Box.
1~63 (-15.5dB ~
+15.5dB)
(default = 32)
32-04-01
Door Box Name Setup – Door
Box Name
Define the name of each
Doorphone.
Up to 12 characters
(default not assigned)
2
3


Operation
To call a Door Box:
Multiline Terminal
1.
Press Speaker.
2.
Dial 702.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift the handset.
2.
Dial 702.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1~8).
To activate the Door Box strike:
Multiline Terminal
1.
While talking to the Door Box, press Recall.
Single Line 500/2500 Telephone
1.
While talking to the Door Box, hookflash.
To answer a Door Box chime:
1.
Lift the handset or press Speaker.
Door Box
2 - 519
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To Answer a Door Box call while busy on another call:
Multiline Terminal
If you are busy on a call, the display shows the incoming Door Box call and the large LED flashes.
1.
Press Hold to place your active call on hold.
2.
When you hear dial tone, dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box number
(1~8) to answer the Door Box call.

To retrieve the original call, hang up with the door box and press Conf .
Single Line Telephone
If you are busy on a call, an off-hook signal is heard indicating the incoming Door Box call.
1.
Press the Flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold.
2.
Dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus the door box number (1~8) to answer the Door
Box call.

To retrieve the original call, hang up. The original call rings the single line telephone.
To activate Call Forwarding, Off-Premise for a Door Box:

This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks.
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press the External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01 or
SC 751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial the Door Box number (1~4).
3.
Dial the Speed Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded.
4.
Press Speaker (or hang up at the single line telephone) to hang up.
2 - 520
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise for a Door Box:
1.
At the multiline terminal, press Speaker + dial SC 722.
- OR -
At the multiline terminal only, press External Forward by Doorphone key (Program 15-07-01 or SC
751, code 54).
- OR -
At the single line telephone, lift the handset + dial 722.
2.
Dial 0 for Cancel.
Door Box
2 - 521
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 522
Door Box
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Drop Key
Description
The Drop Key abandons a call while retaining the PBX/Centrex line to originate another call. The Drop
Key is provided by programming a Function Key. This feature allows Recall to be used to provide a
hookflash to the PBX or Central Office. A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with
an access code.
Conditions

The Drop Key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO/PBX lines.

The Drop Key cannot be used for internal, DID, or Tie line calls.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
Flash
PBX Compatibility
Drop Key
2 - 523
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
11-12-42
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Flash on Trunk lines
Customize the flash on trunk lines
Service Codes.
SLT
(default = #3)
11-12-59
Service Code Setup (for Service
Access) – Trunk Drop Operation
for SLT
Customize the trunk drop
operation for single line telephone
Service Codes.
SLT
(default not assigned)
14-02-03
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Flash
Type
Select the flash type.
0 = Open Loop Flash
1 = Ground
Always set this option
for Open Loop Flash
(0)
(default = 0)
2



Analog Trunk Data Setup –
Hooking Type
Use Flash for Timed Flash
(Program 81-01-14) or Disconnect
(Program 81-01-15). (A user can
press the FLASH key while on a
trunk call to implement Flash.)
0 = Timed Flash
(Hooking)
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
(default = 0)
Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Transfer Key Operation
Mode
If the Conf key should access
Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0
or 1.
0 = Transfer
1 = Call back
2 = Hook
(default = 0)

15-03-04
Single Line Telephone Basic
Data Setup – Flashing
Enable/Disable Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones.
0 = No
1 = Yes
(default = 1)

15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for Drop Key
(code 84) if required.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
14-02-04
15-02-05
2 - 524
3


Drop Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-06-01
81-10-07
81-10-08
Drop Key
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service for Extensions
COI Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 1
COI Initial Data Setup –
Hookflash Time Selection 2
Assign a Class of Service (1~15)
to an extension.
Set the Flash duration (20ms~5.0
sec) for analog trunk [COI( )-U( )
ETU] circuits.
Set the open loop disconnect
duration (20ms~5.0 sec) for
analog trunk [COI( )-U( ) ETU]
circuits.
Day Night/Mode: 1~8
Class of Service of
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 =
Class 15
All other extension port
= Class 1
2
3

0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 9 (600ms)]

0 = 20ms
1 = 40ms
2 = 60ms
3 = 80ms
4 = 100ms
5 = 140ms
6 = 160ms
7 = 200ms
8 = 400ms
9 = 600ms
10 = 800ms
11 = 1.0 seconds
12 = 1.5 seconds
13 = 2.0 seconds
14 = 3.0 seconds
15 = 5.0 seconds
[default = 14 (3.0
seconds)]

2 - 525
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Operation
To use the Drop Key from a multiline terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press the Function key programmed as a Drop Key.
2.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
3.
Dial the desired number.
To use Feature plus Recall from a multiline terminal with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Press Feature.
2.
Press Recall.

3.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
Dial the desired number.
To use the Drop Key feature from a single line telephone with a CO/PBX call in progress:
1.
Hookflash.
2.
Receive internal dial tone.
3.
Dial the Service Code (Program 11-12-59, default not assigned).
4.
Receive the new CO/PBX dial tone.
5.
Dial the desired number.
2 - 526
Drop Key
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Description
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 KTS. The DTR-4R-1
TEL uses 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS) Technology and must be connected in tandem to a
multiline terminal.

The Dterm Cordless II cannot be used as standalone.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Dterm Cordless II (DTR-4R-1)
Feature
Digital Technology
900 MHz Spread Spectrum
LCD
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Yes
Dedicated Keys
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys
4
50~350 feet
Operational Range 
 Icon
Message Waiting Indication
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
10
 Determined by environmental conditions
Conditions

When a message is received the icon is displayed.

When the RING OFF/ON switch on the right side is down the OFF icon is displayed.

When the battery is low, the
LOW
icon is displayed.

When there is no transmission between the Base Unit and the handset for about five
minutes, there are no LCD or LED indications on the cordless terminal handset. Ringing
off-hook or pressing keys resumes LCD and LED indications.

The ring pattern for the cordless terminal can be selected by system programming and
multiline terminals.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
2 - 527
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When a cordless terminal is ringing, press the flashing function key programmed for DSS to
answer the call.

Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.

A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.

Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without
interference varies.

Multiple Base Units and handset units should not be closer than 20 feet anytime.

Radio interference causes interruptions in conversation. When this happens, your unit is
not defective. When noise continues, move to a different location while you talk. (You might
even need to move the base unit.) When the situation persists, contact NEC Unified
Solutions, Inc., National Technical Assistance Center (NTAC).

Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings have been found to
reduce telephone performance.

Dterm cordless and DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification
is shown in the display.

Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a
Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the
line keys in Program 15-07 (751: 62) (Version 4000 or higher software is required).

The Dterm Cordless Lite II can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV8100 and
Series i Digital Multiline Telephones.

Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is returned to idle.

Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.

The DTL-8R-1 DECT Cordless – only supports connection with DT300 terminals.

DTH-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).

DTR-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).
Default Setting
None
2 - 528
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
System Availability
Terminals
DTR-4R-1 TEL
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA
-ORCD-8DLCA with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
-ORCD-16DLCA
Related Features
None
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
2 - 529
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-02
10-03-04
10-03-05
2 - 530
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-06
10-03-07
15-07-01
20-07-01
20-07-03
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type.
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
2
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)

0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)

Assign a Department Calling key
(46) so extension users can install
or remove themselves from the
Department Calling Group.
Additional keys can also be
assigned for Department Group
features immediate calling
destination (58), delayed calling
destination (59) and DND
destination (60).
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to manually Switch the
Night Mode (Service Code 718).
This option must be enabled for an
extension to display the Night
indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Programmable Function Keys
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3

2 - 531
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-07-05
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
2 - 532
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port
Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase or listen to
VRS Messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
611 to listen to the General
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Define the COS for the SMDR
printout of accumulated extension
data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Define the COS for the SMDR
printout of department group
(STG) data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Define the COS for the SMDR
printout of accumulated account
code data.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension
user ability to set or cancel Caller
ID Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3
2 - 533
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
2 - 534
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turn Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension
allowing force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enable this
option to prevent callers from
changing the call to voice
announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and
screening indicators should be
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Define the COS for call address
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3


Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
20-09-01
20-09-02
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display the name and
number of the extension that
dialed 911.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Define the COS for voice over to
busy virtual extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turn Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy in order for a second
DNIS caller to ring through. If
the destination extension
does not have a line or Call
Appearance (CAP) Keys
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Turn Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3



2 - 535
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-09-03
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
2 - 536
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether or not an
extension displays the Caller
Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turn Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group and ring group calls
(Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turn Off or On an extension
user ability to pick up a call ringing
in a Pickup Group (Service Codes
 #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-10-06
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Universal Auto
Answer (no service code
required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call
on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options (Answer
Service) – Call Pickup Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Pickup to Pick
up Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3

2 - 537
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-07
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
2 - 538
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turn Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise at the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have a call which recalls
from hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk- toTrunk Transfer Restriction
Turn Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-17
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability in a Department Group to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow (0)/ Deny (1) answered
Transferred calls from recalling the
originating extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal (0) for Program 24-01-06,
or extended Park (1) for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restricted
Unsupervised Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer (Tandem Trunking).
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3



2 - 539
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-02
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
2 - 540
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turn Off or On extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turn Off or On extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the Barge-In Speech Mode
or Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turn Off (0) or On (1) an extension
user ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-15
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display the detail state of
called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
user should display the reason a
call is being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. Barge-In must
be enabled if this option is used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3





2 - 541
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-26
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
2 - 542
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
off for this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to change an extension
COS via Service Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to turn Background Music
on and off.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Allow/Deny the extension user
ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
Set this option on for the operator
to use service codes in Program
11-13-10 through Program
11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

3


Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-38
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
which has this option enabled also
hears the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Station
Relocation feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines
if the monitored parties receives
the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable (Off)
1 = Disable (On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number is
Displayed (On) or Not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless II Terminal
3



2 - 543
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-50
20-13-51
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent display which call is from
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name appear in the
directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are Listed (1) or
Unlisted (0) in the directory.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3
Operation
To program the Dterm Cordless II:
1.
Press and hold down  and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red.
2.
Press R/VOL repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key F1.
3.
Press MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line Key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press R/VOL to toggle between /TALK for ON or /NO TALK for OFF.
5.
Press MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2~F4).
6.
After programming F4, press MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press R/VOL to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing ON/OFF (LCD indicates ON or OFF).
8.
Press TALK to exit.

Function keys F1~F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature
(FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal.

When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line Keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing
defaults to ON.

Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any Function key to work with Off-Hook Ringing.
To place an internal call:
1.
Press TALK. icon is displayed.
2.
Dial the Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4), programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
2 - 544
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Issue 12.0
Announce the call after tone burst or wait for call to be answered.
To place an outside call:
1.
Press TALK. X icon is displayed.
2.
Dial trunk access code and number
-ORSelect trunk appearance and dial number.
Wait for call to be answered.
To answer an Incoming Ringing Call:
1.
When the handset is in the charger, lift it. icon is displayed.
2.
When the handset is out of the Base Unit, press TALK if ringing line preference is assigned.
icon is displayed.
3.
Talk.
To place a call on Hold (internal or outside):
With a call in process, press HOLD.

To retrieve a held call, press flashing F1~F4.

After a programmed time, the held call recalls to the originating terminal.
To redial a number:
1.
Press REDIAL.
2.
The previously dialed number is called.
To transfer a call:
1.
With a call in process, press TRANSFER.
2.
Dial Station Number.
- OR -
Press (F1~F4) programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS).
3.
Announce call (optional).
4.
Press TALK to complete transfer.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
2 - 545
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
To place a conference call:
1.
With a call in progress, press CONF.
2.
Place second internal or external call.
3.
Announce conference.
4.
Press CONF again. A 3-party conference is established. When any party hangs up, the
conference still includes the remaining parties.
To adjust ring volume:
While the telephone is not being used, press R/VOL (upper key on left side) repeatedly to select desired
setting display:

Ring Type A High

Ring Type A Low

Ring Type B High

Ring Type B Low

Ring Type C High

Ring Type C Low

Ring Off (Vibration)
To adjust receive volume level:
1.
With a call in progress, press R/VOL to decrease volume.
2.
Press R/VOL to restore normal volume.
To Mute the microphone:
1.
Press the MUTE key (lower key on left side).
Microphone is muted.
2.
Press the MUTE key again to activate microphone.
To use the Charging Unit:
1.
Place handset and/or spare battery in the charging slots.
2.
The Charge 1 LED is on red during and after charging the handset.
3.
The Charge 2 LED is on red while charging the spare battery and turns off after charging is
complete.

2 - 546
If the handset is placed in the charger without an installed battery, the Charge 1 LED flashes.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
To Switch from Cordless to Desk Using Base Unit:
1.
When Cordless II is associated with a terminal, use the Base Unit to switch between Cordless II
and the multiline terminal. Refer to Cordless II Base Unit Controls illustration on the next page.
2.
Press Cordless to select Dterm Cordless II.
-OR-
3.
Press Desk to select multiline terminal.

Switching must be accomplished while both terminals are idle.

A call in progress cannot be switched. When tried, it is dropped.

Switching held calls is not recommended because LED indications are not provided.

The Power LED and the applicable position LED are on to indicate selection.
Cordless II Base Unit Controls
To switch from Desk to Cordless using the Redial Key:
1.
Verify that the Base Unit is in Desk mode.
2.
Remove the battery.
3.
Press and hold  and # on the handset.
4.
Install the battery while holding these keys.
5.
After the handset beeps one time, release the keys.
6.
The handset is in Setup mode.
7.
Press HOLD to display the current mode (Digital/Redial).
8.
Press F2 and then HOLD.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
2 - 547
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.
The handset displays Digital (F8), and changes REDIAL program to Desk/Cordless Softkey
Switching mode.
10.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
11.
Press REDIAL to test this feature.
12.
The Base Unit automatically changes from Desk to Cordless.

This is a one time operation, but one of the F1~F4 keys can be programmed for the redial function.
13.
To restore the normal redial function, enter setup mode, and press F3 and HOLD to display Digital
(Redial).
14.
Press TALK to restore standby mode.
2 - 548
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Description
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Lite Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system. The
DTH-4R-1 TEL uses 900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital) Technology and is connected in tandem to a
multiline terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to switch between Cordless operation and multiline terminal
operation.
Feature
Digital Technology
LCD
Dterm Cordless Lite II
(DTH-4R-1)
900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital)
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Yes
Dedicated Keys
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range 
Message Waiting Indication
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN,
REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
4
50~150 feet
Yes (Icon)
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
30
 Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore,
some interference may take place when operating in the same environment as other
wireless devices which operate within the same frequency spectrum.
Conditions

The Dterm Cordless Lite II can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV8100, and
Series i Digital Multiline Telephones.

Battery Capacity is 700 mAh, 3.6V with a Talk Mode of six hours (typical) and a Standby
Mode of five days (typical).

The battery can be hot swapped while on a call. The battery must be replaced with another
charged battery pack within 20 seconds, otherwise the connection is lost.

The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition.

When a message is received, the message icon is displayed.
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
2 - 549
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals.

A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing.

A spare battery is available as an Optional Available Part. A second battery is not shipped
with the product.

The battery can be charged only when it is installed in the handset and the handset is in the
charger. A stand-alone battery charger is not available.

Environments with many metal parts, metal shelves, or metal buildings are known to reduce
telephone performance.

When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office, they must operate on different
channels and be at least 20 feet apart (including the base unit and the telephones).

Dterm cordless and DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call. Notification
is shown in the display.

Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a
Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or, by a Flash Key assigned to one of the
line keys in Program 15-07 (751: 62) (Version 4000 or higher software is required).

Under certain conditions, HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior. To prevent an
unwanted transfer after placing a call on hold and calling another user, the Line Key for the
call on hold must be pressed to retrieve the call from hold, otherwise the call is transferred
when the Cordless Terminal is placed in idle.

Dterm Cordless telephones do not support the Caller ID List feature.

The DTL-8R-1 DECT Cordless – only supports connection with DT300 terminals.

DTH-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).

DTR-4R-1/2 Cordless – only supports connection with Series i terminals (DTH/DTR).
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
DTH-4R-1 TEL
2 - 550
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Required Component(s)
CD-8DLCA
-ORCD-8DLCA with PZ-8DLCB Daughter Board
-ORCD-16DLCA
Related Features
Cordless Telephone Connection
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-03-01
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B1)
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type (B1).
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
6 = PGD (Paging)
7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD (Doorbox)
9 = PGD (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)
2
3

2 - 551
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
10-03-02
10-03-04
10-03-05
10-03-06
2 - 552
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B1)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B1).
2
0 = Not set
1 = Multiline Terminal
(1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter
(1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Tone Ringer) (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = -- Not Used -(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 1 (Only
Applies to DTH/DTR telephones)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 1.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Optional Installed Unit 2
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for optional
installed Unit 2.
0 = None
1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module
(default = 0)

Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for terminal
type.
0 = Not set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Terminal Type (B2)
3
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
10-03-07
10-03-08
10-03-09
10-03-10
10-03-11
20-07-01
20-07-03
20-07-05
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Logical Port Number (B2)
Set up and confirm the Basic
Configuration data for logical port
number (B2).
2
0 = Not Set
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(Paging/Tone Ringer =
1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
(for Door Box = 1~8)
(ACI) = (1~96)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12 = APR (for B2
Mode) (193~512)
(default = 0)

3
ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Multiline Telephone Type
Read only program that shows the
type of multiline terminal
connected to the port.
0 = DT3
1 = Dterm8
2 = Dterm7
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Side Option Information
Read only command that shows
the type of side module connected
to the terminal.
0 = No Option
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Bottom Option Information (Only
applies to DTL style telephones)
Shows optional adapter
information.
0 = No option
1 = APR
2 = ADA
3 = BHA
(default = 0)

ETU Setup (DLCA PKG Setup) –
Handset Option Information
Shows optional adapter
information.
0 = No option
1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless
Handset
(default = 0)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Manual
Night Service Enabled
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to manually Switch the
Night Mode (Service Code 718).
This option must be enabled for an
extension to display the Night
indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Time
Setting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set the Time via Service
Code 728.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
2 - 553
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-07-11
20-07-12
20-07-13
20-07-14
20-07-15
20-07-18
20-07-19
2 - 554
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Forced
Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an
Unsupervised Conference in
progress.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Trunk
Port Disable
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use the Trunk Port
Disable feature.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to record, erase or listen to
VRS messages.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Play
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
611 to listen to the General
Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – VRS
General Message Record/Delete
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 612
and record, listen to, or erase the
General Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
Define if Accumulated Extension
Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Department Group
(STG) Data
Define if Department Group (STG)
Data is included in the SMDR
Printout for each Class of Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-07-20
20-07-23
20-07-24
20-07-25
20-07-26
20-07-27
20-08-01
20-08-02
20-08-03
20-08-04
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – SMDR
Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
Define if Accumulated Account
Code Data is included in the
SMDR Printout for each Class of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~14)
(default = 1 for
COS 15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – CO
Message Waiting Indication
Callback Number Programming
Enable/Disable an extension
ability to receive CO Message
Waiting Indication.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Private Call
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Set/
Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel Caller ID
Refuse.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) – Dial-In
Mode Switch
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel dial-in mode
switch.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Administrator Level) –
Do-Not-Call Administrator
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to set or cancel do not call
administrator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Intercom Calls
Turn Off or On Intercom calling for
the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Trunk
Outgoing Calls
Turn Off or On outgoing trunk
calling for the extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – System
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using system speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Group
Speed Dialing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to make outbound calls
using group speed dial numbers.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
2 - 555
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-08-06
20-08-07
20-08-08
20-08-09
20-08-10
20-08-11
20-08-12
20-08-13
20-08-14
2 - 556
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Override
Turn Off or On Toll Restricting
Override (Service Code 663).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Repeat
Redial
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Repeat Redial.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Toll
Restriction Dial Block
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Dial Block.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turn Off or On Ringdown
Extension for extensions with this
COS.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension to
force Handsfree Answerback or
Forced Intercom Ringing for
outgoing Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Protect
for the Call Mode Switching from
Caller
When an extension is set to ring
mode for ICM calls, enable this
option to prevent callers from
changing the call to voice
announce mode.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) –
Department Group Step Calling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ISDN
CLIP
Determine if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and
screening indicators should be
allowed.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Call
Address Information
Enable/Disable Call Address
Information for each Class Of
Service.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

3

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-08-15
20-08-16
20-08-17
20-08-22
20-09-01
20-09-02
20-09-03
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Turn Off or On a user Class of
Service from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a call is placed.
If block is enabled, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code 67 (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits (this requires
Program 14-02-10 to be enabled).
If block is disabled, the system
outdials the call just as it was
dialed by the user.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Display
E911 Dialed Extension Name and
Number
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to display the name and number of
the extension that dialed 911.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – ARS
Override of Trunk Access Map
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to override the trunk access
map programming for outgoing
calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Voice
Over to busy Virtual Extension
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to voice over to a busy
virtual extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
 With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must
be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the
destination extension does
not have a trunk or CAP key
available for the second call
and a previous call is ringing
the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless
of this program setting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Caller
ID Display
Turn Off or On the Caller ID
display at an extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Sub
Address Identification
Define whether or not an
extension displays the Caller
Sub-Address.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Outgoing Call Service) – Block
Outgoing Caller ID
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
3


2 - 557
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-09-04
20-09-05
20-09-06
20-09-07
20-09-08
20-10-01
20-10-02
20-10-03
20-10-04
20-10-05
20-10-06
2 - 558
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determine whether or not the
CHECK LIST message is
displayed to indicate a missed call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Signal/
Voice Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to enable Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Incoming Time Display
If this option is set to 1, the
Incoming Call Time is displayed on
the multiline terminal LCD while
the telephone is ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have calls queued if a call
rings the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Calling
Party Information
Turn Off or On and extension
ability to display calling party
information on CCIS calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Within Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing an extension
Pickup Group and ring group calls
(Service Code #).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup (Another Group)
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 769).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Group Call
Pickup for Specific Group
Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup
for a specific group using service
code 768.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Telephone
Call Pickup
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call ringing into
a Pickup Group (Service Codes 
#).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Directed Call
Pickup for Own Group
Turn Off or On Directed Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Meet-Me
Conference and Paging
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Meet-Me Conference
and Paging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

3


Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-10-07
20-10-08
20-10-09
20-11-01
20-11-02
20-11-03
20-11-04
20-11-05
20-11-06
20-11-07
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Automatic
Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Universal Auto
Answer (no service code
required).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Virtual
Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to answer an incoming call
on a Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary
Incoming Extension (SIE)/ Virtual
Extension simply by lifting the
handset.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Answer Service) – Call Pickup
Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to us Call Pickup to Pick up
Callback calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
All
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward
Immediate.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Forward
When Busy
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding
when Busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding When Unanswered
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding when
Unanswered.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set Call Forward with
Follow Me.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Unscreened
Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Unscreened Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Without Holding
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal


2 - 559
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-11-08
20-11-09
20-11-10
20-11-11
20-11-12
20-11-13
20-11-14
20-11-15
20-11-16
20-11-17
2 - 560
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer
Information Display
Turn Off or On an extension
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Group Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Group Hold
Answer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to pick up a call on Group
Hold.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Automatic
On-Hook Transfer
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Automatic On-Hook
Transfer.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Turn On or Off setting up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Operator
Transfer After Hold Callback
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to have a call which recalls
from hold transfer to the operator.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) –
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction
Turn Off or On the Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction. If enabled,
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – VRS
Personal Greeting (Message
Greeting)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to dial Service Code 616 to
record, listen to or erase the
Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call Redirect
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to transfer a call to a
predefined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the
call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability in a Department Group to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
service codes.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Department
Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group
Transfer)


Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-11-18
20-11-19
20-11-20
20-11-21
20-11-22
20-11-23
20-11-24
20-11-25
20-13-01
20-13-02
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Recall
Allow/Deny answered Transferred
calls from recalling the originating
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Hold/
Extended Park
Determine whether an extension
Class of Service should allow
normal (0) for Program 24-01-06
or Extended (1) for Program
24-01-07).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – No Callback
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to receive Callbacks.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restriction
for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to set up a tandem/
conference call automatically
when they hang up.
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Restricted
Unsupervised Conference
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to initiate a Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer (Tandem Trunking).
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – CAR/VE Call
Forward Set/Cancel
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set and cancel Call
Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual
Extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Trunk Park
Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call
is put on hold by an extension.
0 = Non Exclusive Hold
(Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold
(On)
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Transfer Park
Call
Turn On or Off an extension user
ability to transfer a parked call.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Alarm
Turn Off or On the Warning Tone
for Long Conversation (not for
single line telephones).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for incoming calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal


2 - 561
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-03
20-13-04
20-13-07
20-13-08
20-13-09
20-13-10
20-13-11
20-13-12
20-13-13
20-13-14
20-13-15
2 - 562
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Long
Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Long Conversation
Cutoff for outgoing calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turn On or Off an extension user
ability to use Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Message Waiting
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to leave Message Waiting.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Conference
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a conference or
Meet Me Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Enable the Barge-In Speech or
Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to Room Monitor other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Room
Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to be monitored by other
extensions.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal
on ICM Call
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Continued Dialing,
which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Department Calling (PLT No
Called Extension)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to call a Department Group
Pilot.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-16
20-13-17
20-13-18
20-13-19
20-13-20
20-13-21
20-13-22
20-13-23
20-13-24
20-13-26
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Tone/Display (Intrusion
Tone)
Turn Off or On the Barge-In
(Intrusion) Tone. If disabled, this
also turns off the Barge-In display
at the called extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program General function
keys using Service Code 751 (by
default). (Refer to Program
20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Selectable Display Messaging
(Text Messaging)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted
Operation Transfer)
Turn Off or On operator alert when
an extension improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Name
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to program the name.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display the detail state of
called party.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether or not an extension
user should display the reason a
call is being transferred to their
extension (Call Forward Busy, Call
Forward No Answer, DND).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. The Barge-In
feature must be enabled if this
option is used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Group Listen
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Group Listen.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal






2 - 563
Issue 12.0
Program
Number
20-13-27
20-13-28
20-13-29
20-13-30
20-13-31
20-13-32
20-13-33
20-13-34
20-13-35
20-13-36
20-13-38
2 - 564
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Busy
on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, a busy extension can be
called, while someone is talking on
a virtual extension key. Program
20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
off for this option to work.
1 = On
0 = Off
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Allow
Class of Service to be Changed
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to change COS via Service
Code 677.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Paging Display
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to display paging
information.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Background Music
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to turn Background Music
on and off.
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Connected Line Identification
(COLP)
Define the supplementary feature
availability for each extension
Class of Service (COS).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Deny
Multiple Barge-Ins
Allow/Deny an extension user
ability to have multiple users
Barge-In to their conversation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Supervisor’s Position
Enhancement
Set this option to on for the
operator to use service codes in
Program 11-13-10 through
Program 11-13-13.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals
manually sent from a co-worker.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Block
Camp-On
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to block callers from dialing
# to camp-on.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Call
Duration Timer Display
Turn On or Off a Call Timer for the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for COS
01~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Headset ringing.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)


Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Program
Number
20-13-39
20-13-40
20-13-41
20-13-42
20-13-44
20-13-45
20-13-47
20-13-48
20-13-49
20-13-50
Issue 12.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
2
3
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – ACD
Queue Status Display
Turn Off or On the ACD Queue
Status Display for an extension
Class of Service. Any extension
with this option enabled also hears
the queue alarm.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Do
Not Disturb
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to set or cancel Do Not
Disturb.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Voice
Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn Off or On the Voice Mail
Message Indication for an
extension on a DSS console.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Station Relocation.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – Live
Monitor Enabling
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to use Live Monitor.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – MIC
Key Mode While Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in
Call Monitoring Mode determines
if the monitored parties receives
the barge in alert tone when
Coaching Mode is enabled.
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number is
Displayed or Not displayed in the
LCD when the phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Name
should be Displayed or Not
displayed in the LCD when the
phone is idle.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – BLF
Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station
lights when a Normal CO call is
ringing the phone.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) – AIC
Agent Display which Call is From
Determine if the station logged in
via AIC codes shows which queue
the call is coming from.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal


2 - 565
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-51
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Number and Name Appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name
and number are Listed or Unlisted
in the directory.
2
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)
3

Operation
To set up and program the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1):
1.
Press and hold down  and #, then press TALK. The F1 LED flashes red and F1=LK01 is
displayed on the LCD.
2.
Press Ring/Vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (LK) and feature options for function key
F1.
3.
Press On/Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature.
4.
When a Line key is assigned, press MUTE once to enter the Off-Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode.
Press Ring/Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off.

TALK is selected when the F1~F4 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys. NO TALK is
selected when F1~F4 function keys are programmed for functions not requiring an off-hook state (e.g., Log On/
Off or DND.)
5.
Press On/Off MUTE to advance to the next function key (F2~F4).
6.
After programming F4, press On/Off MUTE to advance to Global Off-Hook Ringing Assignment.
7.
Press Ring/Vol to turn Global Off-Hook Ringing On or Off (LCD indicates ON or OFF as
appropriate).
8.
Press TALK to exit.

Function keys F1~F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1~16, Redial (LNR/SPD), Answer (ANS), Feature
(FNC), or Recall. When assigned, these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal.

When initially installed, function keys F1~F4 default to Line keys 1~4 respectively and Off-Hook Ringing
defaults to ON.

Global Off-Hook Ringing must be ON (default) for any function key to operate with off-hook ringing.
Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone
Using the Base Unit:
When the Dterm Cordless Lite II is associated with a multiline telephone the following is applicable:

Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are
idle.
2 - 566
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

A call in progress cannot be switched between the Dterm Cordless Lite II and the associated
multiline telephone.

Switching held calls between the Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone and the associated multiline
telephone is not recommended because line key LED indications are not provided.
Switching from multiline telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone:
1.
Press the Cordless button on the base unit.
- OR -
Press REDIAL from the Dterm Cordless Lite II handset. 
 This applies only if REDIAL is programmed to perform desk to cordless switching.
To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to multiline telephone:
1.
Press the DESK button on the base unit.
For additional Operating Procedures, refer to the Dterm Cordless Lite II (DTH-4R-1) Owner’s
Guide.
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
2 - 567
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 568
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
DTPlusWare
Description
DTPlusWare is a server based XML application that allows NEC IP display phones (DT710/730/750)
access to the following features and options:

View list of received, missed and outgoing calls.

Send and receive Instant Messages to other DTPlusWare client phones.

For the DT750 phone:

Store and display photos.

Store a photo to be used as a screen saver.

View Calendar one month at a time.

Set Presence status for other DTPlusWare client phones to see (requires SV8100 TAPI license).

View list of contacts set in DTPlusWare and on Corporate Active Directory if available.

View current weather for any US city.

Receive bulletins broadcast from DTPlusWare server.

Display World Clock for predefined cities.

When system is equipped with the SMB8000 Multimedia Conference Bridge you can create, view
and change conferences from a client IP desk phone and iPhone.

Change DTPlusWare client login password.

For iPhone users DTPlusWare is available via a local Wi-Fi connection with the following features:

Uses same login credentials as desk phone.

Set Presence status.

View list of contacts set in DTPlusWare and on Corporate Active Directory.

Receive bulletins broadcast from DTPlusWare server.

View list of received, missed and outgoing calls.

Send Instant Messages to other DTPlusWare client phones.

Call the office desk phone.

Change DTPlusWare login password.
DTPlusWare
2 - 569
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Refer to Table 2-20 DTPlusWare OAI/TAPI License Feature Matrix for a listing of supported
functionality depending on whether the SV8100 is licensed for the minimum OAI or includes the
optional TAPI license.
Table 2-20 DTPlusWare OAI/TAPI License Feature Matrix
DTPlusWare with SOAI
License (0123)
DTPlusWare with SOAI (0123) and
3rd Party TAPI (0112)
Available
Available
Basic Presence (Vacation, Sick, etc.)
Yes
Yes
Enhanced Presence (On Call, Phone
Busy State, etc.)
Yes
Yes
iPhone Support
Yes
Yes
Call Event Monitoring
By SOAI
By TAPI
Call Control
By SOAI
By SOAI
No
Yes, via TAPI
Not Available
Available
Need SOAI License Only
Need SOAI and 3rd Party CTI License
Desktop Suite
Available
Not Available
UCB
(Unified Communications for Business)
Available
Not Available
Feature
Basic Functionality
Support for Mobile Extension Monitoring
Events
Incoming Call Popup When Both-Ring
Enabled
Licensing
Conditions
2 - 570

After a DTPlusWare sets Call Forward Both Ring from their desk phone technicians will not
be able to log into Web Pro, PC Pro or Telephone programming for two minutes. This is
because DTPlusWare logs into system programming to set this forwarding.

Main SV8100 software Version 5.00 or higher is required to support DTPlusWare v2.0.

If using the Presence feature before installing the CSTA Server you must install the
appropriate 4.0.0 or higher TAPI driver for the PC the CSTA server will be installed on.
Refer to the NTAC Download site for a list of available drivers and installation instructions.

Before installing the CSTA Server you must install the appropriate NEC SV8100 Connector
software on the PC the CSTA server will be installed on.

All IP Terminals used for DTPlusWare must have firmware Version 4.x.x.x or higher
installed.

Predefined instant messages can only be sent from DT750/Sophisticated telephones.
DTPlusWare
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

Up to 12 Predefined Instant Message Templates are supported per DT750/Sophisticated
user.

For Contact Database pop up to occur on incoming trunk calls Caller ID information must
be provided.

DTPlusWare Version 1.xx does not provide a contact pop-up for caller ID that is restricted
or not provided. This type of call does not allow re-direct to be selected during contact
pop-up.

The DTPlusWare interface supports event monitoring for a maximum of 200 ports.

While SV8100 V4.xx or higher supports time zones for DT700 series terminals when an IP
terminal is in XML mode the time shown will be from the DTPlusWare server.

A maximum of five Redirect Numbers are supported per DTPlusWare Client.

If the extension range is changed in SV8100 programming and DTPlusWare has an
existing user database, then the users will need to be deleted and new users matching the
new extension range added in DTPlusWare.

The Extension number (User Name) cannot be changed as it is read only. The user must
be deleted and a New User added.

Mobile Extension Feature: To be answered automatically and provided internal dial tone
from your extension, the Caller ID must be sent from Mobile Phone to SV8100 for
authentication purposes.

IIS Web server by default responds to HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) URL’s which
are not secure when accessed externally over the internet. It is recommended that any
access via Web/iPhone client over the internet use a secure communication channel (SSL/
HTTPS). Enabling SSL/HTTPS can be changed in the IIS server manager. For instructions
on How to enable HTTPS Service in IIS, refer to Microsoft documentation.

The telephone dial pad may stop responding when a XML graphic popup appears. Under
this condition hang up on the attempted call and redial again.
Restrictions

All trunks used for the System Calling feature must be in trunk group 1.

Trunks not in trunk group 1 cannot be used for the System Calling feature.

All trunks used for the System Calling feature must have answer supervision.

Viewing contacts in the Corporate Active Directory requires LDAP be setup on the
Exchange server.

An iPhone cannot receive Instant Messages (IM) from other DTPlusWare client phones.

During incoming call pop-up, Redirect does not work with a voice call.

When using Desktop Suite and DTPlusWare in the same system, DTPlusWare must have
the TAPI option disabled in configuration.
DTPlusWare
2 - 571
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

When using Desktop Suite and DTPlusWare in the same system, DTPlusWare Mobile
Extension Event Monitoring is not supported.

Windows XP IIS server supports a maximum of 10 concurrent external access users. If
more than 10 concurrent external access users are required, Windows Server 2003 must
be used.

NEC CSTA middleware will constantly reinitialize if a SV8100 server connection is not
established. This is normal operation for the purpose of initialization. While NEC CSTA
middleware reinitializes, CSTA Web client Admin access is only available for configuration.

DTPlusWare Version 2.xx supports a generic “Private” contact pop-up for caller ID that is
restricted or not provided. The pop-up does not contain any caller information, but does
provide the ability to select the redirect during the pop-up.

Windows 7 (32-bit / 64-bit) and Windows 2008 server are not supported for DTPlusWare
server installations.
Default Setting
None
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Required Software
None
Minimum PC Requirements:
The following minimum requirements are necessary for setting up and configuring the
DTPlusWare.
2 - 572

PC CPU: Pentium 4 or higher

RAM: 1 GB

Hard Disk Space: 20GB

Free Disk Space: 500 MB

Network: 100 MB NIC
DTPlusWare
UNIVERGE SV8100


Issue 12.0
Operating System

Windows XP Professional with SP2 (Supports a maximum of 10 concurrent users).

Windows 2003 server (supports over 10 concurrent users, use Win 2003 server if more than
10 concurrent users are required).
IIS 5.1 or higher
SV8100 Requirements:

The SV8100 should have Version 5.00 or higher software.

The SV8100 should have available SIP station licenses for client phones (5101).

The SV8100 should have the appropriate number of DTPlusWare client licenses (0141).

The SV8100 should have the SOAI Interface license (0123).

Depending on desired features the SV8100 should have the Third Party TAPI license
(0112) installed. Refer to Table 2-20 DTPlusWare OAI/TAPI License Feature Matrix on
page 2-570.
Supported Internet Browsers:

Because the DTPlusWare Web Client is a web-based application, an internet browser is
required to access the Web Client Administration/User settings. The following Internet
browsers are supported: Windows Internet Explorer 8.x, FireFox 3.x.x and Safari 3.x.x.
Internet Access:

If Dynamic DNS is not used then an Internet Connection with a Static public IP address or
registered DNS name is required to host the DTPlusWare Application Web Server.

An iPhone can use the Wi-Fi network to access DTPlusWare Web Client services.
QoS for DTPlusWare:
The following IP QoS methods (depending on switch’s QoS capability) should be configured to
ensure proper performance:

Port based QoS: program a fixed QoS value for switch port

IP & ACL & QoS rewrite

Application layer information and QoS rewrite
Related Features
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
DTPlusWare
2 - 573
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Program
Number
10-20-01
11-16-02
15-07-01
2 - 574
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
LAN Setup for External
Equipment – TCP Port
Single Digit Service Code Setup
– Barge-In
Programmable Function Keys
Define the TCP port (0~65535)
when communicating to the SMDR
(type 5).
0~65535
default:
External Device 1 (CTI
Server) = 0
External Device 2
(ACD MIS) = 4000
External Device 5
(SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM
Output) = 0
External Device 11
(O&M Server) = 8010
External Device 12
(Traffic Report Output)
=0
External Device 13
(Room Data Output for
Hotel Service ) = 0
Set one digit Barge In code as 3.
Set up Item 02 for single digit
Barge-In. This allows you to
program a function key with an
extension number plus the
Barge-In code (i.e., 3). This allows
one-touch access to the Barge-In
feature for an extension.
(default not assigned)
Program Call Redirect key (code
49) on DTPlusWare client phones.
Line Key 1~48
0~99 (Normal Function
Code 751 by default)
00 ~ 99
(Appearance Function
Code) (Service Code
752 by default)
2
3



DTPlusWare
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
20-02-09
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Disconnect
Supervision
Set to Enable (1) for DTPlusWare.
Enable/Disable disconnect
supervision for the system trunks.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
20-02-12
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Forced Intercom
Ring (ICM Call Type)
Set to Signal (1) for DTPlusWare.
Enable/Disable Forced Intercom
Ringing. If enabled, incoming
Intercom calls normally ring. If
disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
(default = 0)
Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) –
Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/
E&M Override
Set to Off (0) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On the extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Incoming Call Service) – Call
Queuing
Set to Off (0) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options (Hold/
Transfer Service) – Call
Forwarding Off-Premise
(External Call Forwarding)
Set to On (1) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On setting Call
Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Set to Off (0) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Set to Off (0) for DTPlusWare.
Allow a busy extension to
Manually (0) or Automatically (1)
receive off-hook signals.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 1 for
COS 1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In Monitor
Set to Off (0) for DTPlusWare.
Enable Barge-In Speech or
Monitor Mode at the initiating
extension (i.e., Barge-In initiator).
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Initiate
Set to On (1) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to barge-in on other's calls.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Barge-In, Receive
Set to On (1) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On Barge-In at the
receiving extension (i.e., Barge-In
receive).
0 = Off
1 = On
(default: 0 for COS
1~15)

20-09-01
20-09-07
20-11-12
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-13-10
20-13-15
20-13-16
DTPlusWare
2
3



2 - 575
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-13-24
20-17-01
21-01-03
21-01-18
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Class of Service Options
(Supplementary Service) –
Privacy Release by Pressing
Line Key
Set to On (1) for DTPlusWare.
Turn Off or On an extension user
ability to press a line key to barge
into an outside call. Barge-In must
be enabled if this option is used.
0 = Off
1 = On
(default = 0 for
COS 1~15)
Operator Extension – Operator’s
Extension Number
DTPlusWare client cannot be set
as operator. Designate an
extension operator. This setting
determines which phone will show
the message notification for
outside caller messages.
Up to eight digits
(default = ext. 101)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Trunk Interdigit Time
(External)
Set to 30 seconds for analog
trunks only. The system waits for
this time to expire before placing
the call in a talk state (Call Timer
starts after time expires. Voice
Over and Barge-In are not allowed
until after time expires).
0~64800 (seconds)
(default = 5)
System Options for Outgoing
Calls – Reset Dial After Failure of
Trunk Access
Set to Enable (1) for DTPlusWare.
Enable/Disable an extension user
ability to continue to dial codes or
extensions after receiving Trunk
Busy. This must be Enabled for
this feature to work.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 1)
2
3




Operation
For operation instructions, refer to the user guide for the appropriate telephone.
2 - 576
DTPlusWare
Ecology
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 7000.
Description
Environmental issues, such as global warming or ecology are one of the most important
themes in today's world. The following energy saving features are implemented in this
system:

E
Power Cut Off Mode:
Based on Day/Night mode switching, the system can automatically cut power to
pre-programmed multiline terminals resulting in the system consuming less power. This
feature can also be activated/deactivated via service codes. When the system cuts the
power to the terminal it cannot be used again until power is restored.

Power Saving Mode:
Based on a configurable system timer, pre-programmed multiline terminals can dim the
brightness of all line keys and feature keys using less power. This feature does not
affect the multiline terminal display.

Power Failure Saving Mode:
If the SV8100 loses system power, this feature can be programmed to cut the power to
selected terminals while running on the backup battery. Cutting the power to specific
terminals will help extend battery backup run time. This feature is programmed on a per
station basis and is NOT enabled by default.

When a terminal is in the Power Cut off/Power Failure mode, a user cannot dial any number including an
emergency number (i.e., 911) from the station. The terminal is unusable until it returns from the power
cutoff state.
Ecology
2 - 577
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Conditions
Power Cut Off Mode
2 - 578

Version 7000 or higher main software is required for this feature.

If the V7000 Enhancement License (0036) expires while in power cut off mode, power does
not automatically recover. If this is expected to occur, disable the Ecology mode before
license expiration, or reboot the system to restore power to the telephones.

The system can cut power to digital (TDM) Multiline Terminals by using power save groups.
A maximum of 16 Power Save groups are supported.

The Power Cut Off mode can be set to On or Off on a per group basis. However, Digital
Station port 1 cannot be set for power cutoff. This keeps the terminal powered on for
emergency calls, etc.

If some terminals are on a call when the Power Cut Off mode is enabled, the system will
wait until all extensions on the blade become idle before cutting power to the slot.

Power Cut Off mode can be set to On or Off using one or a combination of the following
methods:

Night mode time schedule/Manual Night Mode selection

Service Code

Function Key

If the system is reset during the Power Cut Off mode, power to all phones is restored when
the phone system comes back on line.

When a phone has entered Power Cut Off mode, any direct calls to the terminal will follow
the stations call forwarding. If the phone is part of a chain call forwarding scenario, the
chain call forwarding will not process while the phone is in Power Cut Off mode.

When a terminal is set to Power Cut Off mode, the DSS/BLF status on keys or the console
will not display any status; including Hotel/Motel and Call Forward/DND.

When a terminal is in the Power Cut Off mode, Callback requests or Camp-On cannot be
set until terminal power is restored.

Call Forward Follow Me settings are not followed when the terminal loses power from the
Power Cut Off mode.

If the terminal has Call Forward Both set and then enters the Power Cut Off mode, any calls
directed to the terminal do not follow the Call Forward settings.

Caller ID history is not updated for a terminal in a Power Cut Off mode. Once power to the
terminal is restored, the Caller ID history will start functioning again.

If the system cuts the power via the Power Cut Off mode while a user is on a call, the call is
not lost. If the user places the caller on hold or park, the user’s phone then switches to
Power Cut Off mode and the call is lost.
Ecology
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 12.0
If the Power Cut Off mode is manually set to On during a scheduled power Off time, power
cut remains in the On state until the next power cut off time, or until the Power Cut Off mode
is manually set to Off.
Power Saving Mode

If the Multiline Terminal is idle or receives no incoming calls for the programmed period,
system activates the Power Saving mode. The Line Key and feature key LED's on the
Multiline Terminal will darken. This feature does not affect the terminal display.

The Power Saving mode can be individually set for each terminal.

Any key operation or incoming call at the terminal ends the Power Saving mode and all
LEDs will return to normal brightness.
Power Failure Saving Mode

The same conditions as Power Cut Off mode exists with the following exceptions:

When the system is in the Power Failure Saving mode, power must be restored to the system
before restoring power to the phones. When in a Power Failure Saving mode, a system reset
will not restore power to the multiline terminals.

Multiline Terminals can be assigned to cut power on a per station basis when the system
enters the Power Failure Saving mode. This feature does not support power save groups.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals

Multiline Terminal (DT300/ Dterm85)
Required Component(s)

CD-8DLCA/ CD-16DLCA or PZ-8DLCB or CD-LTA

V7000 Enhancement License (0036)
Related Features
Night Service
Ecology
2 - 579
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned when programming
this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro
wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of
the system to be properly assigned.
Program
Number
11-10-51
12-02-01
12-02-02
12-02-03
2 - 580
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for System
Administrator) – Power Saving
for Power Save Group
Use to determine the Service
Code setting for the Power Save
feature (On/ Off) in the Power
Saving Group.
MLT, SLT
(default = 731 (NA)/
746 (OT))
Automatic Night Service
Patterns – Start Time
Defines the daily pattern of the
automatic mode switching. Each
mode group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the start time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for default settings.
Defines the daily pattern of the
automatic mode switching. Each
mode group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the end time.
0000~2359
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for default settings.
Defines the daily pattern of the
automatic mode switching. Each
mode group has 10 patterns.
These patterns are used in
Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The
daily pattern consists of 20 timer
settings.
This option defines the operation
mode the system should be in
during each time number.
1~8
(default = 1 or 2
depending on the time
pattern and time
number)
Automatic Night Service
Patterns – End Time
Automatic Night Service
Patterns – Operation Mode
2
3




Ecology
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
Program Name
12-03-01
Weekly Night Service Switching
12-04-01
15-02-18
15-07-01
15-27-02
Ecology
Issue 12.0
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Holiday Night Service Switching
Assign one of the 10 Time
Patterns programmed in Program
12-02-01 to each day of the week.
Assign one of the 10 Time
Patterns to holidays.
2
Night Mode Service
Group Numbers:
01~32
Time Schedule Pattern
Number: 1~10
Day of Week:
01 = Sunday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)
02 = Monday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
03 = Tuesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
04 = Wednesday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
05 = Thursday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
06 = Friday
(default = Time
Pattern 1)
07 = Saturday
(default = Time
Pattern 2)S

Days and Months:
0101~1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1;
1231 = Dec. 31)
Time Pattern Number:
0~10
(0 = No Setting)
(default not assigned)

Multiline Telephone Basic Data
Setup – Power Saving Mode
Enable/disable the ability of each
terminal to cut power when the
system is running on battery
backup following a loss of power.
0 = Normal Mode
1 = Power Saving
Mode (Eco-Mode)
(default = 1)

Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Power
Saving key (code #6) 01 - 16:
Power Saving Group Number
00: All Groups
Line Key 1~48
0~99, #00 ~ #07
(Normal Function Code
751 by default)

Assign power cut or no power cut
for each extension when the
system loses power and runs on
battery backup.
Up to eight digits
Power Save Setup – Power Off
When Power Failure
3
0 = Disable
1 = Enable (Power Cut)
(default = 0)

2 - 581
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Level
Program
Number
20-02-10
20-53-01
20-54-01
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
System Options for Multiline
Telephones – Time Before
Shifting to Power Saving Mode
System-wide timer that determines
how long a multiline terminal is idle
before shifting into the Power
Saving mode.
2
0 = Disable
1 = 1 minute
2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes
(default = 0)


Night Mode Group Assignment
for Power Save Group – Night
Mode Service Group Number
Assigns the Night Mode Service
group number into the Power
Save group.
Power Save Group
Number 1~16
Night Mode Service
group number 1~32
(default = 1)
Power Supply Mode for Each
Power Save Group – Power
Saving Mode
Assign the Power Saving mode in
each Power Saving group and
Night mode.
Power Save Group
Number 1~16
Night Mode 1~8
0 = Power Cut
1 = Power Supply
3

(default = 1)
90-02-02
Programming Password Setup –
Password
Configure the administrator
accounts that are used when
Power cut to the Power Save
group.
Up to eight digits.
Refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual
for default settings.

Operation
Power Cut Off Mode
To cut the power for Power Save Group 2 during the night time (19:00-6:00):
< Program >
Program 20-53-01: Power Save Group 2 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number
Program 20-53-01: Power Save Group 3 Set 1 for Night mode Service Group Number
Program 20-54-01: Power Save Group 2
Night Mode 1: Power Saving Mode 1 (Power Supply)
Night Mode 2: Power Saving Mode 0 (Power cut)
Program 20-54-01: Power Save Group 3
Night Mode 1: Power Save Mode 1 (Power Supply)
Night Mode 2: Power Save Mode 1 (Power cut)
Program 15-27-01:
TEL 101: Power Save Group 2
2 - 582
Ecology
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
TEL 102: Power Save Group 2
TEL 103: Power Save Group 3
TEL 104: Power Save Group 3
Table 2-21 Program 12-02: Automatic Night Service Patterns
Night Group
Mode
Time
Pattern
Set Time
Number
Start
End
Night Mode
1
1
1
0000
0600
2
1
1
2
0600
1900
1
1
1
3
1900
0000
2
The power to TEL 101 and TEL 102 cuts at night.
Figure 2-14 Automatic Night Service
Settings Using Service Codes
< Program >
Program 15-27-01:
TEL 101: Power Save Group 2
TEL 102: Power Save Group 2
Ecology
2 - 583
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Power Off for Power Save Group 2
1.
Press Speaker and dial (Service Code 731).
2.
Dial 02, Group 2
3.
Dial 1, Power Off
4.
Enter the Password (Default: 0000)
5.

Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Power Save group 2 are in an Idle state.

Password is set in Program 90-02-02 (User ID3).
Press Speaker to set Power Off for Power Save Group 2.
Power On for Power Save Group 2
1.
Press Speaker and dial (Service Code 731).
2.
Dial 02, Group 2
3.
Dial 0, Power On
4.
Press Speaker to set Power On for Power Save Group 2.
Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group
1.
Press Speaker and dial (Service Code 731).
2.
Dial 00, Entire Group
3.
Dial 1, Power Off
4.
Enter the Password (Default: 0000)
5.

Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Entire Power Save Group are in an Idle state.

Password is set in Program 90-02-02 (User ID3).
Press Speaker to set Power Off for Entire Power Save Group.
Power On for the Entire Power Save Group
1.
Press Speaker and dial (Service Code 731).
2.
Dial 00, Entire Group
3.
Dial 0, Power On
4.
Press Speaker to set Power On for Entire Power Save Group.
2 - 584
Ecology
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Settings Using Function Keys
Power Off for Power Save Group 2
1.
Assign Power Save key (SC751 code #06) with additional data 02.
2.
Press the Power Save key.
3.
Enter the Password (set in Program 90-02-02 User ID3).
4.
The key turns red.
Power On for Power Save Group 2
1.
Assign Power Save key (SC751 code #06) with additional data 02.
2.
Press the Power Save key.
3.
The key is turned Off.
Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group
1.
Assign Power Save key (SC751 code #06) with additional data 00.
2.
Press the Power Save key.
3.
Enter the Password (set in Program 90-02-02 User ID3).
4.
The key turns red.
Power On for the Entire Power Save Group
1.
Assign Power Save key (SC751 code #06) with additional data 00.
2.
Press the Power Save key.
3.
The key is turned Off.
Power Saving Mode
< Program >
Program 15-02-18: TEL 200: 1
Program 20-02-10: 1 minute
1.
Idle state at TEL200.
Ecology
2 - 585
Issue 12.0
2.
UNIVERGE SV8100
One minute later, LED areas highlighted in red darken at TEL200.
Figure 2-15 Multiline Terminal Darkens
Power Failure Saving Mode
Set Program 15-27-02 to 1 for extensions to have the power cut when the system losses power and runs
on battery backup.
Example
< Program >
Program 15-27-02:
TEL 101: set to a 1
TEL 102: set to a 1
TEL 103: set to a 0
TEL 104: set to a 0
TEL 101 TEL 102 will be powered Off when a power failure occurs.
2 - 586
Ecology
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
E911 Compatibility
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher system software, the 911 Cut Through feature works when dialing trunk
Access+911.
With Version 4000 or higher system software, the Calling Party Number (CPN) sent out has been
enhanced.
Description
IMPORTANT - PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING!
1.
When ARS is NOT enabled and the system allows trunk access by dialing 9, single line telephones
disregard Program 20-03-03 – System Options for Single Lines Telephones – SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk
Lines. This prevents the system from connecting to a trunk until all the digits are dialed. This can be
avoided by using either 8 or 9x (but not 91) as the trunk access code. Be aware that this change requires
additional programming changes.
2.
Do not use  in a PBX access code if the Account Code feature is used. With the Account Code
feature enabled, if this is used in the access code, the trunk stops sending digits to the central office after
the  is sent.
3.
Finally, but most importantly, TEST - TEST - TEST!! Due to the nature of the E911 feature, it is
imperative that when programming this, or any other feature, to be aware of the consequences. Make sure
to test the extensions with the E911 feature to confirm that other features do not prevent the call from
being completed. When using external equipment, make sure the dial treatment tables are working
properly.
E911 Compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency occurs, a user
goes to any telephone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The system built-in E911 Compatibility places the
emergency call even if the user forgets to dial an access code or press a line key. The E911 abilities
include:

Attendant Notification
The attendant receives a notification each time a co-worker dials an emergency 911 call. This
notification is the co-worker’s name and number display optionally accompanied by an audible
alarm. Notification occurs regardless of whether the attendant is idle or busy on a call. You can
optionally extend this ability to other supervisory extensions as well.
E911 Compatibility
2 - 587
Issue 12.0

UNIVERGE SV8100
Emergency Routing
When an extension user dials 911, the system can automatically find a trunk for the call. The
system can choose a route to which the user normally does not have access. If all normal routes
are busy, the system can even disconnect an active call and place the emergency call. E911
Compatibility uses the flexibility of the Automatic Route Selection Call Route Options to route 911
emergency calls (even in systems in which ARS is not enabled).

E911 Outgoing Dialing
The E911 call follows the trunk group route programming. It is possible to use the flexibility of the
Automatic Route Selection Call Route Options for additional routing options.

Forced Disconnect Follows Timer to Disconnect Call
When all lines in the programmed route are busy and the system must drop a call to place a 911 call, the
system waits the time set in Program 81-01 before disconnecting the call.

Calling Party Identification
With ISDN installed, the system can provide the Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from
Station. No additional customer-provided 911 equipment is required.
Uninstalled Trunks in Trunk Group Prevent Call from Dialing Out
By system default, all trunks in Program 14-05-01 Trunk Group are in group 1. When placing a 911 call,
the system tries to access the trunks defined in the group. If the trunks do not exist, the call does not dial
out. For E911 to function correctly, remove any uninstalled trunks from the trunk group.
If Program 21-01-12 : System Options for Outgoing Calls, Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is set
to 0 (trunk access code required), when using the Dial Number Preview feature and dialing 9+911, if all
trunks are busy, the user hears a busy signal and the call does not dial out.
If option Program 21-01-12 is set to 1 (trunk access code not required) and using Dial Number Preview,
911 is dialed, the system disconnects a trunk and dials the call.
Dial Number Preview is when a telephone number is first dialed (previewing the number in the display)
then Speaker or a line key is pressed to place the call.
Conditions
2 - 588

If Program 21-01-10 is programmed with an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk
path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing
an outgoing call. This means that an entry of 4 or higher in this program causes a problem
when dialing 911. Since it is only a 3-digit number, the call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller. This option should be kept at
its default setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 911.

CAMA Trunks are not supported.

If a 911 call originates from a Virtual Extension, the system sends the Virtual Calling Party
Number (CPN) Presentation from Station (Version 3000 and lower software).
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0

The 911 Cut Through feature does not work when dialing trunk Access+911 (Version 3000
and lower software).

The 911 Cut Through feature works when dialing trunk Access+911 (Version 4000 and
higher software).
Calling Party Number (CPN)
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call from a terminal.
Table 2-22 CPN for Standard Calls
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
Off
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
On
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
PRG
21-13-01
CPN: PRG
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-13-01
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
E911 Compatibility
2 - 589
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-23 CPN for VE Standard Calls
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Off
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
On
Assigned
On
On
On
Not
Assigned
Assigned
PRG 21-13-01
CPN: PRG
Terminal
VE
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Assigned
None 
Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
Not Assigned
Assigned
Assigned
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
None 
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
21-12-01
21-13-01 (VE)
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
2 - 590
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
CPN sent when making a 911 call from a terminal.
Table 2-24 CPN for 911 Calls
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
Off
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
On
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
PRG
21-13-01
CPN: PRG
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
21-13-01
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
21-13-01
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
E911 Compatibility
2 - 591
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
CPN sent when making a 911 call from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-25 CPN for VE 911 Calls
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
Off
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
Not Assigned
Off
Assigned
On
Not Assigned
On
Assigned
PRG 21-13-01
CPN: PRG
Terminal
VE
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Assigned
None 
Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
None 
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
21-12-01
Not Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (VE)
Assigned
Not Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
Assigned
Assigned
21-13-01 (Terminal)
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
2 - 592
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Figure 2-16 CCIS Standard Calls
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call across CCIS trunks from a terminal.
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
PRG
14-01-24
Not
Assigned
Off
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
Off
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
None 
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
None 
Off
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
2 - 593
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
20-08-13
Not
Assigned
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
On
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
2 - 594
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Not
Assigned
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
20-08-13
Not
Assigned
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On
Off
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Not
Assigned
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
None 
None 
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
None 
Off
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
2 - 595
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-26 CPN for CCIS Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
20-08-13
Not
Assigned
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On
On
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Not
Assigned
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
On
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01 (SysA)
On
21-13-01 (SysA)
21-13-01 (SysA)
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
Figure 2-17 CCIS VE Standard Calls
2 - 596
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
CPN sent when making a normal trunk call across CCIS trunks from a Virtual Extension (VE).
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Not
Assigned
VE
Not
Assigned
Off
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Off
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
2 - 597
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
2 - 598
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
VE
Not
Assigned
Off
PRG
14-01-24
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Not
Assigned
VE
Not
Assigned
On
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Off
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
2 - 599
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
2 - 600
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
VE
Not
Assigned
Off
PRG
14-01-24
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Not
Assigned
VE
Not
Assigned
Off
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
On
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
2 - 601
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
2 - 602
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
21-12-01 (SysA)
VE
Not
Assigned
On
PRG
14-01-24
Off
None 
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Not
Assigned
VE
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
On
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
None 
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
2 - 603
Issue 12.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-27 CPN for CCIS VE Standard Calls (Continued)
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
21-12-01
Terminal
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
On
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
21-12-01 (SysA)
VE
Not
Assigned
On
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
None 
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysA)
On
21-12-01(SysA)
21-12-01 (SysA)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
None 
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
On
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
21-13-01(SysA:VE)
 The CPN provided is from the service provider.
Figure 2-18 CCIS 911 Calls
2 - 604
E911 Compatibility
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 12.0
CPN sent when making a 911 call across CCIS trunks from a terminal.
Table 2-28 CPN for CCIS 911 Calls
System A
PRG
99-01-58
PRG
20-08-13
PRG
21-12-01
System B
PRG
21-13-01
PRG
20-08-13
Not
Assigned
On
None 
None 
Off
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (SysB)
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Off
Off
Not
Assigned
Off
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
Of
Assigned
Assigned
Not
Assigned
On
Assigned
E911 Compatibility
CPN: PRG
V4000 and Higher
PRG
14-01-24
Off
Not
Assigned
CPN: PRG
V3000 and Lower
PRG
21-12-01
Off
None 
None 
On
21-12-01 (SysB)
21-12-01 (